SM-0006900 - G Pulse 120H Service Manual 27dec2018

Holmium Surgical Laser
Service Manual
Copyright © 2018, the Lumenis group of companies. All rights reserved.
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under copyright

laws, this manual may not be copied in whole or in part or reproduced
in any other media without the express written permission of Lumenis.
Permitted copies must carry the same proprietary and copyright notices
as were affixed to the original. Under the law, copying includes
translation into another language.
Please note that while every effort has been made to ensure that the
data given in this document is accurate, the information, figures,
illustrations, tables, specifications, and schematics contained herein are
subject to change without notice.
Lumenis, the Lumenis Logo and Lumenis Pulse 120H are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Lumenis
Caution: U.S. law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a

physician.
Notes:
1. System and Accessory specifications subject to change without notice.
2. Manual Catalog No. SM-0006900 Rev. G
3. Prepared December, 2018
ii
Use of Manual:
The Pulse 120H system is designed to meet international safety and performance
standards. Personnel operating or servicing the system must have a thorough
understanding of the proper operation of the system.
This manual has been prepared to aid Lumenis-authorized technical personnel to

understand and service the system. Do not operate the system before reading this
manual and gaining a clear understanding of the operation of the system.
Authorized Representative in the European Community:
Lumenis GmbH, Germany

Heinrich-Hertz-Strasse 3
D-63303 Dreieich-Dreieichenhain
Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 6103-8335-0
Manufactured by Lumenis Ltd.

Yokneam Industrial park
6 Hakidma Street
P.O.B. 240
Yokneam 2069204, Israel
Tel: +972(0) 4-959-9000

Fax: +972 (0) 4-959-9050
www.lumenis.com
SM-0006900 Rev. G iii

Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE)
In accordance with Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE), any item which is marked with the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol must not be
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but segregated from other waste types for eventual
treatment and recovery at an approved recycling facility.
By returning waste electrical and electronic equipment via the correct segregated disposal
channel, users can ensure the environmentally sound treatment and disposal of the waste
equipment, thereby reducing the potential for any environmental or health risks that could
arise as a result of incorrect disposal.
Lumenis provides web-based collection, recycling and reporting arrangements to the business
end-user for equipment marked with the crossed-out wheeled bin. Please visit
www.lumenis.com/recycling to understand what arrangements Lumenis has made in each EU
Member State.
iv
Publication Revision Description Date
No.
SM-0006900 A First Release February, 2014
Addition of Gas Unit Replacement,

water refill and draining
SM-0006900 B April, 2014
procedures, calibrations updates
and spare parts updates
Addition of 3-Phase configuration,

SM-0006900 C spare parts update and Safety March, 2015
Chapter labels update
Added Section 1.1.1 FSE Work

Guidelines
Revised Section 2.10 Warning,

Certification and Identification
Labels
Revised Section 3.8 Installation

Report
SM-0006900 D December, 2016
Added Section 3.9.1 Preventive
Maintenance Checklist
Updated Section 7.2.8 Far

Alignment without Oscilloscope
Updated Chapter 10 Spare Parts

catalog
Updated CE Notified Body to 0483
Updated Section 2.10, Warning,

Certification and Identification
labels
SM-0006900 E Updated Section 6.8 Software June, 2017

Upgrade (LPU and Embedded)
Added Section 6.9 Image Update -

Systems with New Service Shell
Updated Chapter 10, Spare Parts
SM-0006900 Rev. G v
No.
Update Section 2.10 Warning,

Certification, and Identification
Labels
Add Section 2.11 EMC

Compliance
Add Section5.17 Moses

Capability
Update Section 6.11 New Shell

Screens for Service
Add Section 7.9 Suction Test
SM-0006900 F Update Section 8.4 Error February, 2018

Messages - Service Mode
Add Section 8.7 HASP Reader

Utility
Add Section 8.10

Troubleshooting Error 38;
Section 8.11 Troubleshooting
Charger Errors 204-209;
Section 8.12 Troubleshooting
Error 11; Section 8.13
Troubleshooting Checklist
Update Chapter 10,

Spare Parts List
vi
No.
Update to reflect new 60Hz 30A
Configuration
Update Section2.11 EMC

Compliance
Add Section
3.6.1 Attach
Voltage Rating Label
Update Section 3.6.4

Connecting the External
Interlock Plug
SM-0006900 G December 2018
Update Section 4.9 Input Power
(1 Phase and 3 Phase)
Add Section4.11 Performance

Envelope for 60Hz 30A
Add Section9.20 Fiber Focus

Assembly and Lens
Replacement
Update Spare Parts Catalog
SM-0006900 Rev. G vii

viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1 Scope of This Manual.................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 FSE Work Guidelines ...................................................................................1-3
1.2 Manual Conventions.................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Applicable Documents................................................................................. 1-4
1.4 Abbreviations and Acronyms ...................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 2: Safety
2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Laser Safety Guidelines............................................................................... 2-2

2.2.1 System Standards..........................................................................................2-2
2.3 Understanding and Controlling Laser Impact on Tissue ............................. 2-2

2.3.1 Wavelength and Tissue Variability...............................................................2-3
2.4 Hazards Associated with Unsafe Laser Use ................................................ 2-5

2.4.1 Burn Hazards ...............................................................................................2-5
2.5 Reflection and Direct Eye Exposure Hazard ............................................... 2-6

2.5.1 Laser Safety Eyewear ...................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Additional Ocular Protection.......................................................................2-9
2.5.3 Fire Hazards.................................................................................................2-9
2.5.4 Electrical Hazards......................................................................................2-10
2.5.5 Working with the Electrical System............................................................2-11
2.5.6 Additional Safety Considerations...............................................................2-12
2.5.7 Protecting Non-Target Tissues...................................................................2-12
2.5.8 Grounding the System ................................................................................2-13
2.6 System Safety Features.............................................................................. 2-14

2.6.1 Emergency Shutoff Knob ............................................................................2-15
2.6.2 Circuit Breaker...........................................................................................2-15
2.6.3 Laser Emission Indicators..........................................................................2-15
2.6.4 External Door Interlock .............................................................................2-16
2.6.5 Protective Housing .....................................................................................2-16
2.6.6 LED Indicator.............................................................................................2-16
2.6.7 Location of Controls...................................................................................2-17
2.6.8 Safety Shutter..............................................................................................2-17
2.6.9 Electronic Fault Detection Circuitry .........................................................2-17
SM-0006900 Rev. G ix
Pulse 120H Holmium Laser System Service Manual
2.6.10 Safety Interlocks .......................................................................................2-17

2.6.11 Precision of Displayed Values .................................................................2-17
2.7 Safety Redundancy .................................................................................... 2-18
2.8 Laser Safety - User Indications.................................................................. 2-19
2.9 Internal Safety Checks............................................................................... 2-19

2.9.1 System Modes .............................................................................................2-20
2.9.2 Holmium Safety Circuit ..............................................................................2-21
2.9.3 Safety Pyro Circuit .....................................................................................2-22
2.10 Warning, Certification, and Identification Labels ..................................... 2-22
2.11 EMC Compliance ...................................................................................... 2-26
Chapter 3: Installation and

Preventive Maintenance
3.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................3-2
3.2 Required Tools............................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Facility Requirements.................................................................................. 3-3

3.3.1 Electrical Requirements ...............................................................................3-3
3.3.2 Requirements for 1 Phase 120W, 50/60Hz...................................................3-4
3.3.3 Requirements, 1 Phase 100W 32A 50Hz ......................................................3-5
3.3.4 Requirements, 3 Phase 120W 18A per Phase, 50Hz....................................3-5
3.3.5 Space and Positioning Requirements ...........................................................3-6
3.3.6 Environment Requirements ..........................................................................3-6
3.4 Unpacking the Unit...................................................................................... 3-8

3.4.1 Grounding the System ................................................................................3-10
3.5 System Setup and Installation.................................................................... 3-11

3.5.1 AC Controller Configuration .....................................................................3-11
3.5.2 AC Controller and Transformer Setup, 1-Phase Configuration ................3-12
3.5.3 AC Controller, 3-Phase Configuration ......................................................3-14
3.5.4 Transformer Setup, 3-Phase Configuration ...............................................3-15
3.6 Main Plug Connection ............................................................................... 3-17

3.6.1 Attach Voltage Rating Label ......................................................................3-19
3.6.2 Filling the System with Water ....................................................................3-20
3.6.3 Connecting the Footswitch .........................................................................3-26
3.6.4 Connecting the External Interlock Plug .....................................................3-27
3.6.5 Adjusting the Fiber Support Arm ...............................................................3-29
3.6.6 Connecting the Delivery System.................................................................3-30
x SM-0006900 Rev. G
3.6.7 Adjusting the Screen ...................................................................................3-32
3.6.8 Connecting the Suction System...................................................................3-32
3.6.9 Plugging in the Main Power Cable............................................................3-34
3.7 Initial System Testing ................................................................................ 3-36

3.7.1 System Startup ............................................................................................3-36
3.7.2 Footswitch Connection Check....................................................................3-38
3.7.3 Emergency Stop Button Check ...................................................................3-38
3.7.4 Fiber Switch Check ....................................................................................3-39
3.7.5 Aiming Beam Intensity Inspection ..............................................................3-39
3.7.6 Ready/Standby Check .................................................................................3-39
3.7.7 Blastshield Check .......................................................................................3-39
3.7.8 Far Alignment Inspection...........................................................................3-40
3.7.9 Centration Check........................................................................................3-40
3.7.10 Power Meter Check - 120W .....................................................................3-41
3.7.11 Power Meter Check - 100W .....................................................................3-42
3.7.12 Setting User Preferences ..........................................................................3-44
3.7.13 Verify License ...........................................................................................3-47
3.7.14 Copying the Calibration Files..................................................................3-48
3.8 Installation Report ..................................................................................... 3-49

3.8.1 Installation Check List................................................................................3-50
3.9 Preventive Maintenance for Pulse120H System........................................ 3-53

3.9.1 Preventive Maintenance Checklist .............................................................3-54
3.10 Shutting Down the System ........................................................................ 3-57
3.11 Moving the System .................................................................................... 3-58

3.11.1 For Shipping the System outside the Facility...........................................3-59
Chapter 4: General Description

4.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Characteristics of the Holmium Laser Wavelength .....................................4-3
4.2 System Description and Main Features ....................................................... 4-5

4.2.1 Laser Console...............................................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Control Screen..............................................................................................4-7
4.2.3 Integrated Suction Pump ..............................................................................4-8
4.2.4 Footswitch ....................................................................................................4-9
4.2.5 Fiber Support Arm........................................................................................4-9
4.2.6 Delivery Systems.........................................................................................4-10
4.2.7 Cooling System ...........................................................................................4-10
4.2.8 Optical Bench Assembly .............................................................................4-10
4.3 Front Panel................................................................................................. 4-12
SM-0006900 Rev. G xi
4.4 Rear Panel.................................................................................................. 4-14

4.4.1 External Door Interlock Plug.....................................................................4-15
4.5 System HASP ............................................................................................ 4-15
4.6 Service HASP ............................................................................................ 4-16
4.7 Software Interface...................................................................................... 4-17
4.8 System Specifications................................................................................ 4-18
4.9 Input Power (1 Phase and 3 Phase)............................................................ 4-21
4.10 Performance Settings Power Table............................................................ 4-22
4.11 Performance Envelope for 60Hz 30A........................................................ 4-23
Chapter 5: Functional Description

5.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Temperature Selection Algorithms...............................................................5-3
5.1.2 Calibration Algorithms.................................................................................5-4
5.1.3 Holmium Calibration ...................................................................................5-5
5.1.4 Warm-up Lasing Algorithms ........................................................................5-5
5.1.5 Pulse Duration Control Algorithms .............................................................5-6
5.1.6 Lamp Performance Monitoring Algorithm...................................................5-6
5.2 System Main Electrical Modules................................................................. 5-7
5.3 HV Subsystem and PCBs .......................................................................... 5-13

5.3.1 HV Flow .....................................................................................................5-13
5.3.2 PCB Card Cabinet......................................................................................5-13
5.3.3 Switching Module (SWM x 4).....................................................................5-15
5.3.4 HV PMCU ..................................................................................................5-16
5.3.5 Safety IGBT ................................................................................................5-20
5.3.6 Charger and Capacitor Bank .....................................................................5-22
5.3.7 Motherboard...............................................................................................5-24
5.4 Isolation Transformer ................................................................................ 5-24
5.5 Input Block (Rear Panel) ........................................................................... 5-27
5.6 AC Controller ............................................................................................ 5-27
5.7 MMCU (Main Controller) ......................................................................... 5-33

5.7.1 Circuit Breaker...........................................................................................5-37
5.7.2 Line Filter...................................................................................................5-38
xii SM-0006900 Rev. G

5.8 LVPS 24V.................................................................................................. 5-38
5.8.1 LVPS Interfaces ..........................................................................................5-38
5.9 LPU (Lumenis Computer) and Hard Disk................................................. 5-39

5.9.1 Display........................................................................................................5-40
5.10 SIS RFID ................................................................................................... 5-42
5.11 Footswitch ................................................................................................. 5-43
5.12 Front Panel................................................................................................. 5-44

5.12.1 On/Off Switch ...........................................................................................5-45
5.12.2 Emergency Button ....................................................................................5-46
5.12.3 Keyswitch..................................................................................................5-47
5.13 Suction Pump............................................................................................. 5-47
5.14 Cooling System.......................................................................................... 5-49

5.14.1 Water Interface of Optical Bench.............................................................5-52
5.14.2 Chiller (Gas Unit) ....................................................................................5-53
5.14.3 Radiator (Heat Exchanger) and Fan........................................................5-54
5.15 Cooling Unit .............................................................................................. 5-55

5.15.1 Water Pump Relay....................................................................................5-56
5.15.2 Water Tank ...............................................................................................5-56
5.15.3 Water Pump ..............................................................................................5-57
5.15.4 Flow Switch ..............................................................................................5-57
5.15.5 DI Filter....................................................................................................5-57
5.15.6 Water Conductivity Sensor .......................................................................5-58
5.15.7 Particle Filter ...........................................................................................5-58
5.15.8 Flowswitch................................................................................................5-59
5.15.9 Ventilation Management ..........................................................................5-59
5.16 Optical System........................................................................................... 5-62

5.16.1 Basic Holmium Laser Theory...................................................................5-62
5.16.2 Optical Operating Concepts.....................................................................5-62
5.16.3 Laser Power Parameters..........................................................................5-65
5.16.4 Optical Bench ...........................................................................................5-66
5.16.5 Ignition Board ..........................................................................................5-69
5.16.6 Laser Deck and Manifold .........................................................................5-71
5.16.7 Pyros & Shutter board .............................................................................5-72
5.16.8 Attenuator Board ......................................................................................5-73
5.16.9 Service Attenuator ....................................................................................5-74
5.16.10 Mirror Motor & Mirror Motor PMCU ..................................................5-74
5.16.11 Green Aiming Beam ...............................................................................5-76
5.16.12 Pyros and Shutter Board ........................................................................5-77
5.16.13 Shutter and Footswitch Safety Circuit....................................................5-79
5.16.14 Safety Shutter..........................................................................................5-80
5.16.15 Beam Combiner Mirror..........................................................................5-80
SM-0006900 Rev. G xiii

5.16.16 Diode Laser Module...............................................................................5-81

5.16.17 Blast Shield.............................................................................................5-81
5.16.18 Laser Aperture........................................................................................5-84
5.16.19 Optical Fiber (SIS) .................................................................................5-84
5.16.20 RF-ID......................................................................................................5-85
5.16.21 Fiber Focus Assembly ............................................................................5-86
5.16.22 Laser Cavity (Brick) ...............................................................................5-87
5.16.23 HR and OC .............................................................................................5-88
5.16.24 Wedge Optic ...........................................................................................5-88
5.16.25 Pyro Detector Imaging Mirror...............................................................5-88
5.16.26 Servo Mirror...........................................................................................5-89
5.17 Moses Capability ....................................................................................... 5-89

5.17.1 Moses Feature Concept............................................................................5-89
5.17.2 Introduction ..............................................................................................5-90
5.17.3 Moses Fibers and Hardware ....................................................................5-91
Chapter 6: Software
6.1 General......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Software Features ........................................................................................ 6-2
6.3 User Mode ................................................................................................... 6-2

6.3.1 User Software Functions ..............................................................................6-2
6.4 System States ............................................................................................... 6-5

6.4.1 Power ON State ............................................................................................6-6
6.4.2 Charger subsystem self-test (550/650/800V): ..............................................6-9
6.4.3 STANDBY State ..........................................................................................6-11
6.4.4 READY State...............................................................................................6-12
6.4.5 LASING State .............................................................................................6-14
6.4.6 IDLE State ..................................................................................................6-15
6.5 Service Mode ............................................................................................. 6-18

6.5.1 Accessing Service Mode .............................................................................6-19
6.5.2 Quick Settings for Service ..........................................................................6-23
6.5.3 Settings and Utilities Screen.......................................................................6-24
6.5.4 Service States..............................................................................................6-39
6.5.5 Service Main Screen ...................................................................................6-41
6.5.6 Self Test Screens.........................................................................................6-42
6.6 Sub-Systems Screen................................................................................... 6-43

6.6.1 Additional Self Test ....................................................................................6-44
6.6.2 Switching Module (SWM)...........................................................................6-44
6.6.3 Charger Screen...........................................................................................6-46
6.6.4 Cooling Screen ...........................................................................................6-48
6.6.5 Laser Deck Screen - Shutter Tab................................................................6-49
xiv SM-0006900 Rev. G

6.6.6 Laser Deck Screen - Aiming Beam Test .....................................................6-50
6.6.7 Laser Deck Screen - Servo Motor Test.......................................................6-51
6.6.8 External Indicators Screen .........................................................................6-52
6.6.9 LVPS Screen ...............................................................................................6-53
6.6.10 Suction Control Screen.............................................................................6-54
6.7 Lasing Control Screens.............................................................................. 6-55

6.7.1 Calibration Screen-Holmium Laser Cal ....................................................6-59
6.7.2 Calibration Screen-Holmium Attenuator Cal ............................................6-64
6.7.3 Calibration Screen-Aiming Beam Calibration...........................................6-65
6.7.4 Calibration Screen-Potentiometer Cal.......................................................6-66
6.7.5 Calibration Screen-Servo Motor Cal .........................................................6-67
6.7.6 Servo Motor Calibration Screen ................................................................6-68
6.7.7 Servo Auto-Tune Procedure .......................................................................6-68
6.7.8 SIS Screen...................................................................................................6-70
6.7.9 System Configuration Screen .....................................................................6-72
6.8 Software Upgrade (LPU and Embedded) to V2.0.1.7 ............................... 6-73

6.8.1 Image, LPU, and Embedded Update..........................................................6-73
6.8.2 CRC Validator............................................................................................6-76
6.8.3 Image Update .............................................................................................6-81
6.9 Image Update-Systems with New Service Shell ....................................... 6-90

6.9.1 LPU Software Update ................................................................................6-98
6.9.2 Embedded Firmware Update ...................................................................6-104
6.9.3 Post Installation Steps ..............................................................................6-120
6.9.4 HASP Authorization for the system with New LPU/Hard Disk................6-123
6.9.5 Installation Verification ...........................................................................6-125
6.10 Chiller Firmware Update ........................................................................ 6-127
6.11 New Shell Screens for Service ................................................................ 6-138

6.11.1 Accessing Main Service screen ..............................................................6-138
6.11.2 System Information Tab..........................................................................6-138
6.11.3 Licenses Tab ...........................................................................................6-139
6.11.4 System Identification Operations ...........................................................6-140
6.11.5 Applications Installations Tab................................................................6-141
6.11.6 Image Update Tab ..................................................................................6-142
6.11.7 General Tab............................................................................................6-143
6.11.8 New System Update Operations Screen .................................................6-144
Chapter 7: Calibrations, Alignments &

Adjustments
7.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Optical Alignment ....................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 Holmium Channel Alignment .......................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Making Test Burns........................................................................................7-3
SM-0006900 Rev. G xv
7.2.3 Adjusting the Holmium Channel Optics .......................................................7-7

7.2.4 Resonator Alignment ..................................................................................7-10
7.2.5 Quality Laser Head Check .........................................................................7-13
7.2.6 Near Alignment...........................................................................................7-14
7.2.7 Near Alignment Without Wedge Tool.........................................................7-15
7.2.8 Far Alignment.............................................................................................7-18
7.2.9 Far Alignment - without Oscilloscope........................................................7-19
7.2.10 Final Optical Inspection...........................................................................7-22
7.2.11 Optical Transmission Adjustment ............................................................7-23
7.3 Electronic Adjustment ............................................................................... 7-24

7.3.1 Pyro Detector Adjustment ..........................................................................7-24
7.3.2 Calibration and Offset Adjustment.............................................................7-25
7.3.3 Final Aiming Beam Check..........................................................................7-30
7.4 Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration ........ 7-31
7.5 Servo Mirror Calibration ........................................................................... 7-33

7.5.1 Optical Alignment with Fiber Alignment Tool ...........................................7-39
7.5.2 Aiming Beam Intensity Check.....................................................................7-45
7.5.3 Calibrating the Backlight Tool...................................................................7-46
7.6 1st and 2nd Turning Mirror Replacement and Adjustment ....................... 7-49
7.6.1 1st 45° Turning Mirror Replacement .........................................................7-50
7.6.2 2nd 45° Turning Mirror Replacement........................................................7-52
7.7 Cleaning Optical Bench Components........................................................ 7-53
7.8 Servo Motor Auto-Tune Procedure ........................................................... 7-56
7.9 Suction Test ............................................................................................... 7-58

7.9.1 Suction Test Kit Setup.................................................................................7-58
7.9.2 Suction Test ................................................................................................7-63
7.9.3 .Troubleshooting Suction Operation ..........................................................7-65
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
8.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Troubleshooting Guide Sections ..................................................................8-2
8.2 Handling Error Messages and Notifications................................................ 8-3
8.3 Error Messages ............................................................................................ 8-4

8.3.1 Errors - User Mode ......................................................................................8-4
8.3.2 Power On Failure.........................................................................................8-5
8.3.3 Hard Disk Failure ........................................................................................8-5
8.4 Error Messages - Service Mode................................................................... 8-5
xvi SM-0006900 Rev. G

8.4.1 Error List......................................................................................................8-6
8.5 LPU Errors................................................................................................. 8-22
8.6 Errors with No Error Number.................................................................... 8-28
8.7 HASP Reader Utility ................................................................................. 8-29
8.8 Debris Shield Maintenance........................................................................ 8-38
8.9 Troubleshooting Gas Unit (Chiller) Errors................................................ 8-42
8.10 Troubleshooting Error 38 .......................................................................... 8-44
8.11 Troubleshooting Charger Errors

204-2098-46
8.12 Troubleshooting Error 11 .......................................................................... 8-48
8.13 Troubleshooting Checklist......................................................................... 8-50

8.13.1 Optics and Optics Related Components...................................................8-50
8.13.2 PCBs.........................................................................................................8-51
8.13.3 High Voltage Cabinet PCBs.....................................................................8-51
Chapter 9: Module Replacement

9.1 Introduction.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Covers .......................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2.1 Opening the Right/Left Side Cover...............................................................9-3
9.2.2 Removing the Top Cover ..............................................................................9-4
9.2.3 Opening the Upper Front Cover ..................................................................9-6
9.2.4 Lower Front Cover Removal........................................................................9-8
9.2.5 Removing the Optical Bench Cover ...........................................................9-10
9.3 Water Draining Procedure ......................................................................... 9-11

9.3.1 Introduction and Tools ...............................................................................9-11
9.3.2 Draining Water from the Optical Bench ....................................................9-13
9.3.3 Draining Water from the Gas Unit.............................................................9-15
9.3.4 Draining Water from the Cooling System ..................................................9-16
9.4 Charger Replacement................................................................................. 9-19

9.4.1 Removal ......................................................................................................9-19
9.4.2 Charger Installation ...................................................................................9-22
9.4.3 Speaker Replacement .................................................................................9-22
9.5 Capacitor Bank Replacement .................................................................... 9-23
SM-0006900 Rev. G xvii

9.5.1 Removal ......................................................................................................9-24

9.5.2 Installation..................................................................................................9-25
9.6 LVPS Replacement.................................................................................... 9-26

9.6.1 LVPS Removal............................................................................................9-26
9.6.2 DC/DC Board Replacement .......................................................................9-33
9.7 Main Controller (MMCU) Replacement ................................................... 9-34
9.8 LPU (Lumenis Computer) and Hard Disk Replacement........................... 9-37

9.8.1 LPU Removal .............................................................................................9-37
9.8.2 Hard Disk Replacement..............................................................................9-39
9.9 SIS Board Replacement............................................................................. 9-42

9.9.1 Removal ......................................................................................................9-42
9.10 AC Controller Board Replacement............................................................ 9-43

9.10.1 AC Controller Board Removal .................................................................9-43
9.10.2 Installation................................................................................................9-44
9.11 Circuit Breaker Replacement..................................................................... 9-44
9.12 HV Cabinet Replacement .......................................................................... 9-45

9.12.1 Mirror Motor Control Board Replacement..............................................9-51
9.12.2 Fan Replacement - Console Bottom.........................................................9-52
9.13 RF ID Antenna Replacement..................................................................... 9-54

9.13.1 Removal ....................................................................................................9-54
9.13.2 Installation................................................................................................9-54
9.14 Display Assembly Replacement ................................................................ 9-54

9.14.1 Display Assembly Replacement with Arm ................................................9-54
9.14.2 Pump Head Replacement .........................................................................9-58
9.15 Gas Unit Replacement ............................................................................... 9-60

9.15.1 Modified Gas Unit Cart............................................................................9-76
9.16 Cooling System Components Replacement .............................................. 9-82

9.16.1 Particle Filter Replacement .....................................................................9-83
9.16.2 Deionizer Filter Replacement ..................................................................9-84
9.16.3 Water Tank Replacement..........................................................................9-87
9.16.4 Water Conductivity Sensor .......................................................................9-88
9.17 Holmium Brick Replacement .................................................................... 9-88
9.18 Flashlamp Replacement............................................................................ 9-90

9.18.1 Removal ....................................................................................................9-90
9.18.2 Installation................................................................................................9-90
xviii SM-0006900 Rev. G

9.19 Crystal Rod Replacement .......................................................................... 9-91
9.19.1 Removal ....................................................................................................9-92
9.19.2 Installation................................................................................................9-92
9.20 Fiber Focus Assembly and Lens Replacement.......................................... 9-95
Chapter 10: Spare Parts Catalog

10.1 Introduction................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Electronic Components.............................................................................. 10-2
10.3 Display....................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Spare Parts, 3-Phase Configuration ........................................................... 10-9
10.5 Optics....................................................................................................... 10-10
10.6 Cooling System........................................................................................ 10-16
10.7 User Replacements .................................................................................. 10-18
10.8 Covers and Chassis Parts ......................................................................... 10-20
10.9 Special Tools ........................................................................................... 10-22
SM-0006900 Rev. G xix

xx SM-0006900 Rev. G
LIST OF FIGURES
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: Safety
Figure 2-1 Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance ........................................ 2-7
Figure 2-2 Minimum Optical Density ................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-3 System State LED .............................................................. 2-16
Figure 2-4 Holmium Safety Circuit ..................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-5 Location of Warning, Identification and Certification Labels 2-
23
Chapter 3: Installation and

Preventive Maintenance
Figure 3-1 System Dimensions.............................................................. 3-6
Figure 3-2 Shock Indicator Label .......................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-3 Unpacking Lumenis Pulse 120H.......................................... 3-9
Figure 3-4 Brake Pedals Configurations.............................................. 3-10
Figure 3-5 AC Controller - Open for Installation ................................ 3-12
Figure 3-6 Voltage Selection ............................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-7 Jumper on J8: Configuration, 1-Phase ............................... 3-13
Figure 3-8 Main Transformer Line Voltage ........................................ 3-13
Figure 3-9 Jumper on J8: Configuration, 3-Phase ............................... 3-14
Figure 3-10 AC Inlet from Main Contactor to Main Trafo ................. 3-15
Figure 3-11 Line Voltage Layout, 400VAC ........................................ 3-16
Figure 3-12 Voltage Configuration Chart............................................ 3-16
Figure 3-13 Power Cord - Domestic Configuration ............................ 3-18
Figure 3-14 Power Cord - International/100W Configuration ............ 3-18
Figure 3-15 Power Cord - International/120W Configuration ............ 3-18
Figure 3-16 Power Cord - 3 Phase Configuration ............................... 3-19
Figure 3-17 Voltage Rating Labels and Location................................ 3-20
Figure 3-18 Circuit Breaker Location.................................................. 3-21
Figure 3-19 Cooling Unit Water Connections ..................................... 3-21
Figure 3-20 Assemble Water Filling Tool ........................................... 3-22
Figure 3-21 Connecting Water Filling Tool to Water Tank ................ 3-22
Figure 3-22 HASP Detected Message ................................................. 3-23
Figure 3-23 Sub-system - Cooling Screen ........................................... 3-24
Figure 3-24 Particle Filter Lever ......................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-25 Air Valve Location on Water Tank.................................. 3-26
Figure 3-26 Connecting the Footswitch............................................... 3-26
Figure 3-27 Connecting the External Door Interlock .......................... 3-27
Figure 3-28 Interlock Plug-Remove Single Screw .............................. 3-28
Figure 3-29 Disconnect Jumper Wires from Interlock Plug................ 3-28
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxi

Figure 3-30 Pin Assignments-External Switch.................................... 3-29

Figure 3-31 Adjusting the Fiber Support Arm..................................... 3-29
Figure 3-32 Fiber Port.......................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-33 Fiber Delivery System Connected ................................... 3-32
Figure 3-34 Adjusting the Screen ........................................................ 3-32
Figure 3-35 Suction System................................................................. 3-33
Figure 3-36 Pulling Open the Suction Pump ....................................... 3-33
Figure 3-37 Directional Arrow for the Aspiration Tube...................... 3-34
Figure 3-38 Main Circuit Breaker Location ........................................ 3-35
Figure 3-39 Main (Select Specialty) Screen ........................................ 3-38
Figure 3-40 Burn Spot ......................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3-41 Centration Check Samples ............................................... 3-41
Figure 3-42 Select Quick Settings ....................................................... 3-44
Figure 3-43 Select Quick Settings Slider............................................. 3-45
Figure 3-44 Language Button .............................................................. 3-45
Figure 3-45 Settings & Utilities > Change Language.......................... 3-46
Figure 3-46 Settings & Utilities > Language Reset Flag..................... 3-46
Figure 3-47 Verify License.................................................................. 3-47
Figure 3-48 View License - Fibers ...................................................... 3-47
Figure 3-49 Export System Calibrations ............................................. 3-48
Figure 3-50 Turn Off System from Screen .......................................... 3-57
Figure 3-51 Folding the LCD Panel .................................................... 3-58
Figure 3-52 Brakes............................................................................... 3-59
Chapter 4: General Description

Figure 4-1 Lumenis Pulse 120H Laser Console ................................... 4-5
Figure 4-2 Laser Console with Control Screen ..................................... 4-6
Figure 4-3 Console Block Diagram ....................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4 Simple Block........................................................................ 4-8
Figure 4-5 Suction Pump ....................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-6 Footswitch ............................................................................ 4-9
Figure 4-7 Fiber Support Arm ............................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-8 Front Panel ........................................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-9 Emergency Button Location .............................................. 4-13
Figure 4-10 Rear Panel ........................................................................ 4-14
Figure 4-11 External Door Interlock Plug ........................................... 4-15
Figure 4-12 System HASP................................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-13 Rear Panel USB Port........................................................ 4-17
Chapter 5: Functional Description

Figure 5-1 System Main Block Diagram ............................................... 5-2
Figure 5-2 Dew Point Algorithm ........................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-3 Dew Point Measurement ...................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-4 Block Diagram ..................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-5 Internal Components .......................................................... 5-10
xxii SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 5-6 Modular Design Concept ................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-7 Wiring Diagram ................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-8 HV Flow Diagram.............................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-9 PCB Card Cabinet .............................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-10 Switching Module Block Diagram .................................. 5-15
Figure 5-11 HV PMCU........................................................................ 5-17
Figure 5-12 HV PMCU Block Diagram .............................................. 5-18
Figure 5-13 HV PMCU LED Status .................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-14 IGBT Safety Module........................................................ 5-20
Figure 5-15 Safety IGBT Diagram ...................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-16 Capacitor Charger ............................................................ 5-22
Figure 5-17 Capacitor Bank................................................................. 5-23
Figure 5-18 Isolation Transformer....................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-19 Transformer, 1-Phase AC OUT (Left Side)..................... 5-25
Figure 5-20 Transformer, 1-Phase AC IN (Right Side)....................... 5-25
Figure 5-21 Transformer, 3-Phase AC OUT (Left Side)..................... 5-26
Figure 5-22 Transformer, 3-Phase AC IN (Right Side)....................... 5-26
Figure 5-23 Input Block Diagram........................................................ 5-27
Figure 5-24 AC Controller Layout (1 Phase) ...................................... 5-28
Figure 5-25 AC Input........................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-26 AC Input Diagram............................................................ 5-32
Figure 5-27 MMCU Card Interfaces ................................................... 5-34
Figure 5-28 Circuit Breaker Location.................................................. 5-37
Figure 5-29 LPU and Hard Disk.......................................................... 5-39
Figure 5-30 Screen Rotation ................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-31 Screen and Fiber Arm Positions....................................... 5-41
Figure 5-32 SIS RFID Board ............................................................... 5-42
Figure 5-33 SIS Antenna ..................................................................... 5-43
Figure 5-34 Footswitch Storage Location ........................................... 5-43
Figure 5-35 Footswitch Connector Pin Layout.................................... 5-44
Figure 5-36 Conceptual block diagram for the On/Off Logic ............. 5-46
Figure 5-37 Keyswitch Location ......................................................... 5-47
Figure 5-38 Suction Pump ................................................................... 5-48
Figure 5-39 Cooling System Block Diagram ...................................... 5-51
Figure 5-40 Cooling Cycle .................................................................. 5-52
Figure 5-41 Cooling Under Optical Bench.......................................... 5-52
Figure 5-42 Chiller (Gas Unit)............................................................. 5-53
Figure 5-43 Cooling Unit..................................................................... 5-55
Figure 5-44 Water Pump Relay ........................................................... 5-56
Figure 5-45 Water Tank....................................................................... 5-56
Figure 5-46 Water Pump...................................................................... 5-57
Figure 5-47 Deionizer Filter ................................................................ 5-58
Figure 5-48 Particle Filter Assembly................................................... 5-58
Figure 5-49 Side Covers Air Filters..................................................... 5-60
Figure 5-50 Ventilation Management.................................................. 5-61
Figure 5-51 Optical Bench................................................................... 5-67
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxiii

Figure 5-52 Beam Path ........................................................................ 5-68

Figure 5-53 Ignition Board .................................................................. 5-69
Figure 5-54 Line Signal from SWM to Ignition PCB ......................... 5-70
Figure 5-55 Ignition Board Wiring Diagram ....................................... 5-70
Figure 5-56 Laser Deck Diagram ........................................................ 5-71
Figure 5-57 Laser Deck and Manifold................................................. 5-72
Figure 5-58 Pyro and Shutter............................................................... 5-73
Figure 5-59 Attenuator and PCB ......................................................... 5-74
Figure 5-60 Attenuator Board Diagram............................................... 5-74
Figure 5-61 Mirror Motor Block Diagram .......................................... 5-75
Figure 5-62 Mirror Motor .................................................................... 5-76
Figure 5-63 Green Aiming Beam ........................................................ 5-77
Figure 5-64 Pyro PCB.......................................................................... 5-78
Figure 5-65 Pyro Block Diagram......................................................... 5-78
Figure 5-66 Pyro Safety Circuit........................................................... 5-79
Figure 5-67 Shutter Safety Diagram .................................................... 5-80
Figure 5-68 Blast Shield Causes of Debris .......................................... 5-82
Figure 5-69 Blast Shield Port............................................................... 5-83
Figure 5-70 Blast Shield Storage ......................................................... 5-83
Figure 5-71 Delivery System ............................................................... 5-84
Figure 5-72 SIS Card ........................................................................... 5-85
Figure 5-73 Fiber Focus Lens .............................................................. 5-87
Figure 5-74 Pod and Ignition Board .................................................... 5-88
Figure 5-75 MOSES Concept .............................................................. 5-90
Figure 5-76 Moses Kit ......................................................................... 5-92
Figure 5-77 Moses License Enabled.................................................... 5-93
Figure 5-78 Treatment Screen - Moses On/Off Button ....................... 5-93
Chapter 6: Software
Figure 6-1 Main Menu (User)................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6-2 User Treatment Screen........................................................ 6-4
Figure 6-3 System States ....................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4 Self Test Screen (Service Mode) ......................................... 6-9
Figure 6-5 Service Screen Work Flow ................................................ 6-19
Figure 6-6 Connect HASP to Service USB ......................................... 6-21
Figure 6-7 Circuit Breaker Location.................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-8 System Mode Message....................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-9 Service Main Screen .......................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-10 Select Quick Settings ....................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-11 Select Quick Settings Slider............................................. 6-24
Figure 6-12 Settings & Utilities Screen ............................................... 6-25
Figure 6-13 Error Logs ........................................................................ 6-26
Figure 6-14 Quick Settings - Logs....................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-15 Set Date & Time .............................................................. 6-27
Figure 6-16 Settings and Utilities – Updates Expander....................... 6-28
Figure 6-17 View Installed Licenses ................................................... 6-29
xxiv SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 6-18 System Update Operations............................................... 6-29
Figure 6-19 Export Data Screen .......................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-20 Import/Export Operations ................................................ 6-31
Figure 6-21 Service Main Screen ........................................................ 6-32
Figure 6-22 Setting and Utilities.......................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-23 Import/Export Operations Screen .................................... 6-33
Figure 6-24 Export Calibration Data ................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-25 Import/Export Operations ................................................ 6-35
Figure 6-26 Import Calibration Data ................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-27 Aiming Beam Data........................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-28 Import Calibration Data Completed Window .................. 6-37
Figure 6-29 Potentiometer Data Import............................................... 6-37
Figure 6-31 Mirror Motor Data Import................................................ 6-38
Figure 6-33 Main Service Screen ........................................................ 6-41
Figure 6-34 Self Test Options.............................................................. 6-42
Figure 6-35 Self Test Completed Window .......................................... 6-43
Figure 6-36 Service Screen-Switching Module................................... 6-45
Figure 6-37 Charger Screen ................................................................. 6-46
Figure 6-38 Dump Fully Discharged ................................................... 6-47
Figure 6-39 Cooling Screen ................................................................. 6-48
Figure 6-40 Laser Deck Screen - Shutter Test..................................... 6-49
Figure 6-41 Laser Deck Screen - Aiming Beam Test.......................... 6-50
Figure 6-42 Laser Deck Screen - Servo Motor Test ............................ 6-51
Figure 6-43 External Indicators Screen ............................................... 6-52
Figure 6-44 LVPS Screen .................................................................... 6-53
Figure 6-45 Suction Control Screen .................................................... 6-54
Figure 6-46 Lasing Control - Open Loop ............................................ 6-55
Figure 6-47 Lasing Control - Open Loop (V1.0.5.4)........................... 6-56
Figure 6-48 Lasing Control -Screen Ready State ................................ 6-57
Figure 6-49 Closed Loop, Left and Right Pedal Lasing ...................... 6-58
Figure 6-50 Laser Calibration Screen .................................................. 6-60
Figure 6-51 Calibration Screen-Holmium Laser Cal........................... 6-62
Figure 6-52 Ready Mode, Lasing Control Screen ............................... 6-63
Figure 6-53 Calibration Screen-Holmium Attenuator Cal .................. 6-64
Figure 6-54 Calibration Screen-Aiming Beam Cal ............................. 6-65
Figure 6-55 Calibration Screen-Potentiometer Cal ............................. 6-66
Figure 6-56 Calibration Screen-Servo Motor Cal................................ 6-67
Figure 6-57 Servo Motor Calibration - Calibrations Tab .................... 6-68
Figure 6-58 Auto Tune Checkbox ....................................................... 6-69
Figure 6-59 Parameter Calculated by Mirror Motor............................ 6-69
Figure 6-60 Deselect Auto Tune.......................................................... 6-70
Figure 6-61 SIS Screen ........................................................................ 6-71
Figure 6-62 System Configuration Screen (120W Configuration)...... 6-72
Figure 6-63 System Configuration Screen - System Counters ............ 6-72
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxv

Figure 6-64 Partner Zone, Pulse120H Section .................................... 6-74

Figure 6-65 Folders of Software Package............................................ 6-75
Figure 6-66 Download CRC Validator ZIP from Partner Zone ......... 6-77
Figure 6-67 Validator Folders in Root of USB.................................... 6-78
Figure 6-68 Performing CRC Check ................................................... 6-79
Figure 6-69 CRC Good Message......................................................... 6-79
Figure 6-70 CRC Error Message ......................................................... 6-79
Figure 6-71 Create Dual Boot Sequence Correct ................................ 6-80
Figure 6-72 Download Image Update Files......................................... 6-81
Figure 6-73 Image Version Name ....................................................... 6-82
Figure 6-74 Image Update Folder........................................................ 6-83
Figure 6-75 Create Dual Boot CMD file ............................................. 6-83
Figure 6-76 Run CMD File.................................................................. 6-84
Figure 6-77 SwitchToWinPE............................................................... 6-85
Figure 6-78 SwitchToWinPE [2] ......................................................... 6-85
Figure 6-79 Press Y ............................................................................. 6-86
Figure 6-80 Windows Update Run ...................................................... 6-86
Figure 6-81 Windows Update Utility .................................................. 6-87
Figure 6-82 Update Process ................................................................. 6-88
Figure 6-83 image Update Success...................................................... 6-88
Figure 6-84 Image Version Verification.............................................. 6-89
Figure 6-85 New Service Shell ............................................................ 6-90
Figure 6-86 Step 1 Image Update ........................................................ 6-91
Figure 6-87 Press Any Key.................................................................. 6-91
Figure 6-88 Step 2 Image Update ........................................................ 6-92
Figure 6-89 Sharing Violation ............................................................. 6-95
Figure 6-90 Windows Boot Manager Screen ...................................... 6-95
Figure 6-91 BootLoaderSolution ......................................................... 6-96
Figure 6-92 Switch toWinEmb FOlders .............................................. 6-96
Figure 6-93 Windows Embedded Standard ......................................... 6-97
Figure 6-94 Press Any Key to Continue .............................................. 6-97
Figure 6-95 Service user Icon .............................................................. 6-98
Figure 6-96 Enter Service User Password ........................................... 6-99
Figure 6-97 Removable Disk Drive..................................................... 6-99
Figure 6-98 Pulse120 Installer ........................................................... 6-100
Figure 6-99 Pulse120 Installer- Shortcut ........................................... 6-100
Figure 6-100 Installer Window.......................................................... 6-100
Figure 6-101 Pulse120 Installer- Press Next ..................................... 6-101
Figure 6-102 Copy Files, Copy Completed ....................................... 6-102
Figure 6-103 Press Both Shift Keys .................................................. 6-103
Figure 6-104 Login Screen ................................................................ 6-103
Figure 6-105 Embedded Firmware Software Version ....................... 6-104
Figure 6-106 System Mode - Press Yes............................................. 6-105
Figure 6-107 Service Main Screen .................................................... 6-105
Figure 6-108 Setting & Utilities ........................................................ 6-106
Figure 6-109 Updates Screen............................................................. 6-106
xxvi SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 6-110 Firmware Update.......................................................... 6-107
Figure 6-111 Firmware Update Window........................................... 6-107
Figure 6-112 Firmware Update Proceed Prompt ............................... 6-108
Figure 6-113 Firmware Update - Select Elements............................. 6-108
Figure 6-114 Update All Elements .................................................... 6-109
Figure 6-115 Incomplete Burning Process ........................................ 6-110
Figure 6-116 Sample, Process Completed ......................................... 6-110
Figure 6-117 Burn Process Problems - File Not Found on Local Disk ... 6-
111
Figure 6-118 Burn Process Problems - Version Screen .................... 6-111
Figure 6-119 Burn Process Problems -Timeout ................................ 6-112
Figure 6-120 Burn Process Problems -CRC Failed ........................... 6-113
Figure 6-121 Service Application Starts with Firmware Update ...... 6-114
Figure 6-122 Emb Folder................................................................... 6-115
Figure 6-123 Service Button on Optical Bench................................. 6-115
Figure 6-124 Service Application - Firmware Update ...................... 6-116
Figure 6-125 Emb Folder [2] ............................................................. 6-117
Figure 6-126 Update Selected Elements............................................ 6-118
Figure 6-127 Burn Successful............................................................ 6-118
Figure 6-128 ...................................................................................... 6-119
Figure 6-129 Post Installation Version Verification.......................... 6-120
Figure 6-130 Verbosity Level 3......................................................... 6-121
Figure 6-131 Bricks Configuration.................................................... 6-121
Figure 6-132 Log Off Screen............................................................. 6-123
Figure 6-133 Service User Screen ..................................................... 6-124
Figure 6-134 Serial Number Generator.EXE .................................... 6-124
Figure 6-135 Serial Number Generator ............................................. 6-125
Figure 6-136 Verify Software Version .............................................. 6-126
Figure 6-137 Connect Ethernet.......................................................... 6-127
Figure 6-138 Connect Ethernet [2] .................................................... 6-128
Figure 6-139 Connect Ethernet [3] .................................................... 6-128
Figure 6-140 Chiller Install - Progress Bar........................................ 6-129
Figure 6-141 Chiller Install - Message .............................................. 6-130
Figure 6-142 Chiller Install - Dialog Error ........................................ 6-131
Figure 6-143 Chiller Version 0.0 ....................................................... 6-131
Figure 6-144 Chiller Install................................................................ 6-132
Figure 6-145 Program Transfer to PLC Option................................. 6-132
Figure 6-146 Program Transfer to PLC Option [2] ........................... 6-133
Figure 6-147 Overwrite Message ...................................................... 6-133
Figure 6-148 Compilation Success Message ..................................... 6-134
Figure 6-149 Start Transfer In Progress ............................................ 6-134
Figure 6-150 Version Screen After 1.0.6.6. Upgrade ........................ 6-135
Figure 6-151 Verbosity Level............................................................ 6-136
Figure 6-152 Troubleshooting Chiller Update [1] ............................. 6-136
Figure 6-153 Troubleshooting Chiller Update [2] ............................. 6-137
Figure 6-154 System Information Tab............................................... 6-138
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxvii

Figure 6-155 Licenses Tab ................................................................ 6-139

Figure 6-156 HASP License List....................................................... 6-139
Figure 6-157 System Identification Status......................................... 6-140
Figure 6-158 Applications Installations Tab ..................................... 6-141
Figure 6-159 Image Update Tab ........................................................ 6-142
Figure 6-160 General Tab.................................................................. 6-143
Figure 6-161 Setting & Utilities ........................................................ 6-144
Figure 6-162 System Update Operations Screen ............................... 6-145
Chapter 7: Calibrations, Alignments &

Adjustments
Figure 7-1 Optical Bench Beam Path Schematic................................... 7-2
Figure 7-2 Cross Hair Aperture ............................................................. 7-4
Figure 7-3 Insert Test Aperture ............................................................. 7-5
Figure 7-4 Making Burns through Crosshair Aperture.......................... 7-6
Figure 7-5 Tool for Adjusting Laser Beam at OC ................................. 7-7
Figure 7-6 Optics Adjustment, Relay and Plano Mirrors ...................... 7-9
Figure 7-7 Target Alignment Tool....................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-8 Alignment........................................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-9 Resonator Adjustment........................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-10 Round Spot Check Tool ................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-11 Round Pattern................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-12 Cavity Output ................................................................... 7-14
Figure 7-13 Tools................................................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-14 Lasing Control Parameters............................................... 7-16
Figure 7-15 Cut-Off Burn Shape - Bad Result .................................... 7-16
Figure 7-16 Connect Short Test Fiber ................................................. 7-19
Figure 7-17 Lumenis Logo Appearing on Top of Tip ......................... 7-19
Figure 7-18 Far Alignment without Scope .......................................... 7-20
Figure 7-19 Spot Results - Bad and Good ........................................... 7-21
Figure 7-20 Examining Test Fiber Burn.............................................. 7-22
Figure 7-21 Near Alignment - Spot Size ............................................. 7-23
Figure 7-22 Optical Transmission Adjustment.................................... 7-23
Figure 7-23 Pyro Board Test Points .................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-24 Laser in READY Mode.................................................... 7-26
Figure 7-25 Set Differential and Gain ................................................. 7-27
Figure 7-26 Lasing Control Screen...................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-27 Pyro Adjust ...................................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-28 Adjusting Aiming Beam .................................................. 7-30
Figure 7-29 Aiming Beam Profile ....................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-30 Capacitor Bank DVM Connections ................................. 7-31
Figure 7-31 Run Test - No Laser ......................................................... 7-31
Figure 7-32 Charger Screen - Set Capacitors ...................................... 7-31
Figure 7-33 Adjust Charger Values on HV PMCU ............................. 7-32
Figure 7-34 Run Tests - Run All Tests ................................................ 7-32
xxviii SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 7-35 Connect Fiber to Port ....................................................... 7-33
Figure 7-36 Disconnect Diode Harness and Connect Fiber Alignment Tool
7-34
Figure 7-37 45 Degree Mirror Housing 1 and 2 .................................. 7-35
Figure 7-38 Move Motor to Brick ....................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-39 Adjust Reflected Mirror Motors to SRM ......................... 7-36
Figure 7-40 SRM Centered on FRM ................................................... 7-36
Figure 7-41 Adjust FRM...................................................................... 7-37
Figure 7-42 Adjustment Settings for Each Brick................................. 7-38
Figure 7-43 Fiber Alignment Tool....................................................... 7-39
Figure 7-44 Connect Fiber Alignment Tool ........................................ 7-40
Figure 7-45 Connect Fiber Alignment Tool to Diode Harness ........... 7-40
Figure 7-46 Adjust Diode Beam Path.................................................. 7-41
Figure 7-47 Mirror Motor Init ............................................................. 7-42
Figure 7-48 Adjust Aiming Beam Diode to Center of FRM ............... 7-42
Figure 7-49 Adjust Aiming Beam Diode Tool to Brick Rod .............. 7-43
Figure 7-50 Adjustment, Channels 1-4................................................ 7-44
Figure 7-51 Aiming Beam Intensity Check ......................................... 7-45
Figure 7-52 Insert Backlight Tool ....................................................... 7-46
Figure 7-53 Insert Paper in front of OC Mirror ................................... 7-47
Figure 7-54 Connecting DVM Leads .................................................. 7-47
Figure 7-55 Fiber Port with DVM Leads............................................. 7-48
Figure 7-56 1st and 2nd 45° Turning Mirrors Locations..................... 7-49
Figure 7-57 Single Allen Screw, 1st 45° Turning Mirror.................... 7-50
Figure 7-58 Remove 2 Screws to Open Housing ................................ 7-51
Figure 7-59 Loosen 2 screws, 1st 45° Turning Mirror ........................ 7-51
Figure 7-60 Remove Screws of 2nd 45° Turning Mirror .................... 7-52
Figure 7-61 Removing Optical Bench Cover ...................................... 7-53
Figure 7-62 Checking the Mirrors ....................................................... 7-54
Figure 7-63 Checking the Crystal Rods............................................... 7-55
Figure 7-64 Checking the Blast Shield Window ................................. 7-55
Figure 7-65 Auto-Tune ........................................................................ 7-56
Figure 7-66 Calibration/Servo Motor Calibration - Parameters .......... 7-57
Figure 7-67 Deselect Auto Tune.......................................................... 7-57
Figure 7-68 Suction Test Kit ............................................................... 7-58
Figure 7-69 Remove Filter from Collection Container ....................... 7-59
Figure 7-70 Container in Holder and Tubes Attached......................... 7-59
Figure 7-71 Open Suction Pump Head ................................................ 7-60
Figure 7-72 Suction Pump Adjustment Wheels ................................ 7-60
Figure 7-73 Closing the Suction Pump................................................ 7-61
Figure 7-74 Final Setup for Suction Test............................................ 7-62
Figure 7-75 Urology Screen - PCNL ................................................... 7-63
Figure 7-76 PUmp Knob on Level 5 ................................................... 7-63
Figure 7-77 Suction ON Button........................................................... 7-64
Figure 7-78 Suction Level Slider......................................................... 7-67
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxix

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
Figure 8-1 Notifications Screen ............................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-2 Run Net Package File......................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-3 Met Package Message ........................................................ 8-30
Figure 8-4 Run HASP Reader ............................................................. 8-31
Figure 8-5 HASP Reader Button ......................................................... 8-32
Figure 8-6 Example - HASP Working Normally ................................ 8-33
Figure 8-7 Example - HASP Expired .................................................. 8-34
Figure 8-8 Example - HASP Problem ................................................. 8-35
Figure 8-9 HASP Clearing Output Pane.............................................. 8-36
Figure 8-10 Export to Text File ........................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-11 Export Confirmation Message ......................................... 8-37
Figure 8-12 Debris Shield Location..................................................... 8-39
Figure 8-13 Debris Shield Lens Inspection ......................................... 8-40
Figure 8-14 Reinsert Debris Shield ..................................................... 8-40
Figure 8-15 Gas Unit Pressure Gage ................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-16 Red Light on HASP ......................................................... 8-44
Figure 8-17 Error 38 - LPU Board....................................................... 8-45
Figure 8-18 Charger LED Red - Charger Bad ..................................... 8-46
Figure 8-19 Charger LED Green - Charger Good ............................... 8-47
Figure 8-20 LED .................................................................................. 8-48
Figure 8-21 LEDs for LPU .................................................................. 8-49
Chapter 9: Module Replacement

Figure 9-1 System Covers...................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9-2 Covers Assembly and Locking Mechanism......................... 9-3
Figure 9-3 Side Door Latches and Screw, Inside View......................... 9-4
Figure 9-4 Lifting Utility Lid................................................................. 9-5
Figure 9-5 remove 2 Screws under Utility Lid ...................................... 9-5
Figure 9-6 Removing Top Cover........................................................... 9-6
Figure 9-7 Remove Fiber from Fiber Port ............................................. 9-6
Figure 9-8 Blastshield Door................................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-9 Screws of Upper Front Cover (Left Side Screw) ................. 9-7
Figure 9-10 Front Cover Removal......................................................... 9-8
Figure 9-11 Lower Front Cover Screws ................................................ 9-9
Figure 9-12 Lower Front Cover Removal ............................................. 9-9
Figure 9-13 Allen Screw, Display Support.......................................... 9-10
Figure 9-14 Swing Touchscreen out of Position ................................. 9-10
Figure 9-15 Optical Bench Cover Removal ........................................ 9-11
Figure 9-16 Drain Tools Set - Gas Unit and Optical Bench ................ 9-12
Figure 9-17 Drain Tools Set - Cooling System ................................... 9-13
Figure 9-18 Water Quick-Connectors.................................................. 9-14
Figure 9-19 Draining Water from the Optical Bench .......................... 9-14
Figure 9-20 Draining Water from Gas Unit......................................... 9-15
Figure 9-21 Open Air Valve on Water Tank ....................................... 9-16
xxx SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 9-22 Disconnect Tubes from Water Tank ................................ 9-17
Figure 9-23 Water Tube Connections for Draining............................. 9-18
Figure 9-24 Tape Air Valve to Water Tank......................................... 9-19
Figure 9-25 Charger Replacement- Disconnect 2 Plugs...................... 9-20
Figure 9-26 Charger Replacement- Remove Capacitor Bank Cover .. 9-20
Figure 9-27 Charger Replacement- Remove Wires............................. 9-21
Figure 9-28 Charger Replacement- Captive Screws............................ 9-21
Figure 9-29 Charger Replacement- Bracket Screws............................ 9-22
Figure 9-30 Removing Speaker ........................................................... 9-23
Figure 9-31 Capacitor Bank Wiring .................................................... 9-23
Figure 9-32 Capacitor Bank Removal-Remove Screws ...................... 9-24
Figure 9-33 Capacitor Bank Installation - Align on Track .................. 9-25
Figure 9-34 Routing Capacitor Bank Wires ........................................ 9-26
Figure 9-35 Remove Ground Wire ...................................................... 9-27
Figure 9-36 Remove Plastic Cover ...................................................... 9-27
Figure 9-37 Removing LVPS .............................................................. 9-28
Figure 9-38 Release Two Captive Screws ........................................... 9-28
Figure 9-39 LVPS Terminal Point Layout .......................................... 9-29
Figure 9-40 LVPS Mounting Screws................................................... 9-29
Figure 9-41 Transfer DC/DC Board to New LVPS............................. 9-30
Figure 9-42 Install New LVPS ............................................................ 9-31
Figure 9-43 Disconnect Transformer Wires- Left Side ....................... 9-32
Figure 9-44 Disconnect Transformer Wires- Right Side..................... 9-32
Figure 9-45 Disconnect Line Filter...................................................... 9-33
Figure 9-46 DC/DC Board Replacement............................................. 9-34
Figure 9-47 Remove Protective Inner Cover ....................................... 9-35
Figure 9-48 MMCU Removal - 6 Screws............................................ 9-36
Figure 9-49 LPU Removal - Disconnect Harnesses ............................ 9-38
Figure 9-50 LPU Removal - Mounting Screws ................................... 9-38
Figure 9-51 LPU Proper Harness Connections.................................... 9-39
Figure 9-52 Hard Disk Removal.......................................................... 9-40
Figure 9-53 LPU Routing .................................................................... 9-40
Figure 9-54 SIS Board Connections .................................................... 9-42
Figure 9-55 Remove SIS Board........................................................... 9-42
Figure 9-56 AC Controller Door ......................................................... 9-43
Figure 9-57 AC Controller Connections.............................................. 9-44
Figure 9-58 HV Cabinet Layout .......................................................... 9-45
Figure 9-59 Remove EMI Cover ......................................................... 9-46
Figure 9-60 Removing Switching PCB ............................................... 9-46
Figure 9-61 Wire Routing Before Closing EMI Cover ....................... 9-47
Figure 9-62 Remove Safety IGBT....................................................... 9-48
Figure 9-63 Remove HV PMCU ......................................................... 9-49
Figure 9-64 Wire Routing Before Closing EMI Cover ....................... 9-50
Figure 9-65 Remove Mirror Motor Board ........................................... 9-51
Figure 9-66 Fan Replacement.............................................................. 9-53
Figure 9-67 Fan Removal- 4 Screws ................................................... 9-53
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxxi

Figure 9-68 Remove Display Tray Cap ............................................... 9-55

Figure 9-69 Removing C-Ring and Metal Ring .................................. 9-55
Figure 9-70 Remove 2 Screws - Display Harness and Chain.............. 9-56
Figure 9-71 Removing Allen Screw - Display .................................... 9-56
Figure 9-72 Remove Display and Arm................................................ 9-57
Figure 9-73 Remove Touchscreen ....................................................... 9-57
Figure 9-74 Disconnect Touchscreen Harnesses ................................. 9-58
Figure 9-75 Lifting Utility Lid............................................................. 9-58
Figure 9-76 Pump Head Removal ....................................................... 9-59
Figure 9-77 Head Pump Installation [1] .............................................. 9-59
Figure 9-78 Head Pump Installation[2] ............................................... 9-60
Figure 9-79 Gas Unit (Chiller) and Cart .............................................. 9-61
Figure 9-80 Gas Unit Location - Removal Direction .......................... 9-62
Figure 9-81 Release Metal Latches from Gas Unit ............................. 9-62
Figure 9-82 Disconnect Ground Wire from Gas Unit ......................... 9-63
Figure 9-83 Cooling System Water Connections ................................ 9-63
Figure 9-84 Pull Gas Unit Partially out of its Location ....................... 9-64
Figure 9-85 Remove Rear Cover ......................................................... 9-64
Figure 9-86 Move Support Bracket ..................................................... 9-65
Figure 9-87 Remove and Mount Support Bracket............................... 9-66
Figure 9-88 Sliding Tracks Locking Tabs ........................................... 9-67
Figure 9-89 Removing Gas Unit from Chassis.................................... 9-68
Figure 9-90 Sliding Tracks .................................................................. 9-69
Figure 9-91 Mounting New Gas Unit, Aligning on Tracks ................. 9-70
Figure 9-92 Removing Belt from Gas Unit ......................................... 9-71
Figure 9-93 Engaging Gas Unit and Cart to Chassis ........................... 9-71
Figure 9-94 Lower Cart Supporting Bar.............................................. 9-72
Figure 9-95 Remove Cart from under Gas Unit .................................. 9-73
Figure 9-96 Engage Gas Unit to Connect with Plugs .......................... 9-74
Figure 9-97 Placing Gas Unit on Cart ................................................. 9-76
Figure 9-98 Modified Gas Unit Cart.................................................... 9-77
Figure 9-99 Verify no Extra Screws .................................................... 9-78
Figure 9-100 Correct Height of Cart.................................................... 9-78
Figure 9-101 Remove Bracket ............................................................. 9-79
Figure 9-102 Install the Bracket .......................................................... 9-79
Figure 9-103 Removed Gas Unit with Bracket ................................... 9-80
Figure 9-104 Slide Tracks Out............................................................. 9-80
Figure 9-105 Rotate Stopper................................................................ 9-81
Figure 9-106 Install the New Gas Unit ................................................ 9-81
Figure 9-107 Remove Cart from Under Gas Unit ............................... 9-82
Figure 9-108 Replace Particle Filter .................................................... 9-83
Figure 9-109 Water Tube Connections................................................ 9-84
Figure 9-110 Remove Supporting Bar................................................. 9-85
Figure 9-111 Deionizer Quick-Connectors.......................................... 9-85
Figure 9-112 Remove Deionizer.......................................................... 9-86
Figure 9-113 Deionizer Installation Direction..................................... 9-86
xxxii SM-0006900 Rev. G

Figure 9-114 Remove Metal Frame..................................................... 9-87
Figure 9-115 Water Conductivity Sensor Replacement ...................... 9-88
Figure 9-116 Holmium Brick Parts Diagram ...................................... 9-89
Figure 9-117 Black Wires from EMI Card .......................................... 9-89
Figure 9-118 Brick Removal ............................................................... 9-90
Figure 9-119 Flashlamp Replacement ................................................. 9-91
Figure 9-120 Attaching Tape to Rod End............................................ 9-92
Figure 9-121 Inserting the Rod ............................................................ 9-93
Figure 9-122 Crystal Rod Replacement............................................... 9-93
Figure 9-123 Cleaning Rod End .......................................................... 9-94
Figure 9-124 Remove Fiber Focus Assembly Cover........................... 9-95
Figure 9-125 Fiber Focus Assembly.................................................... 9-95
Figure 9-126 Disconnect Harness........................................................ 9-96
Figure 9-127 Use Tool to Remove Fiber Focus Assembly ................. 9-96
Figure 9-128 Remove Lens Outer Ring............................................... 9-97
Figure 9-129 Remove Lens Inner Ring ............................................... 9-97
Figure 9-130 Remove Lens.................................................................. 9-98
Figure 9-131 Len Housing Components.............................................. 9-98
Figure 9-132 Fiber Focus Lens Orientation Arrow ............................. 9-99
Chapter 10: Spare Parts Catalog

Figure 10-1 Spare Parts List Example ................................................. 10-1
Figure 10-2 Electronic Components .................................................... 10-2
Figure 10-3 Electronic Components [2] .............................................. 10-4
Figure 10-4 Electrical Components [3] ............................................... 10-6
Figure 10-5 Display ............................................................................. 10-8
Figure 10-6 Spare Parts, 3-Phase Configuration ................................. 10-9
Figure 10-7 Optics [1]........................................................................ 10-10
Figure 10-8 Optics [2]........................................................................ 10-12
Figure 10-9 Optics [3]........................................................................ 10-14
Figure 10-10 Cooling System Components....................................... 10-16
Figure 10-11 User Replacements....................................................... 10-18
Figure 10-12 Covers and Chassis Parts ............................................. 10-20
Figure 10-13 Tools [1] ....................................................................... 10-22
Figure 10-14 Tools [2] ....................................................................... 10-24
SM-0006900 Rev. G xxxiii

xxxiv SM-0006900 Rev. G

C H A P T E R
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope of This Manual

This manual provides general and functional descriptions of the
Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium system, as well as installation,
maintenance and service instructions.
Caution
Service personnel operating or maintaining the Lumenis Pulse

120H Holmium system should read this manual thoroughly
before attempting to operate or service the device. While the
manual is intended to aid the service personnel in the care and
service of the equipment, it cannot serve as a substitute for the
service engineer training, provided by Lumenis.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 1-1

This service manual incorporates the following chapters:
Chapter 1: Introduction Contains a general introduction to the system.
Chapter 2: Safety Contains explanations and directions

concerning safety measures for operating the
system. This chapter also includes regulatory
information and requirements.
Chapter 3: General Contains a detailed overview of the system
Description and its various components, controls, displays
and connections. Includes detailed
specifications of all facets of the system.
Chapter 4: System Lists electrical, space and environmental
Installation and requirements for system installation and
Preventive instructions for unpacking, installing and first-
Maintenance time testing the system, and provides a
preventive maintenance check list.
Chapter 5: Functional Provides a detailed functional description of
Description all unit sub-systems.
Chapter 6: Software Explains the functions of the user and service

screens and describes the procedure for
installing the service software.
Chapter 7: Tests, Contains instructions on various system tests,
Calibrations & calibrations. ad adjustments.
Adjustments
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Lists the system error messages and various

problems, probable causes, symptoms/
diagnostic checks, and the appropriate
corrective actions
Chapter 9: Module Provides instructions for replacement of the
Replacement unit's modules and assemblies. The
instructions include removal, installation and
post- replacement procedures.
Chapter 10: Spare Parts Provides an easy-to-use catalog, containing
photographs of the unit and its components.
Note
The manufacturer will provide, upon request, circuit diagrams,
component parts lists (Field Replaceable Units), descriptions,
calibration instructions, or other information to assist service
personnel to repair the laser system.
1-2
Introduction
1.1.1 FSE Work Guidelines

The Service Engineer must work (perform these service activities) only
according to the procedures put forth in this manual per Lumenis
manufacturing requirements.
The Service Engineer must use only dedicated, calibrated tools per
Lumenis manufacturing requirements.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 1-3

1.2 Manual Conventions

Throughout this manual, notes, cautions and warnings are used to
provide critical information needed before the device is used.
Examples:
Note
A Note is a statement that alerts the operator to particularly
important information.
Caution
A Caution is a statement that alerts the operator to the possibility

of a problem with the device associated with its use or misuse.
Such problems include device malfunction, device failure, and
damage to the device or other property. The caution statement
includes the precaution that should be taken to avoid the hazard.
Warning
A Warning is a statement that alerts the operator to the
possibility of injury, death, or serious adverse reactions
associated with the use or misuse of the device.
1.3 Applicable Documents

Lumenis Pulse 120H Operator Manual P/N UM-10012510
1-4
Introduction
1.4 Abbreviations and Acronyms

" Inches
°C Degrees Celsius
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
ACD Analog to Digital conversion
ANSI American National Standards Institute
CAN Controller Area Network
CE European Directives Compliance Marking
cm Centimeters
DB Database
db decibel
DC Direct Current
FDA Food & Drug Administration (USA)
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GUI Graphic User Interface
GYN Gynecology
Hz Hertz
HV High Voltage
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
J/cm2 Joules per square centimeter
Kg Kilogram
lbs Pounds
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LPU Lumenis PC Computer
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
m Meters
mJ MilliJoules
mm Millimeters
MMCU Main Control Board
mW MilliWatts
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
nm Nanometers
OD Optical Density
SM-0006900 Rev. G 1-5

OLM On Line Monitoring

HV PMCU High Voltage Peripheral Micro-controller Unit
PS Power Supply
SIS Security Information System
SWM Switching Module
UI User Interface
UL Underwriters Laboratories
USB Universal Serial Bus
VAC Volts, Alternating Current
W Watts
1-6
C H A P T E R
SAFETY
2.1 Introduction
This chapter contains important safety information related to the use of
the laser system. All service personnel should familiarize themselves
with the contents of this chapter before operating the laser system.
Users must take precautions to prevent exposure of laser energy to the
eyes and skin from either direct or diffusely reflected laser beams,
except as a therapeutic application. Additional precautions must be
taken to prevent fire, electrical injury, and explosion.
Warning
Read this Service Manual carefully. Use of controls or
adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
This chapter includes:
• Laser Safety guidelines

• System Standards
• Understanding and Controlling Laser Impact on Tissue
• Hazards associated with Unsafe Laser Use
• System Safety Features
• Warning, Certification, and Identification Labels
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-1

2.2 Laser Safety Guidelines
Warning
No one should use the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser
system, or any other medical laser, without specific
training in both medical laser use and laser safety.
2.2.1 System Standards

• US FDA CDRH laser classification: Class IV
• European EN 60825 laser classification: Class 4
Aiming Beam
• Type: Nd:YAG
• Power: 1 mW maximum, continuous wave
• Settings: Low, medium & high
• Wavelength: 532 nm
• Laser classification: Class IIIa / Class 3R
• Color: Green
2.3 Understanding and Controlling Laser

Impact on Tissue
Warning
The Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser system contains a
Class IV, holmium laser which produces an invisible beam
of high energy radiation. Improper use could result in
serious personal injury. Observe all safety precautions for
Class IV lasers.
Many different types of lasers have been developed for multitudes of

different uses. Each type of laser has a certain potential for harm if
2-2
Safety
misused. Even lasers designed for use on living tissue must be used and
applied carefully in order to avoid:
• Hazards to the patient or clinical personnel

• Hazards to the physical surroundings
For this reason, it is important to understand the basics of how laser
energy affects living tissue and how to control this energy so as to
avoid misapplication.
The tissue damage that a misused laser may do depends on the

following factors:
• Class of the laser

• Wavelength of the laser
• Tissue variability of the area in contact with a laser beam
• Spot size or beam diameter
• Power
• Exposure, or time duration of beam contact
The following sections describe these factors in more detail.
2.3.1 Wavelength and Tissue Variability

Different types of lasers generate different wavelengths of light. When
laser energy strikes tissue, the laser wavelength and the target tissue
type determine the basic nature of the impact.
Lasers of different wavelengths show different effects on a given type

of tissue.Conversely,a laser of a given wavelength affects different
types of tissue in different ways.The primary factor is the efficiency
with which the tissue absorbs light of the given wavelength.
An example that illustrates this concept is the use of the Argon laser for
retinal surgery. The Argon laser is used for retinal surgery because the
tissues and fluids in front of the retina do not absorb the Argon laser
wavelength, whereas the retina itself does. By comparison, the
Holmium laser wavelength would be totally absorbed by the lens and
would damage it before reaching the retina.
The Lumenis Pulse 120H is a holmium laser.The holmium emits a

concentrated beam of light at a wavelength of 2.1μm, which is in the
invisible infrared portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.The effects,
and therefore the risks, of the holmium laser are primarily thermal.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-3

Light at the holmium laser wavelength is efficiently absorbed by water,

the primary component of soft tissue.When the laser beam strikes soft
tissue, its energy is absorbed by water in the tissue. The water heats up,
boils, and vaporizes, taking the surrounding tissue with it.
The effect of the holmium laser on tissue is further discussed in the

Operator Manual.
Note that the holmium laser beam can also damage bone or teeth,
causing pitting, glazing and explosive separation.
Spot Size, Power and Exposure

Assuming that the laser wavelength and target tissue are given, the spot
size, power, and exposure (including exposure duration) determine the
laser's degree of impact.
The operator sets the laser energy in Joules and pulse repetition rate in
Hertz. The system calculates the laser power that will be delivered
according to these parameters. Note the relationship of spot size and
energy: at a given power setting, a larger spot size spreads the energy
out over a larger area. This yields a larger area of impact, but a lesser
tissue effect.
The operator controls the exposure with the laser controls. The
exposure determines the duration of the applied laser beam. Obviously,
the longer the exposure is, the greater the tissue impact will be. The
primary exposure control is the footswitch.
The clinician uses spot size and exposure mode to control the
interaction of the Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser system’s laser
beam, and its attendant thermal effects, on the patient’s tissue. Safe and
effective use of the laser in clinical procedures comes with a mix of
clinical training, mentoring and experience. A more complete
discussion may be found in the Operator Manual.
2-4
Safety
2.4 Hazards Associated with Unsafe

Laser Use
2.4.1 Burn Hazards

The holmium laser light and its reflections are potential burn hazards
and can ignite flammable materials. Use extreme caution when
operating the system with covers opened or removed. The covers
contain the beam and reflections safely within the console. Only those
persons required should be present during servicing and eye protection
that safely attenuates the Holmium wave-lengths must be worn by all
present.
Only the person directing the aim of the laser beam should have access
to the laser footswitch. Use caution pressing the laser footswitch when
it is in proximity to footswitches for other equipment. Make sure the
footswitch pressed is the correct one to avoid unintended laser
exposure.
Never place hands or other objects in the path of the laser beam. Severe
burns could occur.
The skin is the second most vulnerable organ of the body. The damage
from either direct or reflected laser light is thermal and shows as an
erythematous reaction (reddening).The skin may also become dry and
itch, or even char.
Accessory Tips –the tip of the accessory may become hot during lasing and
may cause tissue damage on contact. After lasing has stopped, allow
the tip to cool before touching it.
Diffuse reflections –in some cases the patient may be burned by diffuse
reflections from instruments and other surfaces. Neither Service
Engineer nor patient should wear reflective jewelry, such as gold
watchbands, rings, or pendants.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-5

2.5 Reflection and Direct Eye Exposure

Hazard
The system output beam contains visible and invisible laser radiation
that is hazardous to the eye. Never stare into the Holmium/Nd:YAG
laser beam or allow it to be reflected from any reflecting surface - even
though metal can reflect the laser beam. As a precaution against
accidental exposure to the output beam or to its reflections, all
personnel must wear safety eyewear.
Never stare directly into the green diode beam. Also ensure that the
green diode beam is not directed at anyone’s eyes. Although this beam
is low powered, direct exposure can be hazardous to eyes.
2.5.1 Laser Safety Eyewear

Laser safety eyewear is routinely required with most lasers. When
using the laser system, the Laser Safety Officer should determine the
need for safety eyewear based on the Maximum Permissible Exposure
(MPE), Nominal Hazard Zone (NHZ), the Nominal Ocular Hazard
Distance (NOHD), and the optical density (OD) for each of the
available laser emissions and the configuration of the treatment room
(usually within the controlled area). For additional information, refer to
ANSI Z136.1, ANSI Z136.3, or European Standard EN 60825.
The following formula was used to calculate the worst case NOHD for
the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser and compatible delivery
systems:
Where:
Z = the distance of the beam waist from the laser system;
a = the beam waist diameter (1/e 2 of axial irradiance for Gaussian beam);
θ = minimum full angle beam divergence (1/e2 of axial irradiance for

Gaussian beam);
Φ = maximum energy of one laser pulse or maximum CW laser power;
2-6
Safety
Pf = the profile correction factor (1 for uniform profile or 2 for

Gaussian irradiance);
MPE = Maximum Permissible Exposure, in energy density units

(energy per unit area), or power density units (power per unit area);
NOHD = the Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance (measured from laser

aperture;
= the distance required to reduce the energy density or power density to

the MPE.
Figure 2-1 Nominal Ocular Hazard Distance
Using this approach we derive the following values:
Wavelength θ Φ MPE Pf a Z
250
Ho:YAG (2.1μm) 6.0 J 5 mJ/cm2 1 0.0365 0 cm
mrad
This results in a worst case NOHD of 1.6 meters.
All personnel who are within the NOHD are considered to be within
the controlled area and must wear eye protection with a protection level
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-7

DI LB3 according to EN 207 and with a minimum optical density

(OD) of 3.0
Laser System OD
Ho:YAG 2.1μm 3.0
Figure 2-2 Minimum Optical Density
Laser safety eyewear must also be resistant to physical damage or

photo-bleaching resulting from laser exposure as per ANSI Z136.1-
1993, section 4.6.2 and Appendix C.
In addition to providing the required laser safety eyewear, take the

following steps to secure the treatment room, or the controlled area:
1. To alert personnel before they enter the controlled area, place a

warning sign on the outside of the treatment room door when the
laser is in use.
2. Close the treatment room door during operation of the laser.
3. External door interlocks that automatically disable the laser when
the treatment room door is opened may be installed.
4. Depending on the procedure, the physician must protect the
patient’s eyes with either laser safety eyewear or one of the
following items moistened with a nonflammable solution: thick
cloth, eye pads, or gauze 4 x 4’s. For periorbital treatment, the
physician must protect the patient with dulled, metal eye shields.
2-8
Safety
2.5.2 Additional Ocular Protection
Warning
Always verify that the delivery device is properly
connected to the laser. An improper connection may result
in an inadvertent secondary laser beam. Severe eye or
tissue damage could occur.
Warning
Never substitute prescription eyewear for the appropriate
laser safety eyewear, as severe eye damage could occur.
Prescription eyewear can concentrate the laser light to the
eye and/or can be shattered by a high power density beam,
possibly causing severe eye damage.
Never look directly into any optical fiber, handpiece, probe

or laser system aperture while the laser is energized.
Severe eye or skin damage could occur. Turn off the laser
before inspecting any delivery system or laser
components.
2.5.3 Fire Hazards

Service personnel should be aware of the following safety consider-
ations and potential fire hazards when using a Holmium laser:
Warning
Do not use this device in the presence of flammables or
explosives, such as volatile anesthetics, gasoline, alcohol,
solvents, volatile surgical preparation solutions, and
similar substances. An explosion or fire could occur.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-9

Warning
The treatment beam can ignite most non-metallic
materials. The use of non-flammable materials and
instruments is advised. Use fire retardant drapes and
gowns. The area around the treatment site can be
protected with towels or gauze sponges moistened with
sterile saline solution or sterile water. If allowed to dry,
protective towels and sponges can increase the potential
fire hazard. A UL-approved fire extinguisher and water
should be readily available.
2.5.4 Electrical Hazards

Because the Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser system contains high-
voltage components, there is a danger of severe shock if its covers are
taken off by persons other than trained personnel. To avoid injury, do
not operate the unit before ensuring that all covers are properly closed,
except when performing repairs that necessitate otherwise. Do not
attempt to remove or to disassemble any panels or covers without first
disconnecting the power cord of the system.
When performing open cabinet tests that necessitate lasing, do not

place hands or metallic objects near the capacitor bank, switching
module, and high-voltage components.
• Do not touch the Ho:YAG Cavity Module when the system is on;
IT IS A SHOCK HAZARD. The Ho:YAG Cavity Module is
electrically isolated from the chassis and can be at a voltage potential
much higher than ground. A red LED on the capacitor charger
indicates lamp start high voltage is present when flashing.
Grounding the System

Proper grounding is essential for safe operation. The system is
grounded through the grounding conductor in the power cable. To
ensure grounding reliability, always plug the power cable into a
properly wired hospital grade power receptacle. For protective earth
connection, use the equipotential terminal on the system's service
panel.
2-10
Safety
Caution
Use the system only when it is properly grounded via the

equipotential terminal; do not attempt to use three-prong adapter
plugs to defeat the grounding system. The use of extension cords
is not recommended.
ESD Safety
To avoid damaging delicate electronic components on the printed-
circuit board, use an Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) band.
Caution
Opening the covers will expose personnel to high voltage

components, the laser resonator and possible laser radiation.
Only Lumenis-certified service technicians are qualified to
service the system.
Do not operate the laser if any of the cables are faulty or frayed.
The laser should undergo routine inspection and preventive
maintenance per Lumenis' recommendations and institutional
standards.
Caution
To prevent unintended laser discharge, always turn off the laser

before disconnecting a delivery system.
• Even with the circuit breaker in the “OFF” position there are lethal
voltages present inside the console. Always disconnect the main
electrical service before taking the covers off the console.
2.5.5 Working with the Electrical System

The Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser system generates high
voltages within the main cabinet. Therefore only Lumenis-authorized
service engineers should check the interior of the unit.
Due to the presence of high voltages within the unit, it is important that
the ground terminal of the power cable be properly connected, in case a
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-11

loose wire or other malfunction grounds the high voltage to the main
cabinet
When maintaining or servicing components within the main cabinet,

disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet whenever possible.
The following precautions should be observed when working with the

electrical system:
1. Verify that the unit is properly grounded.

2. Use electrician’s ESD belt/wristband
3. Always turn off the system before removing an electronic
component.
2.5.6 Additional Safety Considerations
Caution
Lumenis medical lasers and laser delivery systems are intended

solely for physicians trained in the use of these instruments.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser
radiation exposure.
2.5.7 Protecting Non-Target Tissues
Caution
When using a fiber optic delivery device, always inspect the fiber
optic cable to ensure that it has not been kinked, punctured,
fractured, or otherwise damaged. The fiber optic cable may be
damaged if stepped on, pulled, left lying in a vulnerable position,
kinked, or tightly coiled. Do not clamp the cable with a hemostat
or other instruments. If sterile tape is used, always remove the
tape before lifting the cable. A damaged fiber optic cable may
cause accidental laser exposure or injury to the treatment room
personnel or patient, and/or fire in the treatment room.
2-12
Safety
Caution
Never deliver the treatment beam to the target tissue if the aiming
beam is not visible; the fiber optic cable may be damaged. A
damaged cable may cause accidental laser exposure to the
treatment room personnel or patient, and/or fire in the treatment
room.
Caution
Except during actual treatment, the laser must always be in

standby mode. Maintaining the laser in standby mode prevents
accidental laser exposure if the footswitch is inadvertently
pressed.
Caution
Never place hands or other objects in the path of the laser beam.
Severe burns could occur.
2.5.8 Grounding the System

properly wired hospital grade power receptacle. Additional grounding
can be provided by using the external ground connection point.
Use only a power receptacle and plug that are in good condition and are
specified for your unit.
Use only a hospital grade plug and a correctly matched power

receptacle.
To remove the power cable from the receptacle, hold it by the plug.
Never pull on the power cable to remove the plug from the receptacle.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-13

2.6 System Safety Features

The Lumenis Pulse 120H is equipped with the following electrical
safety features:
• Extensive self-test that detects malfunctions and prevents lasing

in conditions that could results in output out of the required
tolerances.
• In critical areas redundant sensing is done to prevent erroneous
output even in a case of single fault condition. This includes:
> Pyro sensors that measure the actual laser output and are
used to correct the lasers pump energy
> Voltage and current measurements that are used to control
the laser pump energy
> All the safety related interfaces, interlock, foot pedals, fiber
connected, key switch, emergency button use redundant
and inverted (normally open and normally closed) signals.
• The system includes a laser shutter that prevents laser output
except when requested by the user.
• Fiber connection port includes sensing devices for the fiber
connection and prevents the laser output without connecting a
fiber.
• The system includes an emergency switch which stops the laser
output.
• The system includes a keyswitch which enables restricting the
system to authorized users, by removing the key.
• The system includes a door interlock connection, which stops
the laser output if the door is opened.
• The system includes visual and audible indications for lasing
output and for switching between the Ready and Standby states.
• Isolation transformer is used between the mains supply and any
internal system component
• Chassis is connected to the mains safety ground
• Electrical returns do not use the chassis as a ground
• A circuit breaker is built into the AC input block
• Fuses are incorporated into the isolation transformer
• The systems are tested in production
In addition, the Lumenis Pulse 120H is equipped with various built-in

safety features to provide maximum protection for user, patient, and
service personnel. Before using the system for the first time, become
familiar with the location and operation of these safety features.
2-14
Safety
• Emergency Shutoff Knob

• On/Off switch
• Circuit Breaker
• Laser Emission Indicator
• LED Indicator
• External Door Interlock
• Protective Housing
• Location of Controls
• Safety Shutter
• Electronic Fault Detection Circuitry
• Safety Interlocks
• Precision of Displayed Values
2.6.1 Emergency Shutoff Knob

The laser has an emergency laser stop knob that, when pushed,
immediately disables the laser in emergency situations and shuts off the
suction.
2.6.2 Circuit Breaker

The main fuse located within the system is a circuit breaker. When the
circuit breaker trips, it disconnects power from the system. To restore
power after the circuit breaker has tripped, raise the circuit breaker.
2.6.3 Laser Emission Indicators

A laser emission icon appears on the control screen to alert the user that
laser energy is being emitted. During the treatment beam delivery, the
laser emits an auditory signal correlating to the pedal used.
The system also verbalizes "Ready" and "Standby" with voice indicator
when the system is transitioned from mode to mode.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-15

2.6.4 External Door Interlock

An external door interlock outlet and plug are provided to disable the
laser if the treatment room doors are opened while the laser is in
READY mode.
2.6.5 Protective Housing

The laser has a protective housing that prevents unintended human
access to laser radiation. No sections of the protective housing can be
easily opened without special tools. This housing is to be opened only
by a Lumenis-certified technician.
2.6.6 LED Indicator

The round LED on the front displays the activity state of the Lumenis
Pulse 120H laser console.
Color Illumination Activity State
Power ON/
Blue Steady
Standby
READY
Orange Steady
mode
Orange Blink Lasing
• An audible signal is emitted during lasing. A different audible sound

is used for the left and right pedals.
• When lasing, the lasing emission indicator appears on the screen.
Figure 2-3 System State LED
2-16
Safety
• Notification icons identify the severity of the error or event.

When there is more than one notification, the most severe icon
is displayed in the notification bar along with the number of
notifications. Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter for more
details on errors and notifications.
2.6.7 Location of Controls

The controls are located on the control screen.
2.6.8 Safety Shutter

The laser features a safety shutter that prevents the treatment beam
from exiting the laser. The safety shutter opens only when the laser is in
ready mode and the footswitch is pressed.
2.6.9 Electronic Fault Detection Circuitry

If any of the electronic system monitors detect a fault condition, laser
exposure cannot occur. The high voltage power supply disables, the
safety shutter closes, and the footswitch disables.
2.6.10 Safety Interlocks

The laser has a safety interlock on the fiber optic laser connector in
accordance with Section 1040 of 21 CFR.
2.6.11 Precision of Displayed Values

The precision of the energy and rate values displayed on the control
screen are factory preset to within ±20% of a calibrated standard. The
energy of every pulse is monitored by two internal detectors to ensure
no safety hazard is caused by failure of a single component. If the
delivered system energy deviates from the commanded parameters by
more than 20%, the user is notified and not allowed to continue (laser
shuts down).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-17

2.7 Safety Redundancy

• All safety critical blocks are implemented using dual redundant
approach A safety module is used in series with the switching
modules.
• Lamp voltage and current that are used to control the pump energy
have 2 separate and fully independent channels, and are compared to
each other and to thresholds.
• Dual redundant pyro channels are used for energy monitoring and
control.
• Safety related features and sensors have dual redundant implementa-
tion:
• Shutter position “Open” and “Closed” indicators
• Foot pedal, Emergency Switch, Key switch and interlock have
both a N.O. and a N.C. connections
Note
Pyro calibration error is safety critical and can not be detected by the
system.
2-18
Safety
2.8 Laser Safety - User Indications

• Visual indications:
• Standby and Ready modes are distinguished in the GUI and by
the color of the fiber port LED
• Lasing is indicated in the GUI and by the blinking the fiber port
LED
• Audio indications
• State transfer is indicated by a sound
• Lasing is indicated by a sound, different for left and right pedal
• Faults and malfunctions are indicated by a sound
• These sounds can not be muted
2.9 Internal Safety Checks

The laser system has a Holmium lasing mode.
During each lasing mode, laser shutter and footswitch are checked
continuously by the MMCU and the main FPGA.
The safety check is divided between the HV PMCU and the Main
board. The board's communication is done via CAN BUS and 2
discrete lines: Safety OK1, Safety OK2 which are uni-directional from
the main FPGA to the HV FPGA. At any Main board error - Safety
OK1 and Safety OK2 lines are set to an error status in which HV
PMCU is defined to stop/prohibit all output pulses and disable the
Safety IGBT module.
The system also allows service and calibration modes.
In all modes MMCU configures PMCU, main FPGA and samples back
their statuses. On the other hand, the PMCU configures the HV FPGA
and samples HV FPGA statuses. Both cards have an external WDT. In
order to fire a laser pulse in both Holmium and Nd:YAG modes, the
software sets a FPGA PREPARE_TO_FIRE register (which is cleared
after every fire pulse) and then raises the FIRE_ENABLE signal.
All the activation lines are configured by default to a non-active/safe

state.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-19

2.9.1 System Modes

In each of the lasing modes the system may be configured to the 4
operating modes. Both MMCU and PMCU boards FPGAs have
FPGA_MODE register that are configured by MMCU/PMCU.
FPGA_MODE register default is USER mode.
User mode
In this mode all the safety is active and both FPGAs are configured to
the USER mode.
Auto Calibration Mode

During the auto calibration mode FSW is not pressed, MMCU
configures the main FPGA to the calibration mode (FPGA_MODE
register) in which main FPGA checks only safety pyro sensor limits. In
this mode HV FPGA is set to a USER mode.
Warm Up Mode
During Warm Up mode the FSW is pressed and MMCU configures the
main FPGA to the warm up mode (FPGA_MODE register) in which
FPGA checks only safety pyro sensor limits. In this mode HV FPGA is
set to a USER mode.
Hardware Service Mode

The hardware service mode is accessed only by Lumenis authorized
service personnel via HASP connection.
The HASP is used to enable the software to display the authorized and
unauthorized treatment modules.
Enter the Service mode by entering a service Screen on the LPU. Only
in Service mode the user may enter hardware safety mode by pressing a
service momentary push button. This is to enable system tests. In the
hardware safety mode the MMCU configures the main FPGA to this
mode (FPGA_MODE register) in which FPGA checks safety pyro
sensor limits, fiber connected, blast shield, keySwitch1, keySwitch2,
shutter open, shutter close, intrlock1 and interlock2. At the same time
HV PMCU sets HV FPGA to a manufacturing mode in which HV
FPGA ignores Safety OK1, Safety OK2 lines, Vlamp and Ilamp limits.
2-20
Safety
During this mode, HV FPGA may set laser pulses in normal mode –
close the pulse according to target Pump Energy value or may set out
fire pulses according to a predefined register value.
The system may exit the safety free mode via the following steps:
1. System power off.

2. Exit service screen in LPU (to reenter safety free mode the user
must press the button again).
2.9.2 Holmium Safety Circuit

The HV PMCU may issue a FIRE_PULSE command to any of the 4
Holmium IGBTs in the switching module. These lines are designated
as FIRE_PULSEx (x=1, 2, 3, 4). In order to fire a Holmium laser pulse,
the PMCU configures the HV PMCU FPGA to the following:
1. Sets Holmium mode

2. Sets LAMP_NUMBER register to config 0 – 4
3. Sets desired Capacitor Voltage
4. Sets capacitor voltage sampled – Vlamp sampled error register
5. Sets Ilamp – Ilamp1 error register error register
6. Sets frequency limits registers
7. Sets Ecommand register
8. Sets FIRE_PREPARE register
9. Set FIRE_ENABLE_TIME
10. Set FPGA to USER mode
11. Sets FIRE_ENABLE line to '1' for a period of a
FIRE_ENABLE_TIME [us].
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-21

Figure 2-4 Holmium Safety Circuit
2.9.3 Safety Pyro Circuit

There are two pyro sensors: safety and main. Main pyro is connected to
the MMCU and serves the MMCU to close an energy system loop.
Safety pyro is connected to the FPGA and serves to check output laser
energy.
2.10 Warning, Certification, and

Identification Labels
As required by national and international regulatory agencies, appropri-
ate warning labels have been mounted in the specified locations.
Figure 2-5 displays the identification and certification labels affixed to

the system and the symbols displayed in the labels:
2-22
Safety
LASER CLASS 4 / IV
Holmium:YAG Laser: 2.1μm, 6J max, 1300μs pulse max
LASER CLASS 3R / Illa

DPSS Laser: 532nm, 5mW max, CW
LB - 10032650_B
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT
OR SCATTERED RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT per IEC 60825-1: 2007
CLASS IV LASER PRODUCT per
21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11
except for deviations pursuant to laser Notice No.50
dated June 24, 2007
STOP
LUMENIS LTD
Yokneam Induﬆrial Park
Hakidma Street 6, P.O.B. # 240
Yokneam 2069204, ISRAEL
Lumenis Pulse 120H Tel: +972 4 959 9000
GS1
Lumenis (Germany) GmbH (01) 0 0000000 00000 0

EC REP Heinrich-Hertz-Str 3 D-63303 (11) 000000
RR-RRRRRRRR Dreieich-Dreieichenhain GERMANY (21) 0000
Tel: +49 (0) 6103 8335 0 (240) 0000000000
SN SSSS
230V
SERIES: XXX 50HZ 0483
YYYY-MM-DD 37 A, 1
Rx ONLY
MODEL: XXXXXXXXXX
LB-20037970_A
THIS DEVICE CONTAINS: FCC ID: Z97-1149466
Figure 2-5 Location of Warning, Identification and Certification

Labels
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-23

Description of System Labels:
The labels located on the system's panels, components and packaging

contain the following information (for illustration purposes only):
Symbol Description
Lumenis, Energy to Healthcare
CE Compliance
0483
EC REP Authorized Representative in the European Community
Manufacturer
Date of Manufacture
Catalog Number
Serial Number
SN
SERIES Series Number
MODEL Model Name
Follow Instruction for Use
230V
50HZ Electrical Requirements
37 A, 1
Equipotential Connection Pin
Type BF Equipment
Caution: U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the

Rx ONLY order of a physician
2-24
Safety
Symbol Description
THIS DEVICE CONTAINS:
THIS DEVICE CONTAINS: FCC ID: Z97-1149466
FCC ID: Z97-1149466
STOP
Emergency Laser Stop
Fiber Connection Port (Aperture)
Laser Class Label

Laser Class 4/IV
LASER CLASS 4 / IV
Holmium:YAG Laser: 2.1μm, 6J max, 1300μs pulse max
Holmium:YAG Laser: 2.1μm, 6 J max. 1300 μs pulse max.
LASER CLASS 3R / Illa
DPSS Laser: 532nm, 5mW max, CW Laser Class 4/IV
LB - 10032650_B
VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT
OR SCATTERED RADIATION
DSSP Laser: 532nm, 5mW max. CW
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT per IEC 60825-1: 2007
CLASS IV LASER PRODUCT per Visible and Invisible Laser Radiation
21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11
except for deviations pursuant to laser Notice No.50
dated June 24, 2007 Avoid eye or Skin Exposure to Direct or Scattered Radiation
Class 4 laser product per IEC 60825-1:2007
CLASS IV LASER PRODUCT per 21 CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11
except for deviations pursuant to Notice 50, Dated June 24, 2007
Laser Class Label
For JAPAN ONLY: Laser Class 4/IV

Holmium:YAG Laser: 2.1μm, 3.5 J max. 800 μs pulse max.
Laser Class 3R/IIIa
DSSP Laser: 532nm, 5mW max. CW
Visible and Invisible Laser Radiation
Avoid eye or Skin Exposure to Direct or Scattered Radiation
Class 4 laser product per IEC 60825-1:2007
CLASS IV LASER PRODUCT per 21 CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11
except for deviations pursuant to Notice 50, Dated June 24, 2007
External Interlock Connection
Footswitch Connection
CSA Compliance
Unique Device Identifier (UDI) Code, Type GS1
Product contains RF Transmitter
SM-0006900 Rev. G 2-25

Symbol Description
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) compliance
RoHS Compliance (China)
Temperature Limitation
Humidity Limitation
Atmospheric Pressure Limitation
USB Connection
Ethernet Connection
Keyswitch On/Off
WARNING Power Cable Label:

Grounding reliability can only be
achieved when the EQUiPMENT Grounding reliability can only be achieved when the EQUIPMENT
is connected to an equivalent
receptacle marked “Hospital
is connected to an equivalent receptacle marked Hospital Only
Only” or “Hospital Grade” or Hospital Grade.
0363-076-01 Rev. B
2.11 EMC Compliance

For information regarding electromagnetic emissions and electromag-
netic immunity for this system, refer to the Operator manual.
2-26
C H A P T E R
INSTALLATION AND
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 Introduction
On-site installation of the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser system
involves unpacking, setup, and initial system test and calibration.
Installation is carried out by Service Engineers authorized by Lumenis,
who do the following:
1. Verify the crate integrity and check the shock indicator. If the shock
indicator has been activated, notify the local Lumenis represen-
tative.
2. Unpack the Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium system and position it
in the desired location.
3. Verify the integrity of the system and its components.
4. Configure Voltage line power on the AC controller.
5. Configure line voltage on Main Transformer.
6. Plug the system into a designated electrical outlet.
7. Fill the cooling system with deionized water.
8. Test the system for proper calibration and functional operation of
all components and software.
9. Coordinate the performance of an on-site safety inspection, if
required.
10. Fill-in the Installation Report and Check List (see Section
3.8‘Installation Report’ on page 3-49).
(*) Use only photocopies of the Installation Check List and Report.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-1

Note
Before unpacking the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser system,
ensure that the site meets the requirements described in Section
3.3‘Facility Requirements’ on page 3-3.
Caution
The system must be at room temperature for installation. Defrost

the system at least 2 hours before installation, when shipped to
cold climates to prevent damage to the system.
3.1.1 Safety Precautions
Identify Electrical Hazards

• Know where the mains electrical disconnected is located.
(circuit breakers, mains fuses, power switches).
• Visually inspect the equipment for loose wires and broken
connectors.
• Read and respect all warning labels.
Prepare Yourself
• Remove metallic watches, wristbands, jewelry.
• Dry yourself (shower, sweat, rain)
• Wear safety eyewear wherever sparks or arcing may occur.
• Wear an ESD band when installing the system.
Inspect Test Equipment and Laser System

• Check for ground conductors on power cords
• Verify cords and cables are not cut, frayed, and are properly
terminated.
• Test the scope and meter probes for continuity before use.
3-2
Installation and Preventive Maintenance
3.2 Required Tools

• Standard tool kit
• Water Drain/Refill Kit
• 3 liters deionized water
• Ophir FL250A-SH power meter (calibrated) or equivalent
• short test fiber
• SIS long test fiber
• Inspection scope
• DVM (Voltmeter)
• ESD Band
• Service HASP
3.3 Facility Requirements

Before unpacking the system, ensure that the site meets the
requirements described in the following sections.
3.3.1 Electrical Requirements

The system is equipped with a universal power supply module.
Accordingly, the system will require a separate line supply according to
the table:
Note
The table below refers to systems with 120W configuration.
For electrical requirements for systems with 100W configuration, see
Section 3.3.3‘Requirements, 1 Phase 100W 32A 50Hz’ on page 3-5.
Hz Line Voltage Amp / Phase

200VAC 42A, 1 phase
220VAC 38A, 1 phase
50Hz
230VAC 37A, 1 phase
240VAC 35A, 1 phase
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-3

Hz Line Voltage Amp / Phase

200VAC 46A, 1 phase
208VAC 45A, 1 phase
60Hz
220VAC 42A, 1 phase
208VAC 24A, 1 phase
System is configured to the mains voltage by changing a wire

connection in the terminal block on the isolation transformer and in the
AC-Input board.
Input power lines should be free of transients, voltage and current

spikes, sags and surges. Consequently, the system power line should
not be shared with other heavy variable loads such as elevators, air
conditioning systems, large motors, etc.
It is strongly recommended that the system be connected to

a separate power line with separate circuit breakers.
Lumenis cannot guarantee adequate performance unless
the system is connected to a dedicated circuit.
Lumenis strongly recommends the installation of a Residual

Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB), also referred to as a
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), or slow response
circuit breaker.
3.3.2 Requirements for 1 Phase 120W, 50/60Hz
Accessibility
No steps, verify ramps or elevators.
Electrical Requirements
The Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser is available with single-phase
(200-240 VAC, >45A, 50-60 Hz). Electrical power should be setup
according to the model ordered. The service engineer will configure the
system during installation for the site voltage and verify that the
installed power plug is compatible with the receptacle provided by the
hospital.
• Dedicated line: The system power line should not be shared

with other heavy variable loads such as elevators, air
• System shipped with 3 conductor cables
• Customer responsible for supplying electrical connections
3-4
3.3.3 Requirements, 1 Phase 100W 32A 50Hz
Accessibility
The Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser is available with single-phase
220 VAC ±10% , >32A, 50 Hz. Electrical power should be setup
according to the model ordered. The service technician will configure
the system during installation for the site voltage and verify that the
installed power plug is compatible with the receptacle provided by the
hospital.

3.3.4 Requirements, 3 Phase 120W 18A per Phase,

50Hz
Accessibility
120 Watts maximum for 3-Phase Configuration, 18A per phase
The service technician will configure the system during installation for
the site voltage and verify that the installed power plug is compatible
with the receptacle provided by the hospital.

SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-5

3.3.5 Space and Positioning Requirements

Space should be allocated with adequate ventilation and free air flow.
In order to guarantee proper ventilation, always keep the sides and back
of the system at least 0.5 m (20") from the wall or from other
obstructions to air flow.
Position the laser console a minimum of 50 centimeters (20 inches)

from walls, furniture, or other equipment.
Figure 3-1 System Dimensions
Dimensions (W x H x L): 47 x 105 x 116 cm

15 x 41.3 x 45.7 inches
Weight: 1-Phase: 240 kg (529 lbs.)

3-Phase: 260 kg (572 lbs.)
3.3.6 Environment Requirements
Air Quality
The system should operate in a non-corrosive atmosphere. Corrosive
materials such as acids can damage electrical wiring, electronic
components and the surfaces of optical components.
3-6
Air-borne dust particles should be kept to a minimum. Dust particles

absorb light and heat up. Hot particles located on the optical lenses can
damage them. Metallic dust is destructive to electrical equipment.
Temperature and Humidity

• Temp range: 10° to 24°C degrees (50° to 75°F) – must be above
dew point
• Relative humidity: up to 50% at 24°C degrees (75°F) non-
condensing
Note
It is highly recommended that during calibration of the optical bench,
room temperature should not exceed 24°C (75°) F and maintain
humidity of less than 50%.
• Enclosed environment in accordance w/ ANSI standards

• Provide 20” around the system for ventilation
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-7

3.4 Unpacking the Unit
Caution
The Lumenis Pulse 120H system should be at room temperature

before beginning the installation and setup procedures. In colder
climates, wait at least 2 hours until the system comes to room
temperature before proceeding with installation. Failure to do so
may cause damage to the system.
The Lumenis Pulse P120H holmium laser system is shipped in a

shockproof container. Contents may vary according to the purchase
agreement with Lumenis, but the parts and accessories generally
shipped in the container are:
• Lumenis Pulse P120H laser console and power cable

• Safety eyewear
• Detachable dual-pedal footswitch
• System accessories (according to purchase agreement)
• External interlock connector plug (not installed, shipped in the
accessories box)
• Keys
• Operator manual
• Fiber Support Arm (optional purchase)
Unpack the unit as follows:
1. Verify that the shipping crate is intact and check the shock indicator
on the crate to make sure that the crate has not been subjected to
shock. If it has, notify Lumenis offices and your insurance office
before opening the crate.
Figure 3-2 Shock Indicator Label
3-8
Note
Any damage to the packaging or to the system found prior to opening
the packaging, or during unpacking and installation of the system,
should be immediately reported to your Lumenis distributor and to
the insurance carrier.
Save all packaging materials in case repacking and shipping

become necessary at a later date.
2. With a utility knife, cut the plastic bands surrounding the box and
cut the masking tape down the middle of the box.
3. Open the box flaps and remove the accessories box and fibers
stored in the top of the box.
Figure 3-3 Unpacking Lumenis Pulse 120H
4. Lift the top divider of the box to expose the foam and console top.
5. Remove the foam from the top of the system.
6. With one person on each side, grasp two built-in handles on the
right and left panels of the system and lift the system up and out of
the box.
7. Lock the laser console wheel (right brake pedal - down).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-9

Note
Unlock the front wheels by positioning the front break pedals in the
neutral position.
Unlock the back wheels, with multidirectional movement, by

positioning the back break pedals in the neutral position.
Unlock the back wheels, with unidirectional movement, by

positioning the left back break pedal down.
Figure 3-4 Brake Pedals Configurations
3.4.1 Grounding the System

properly wired hospital grade power receptacle. Additional grounding
can be provided by using the external ground connection point.
Use only a power receptacle and plug that are in good condition and are
specified for your unit.
Use only a hospital grade plug and a correctly matched power

receptacle.
3-10
To remove the power cable from the receptacle, hold it by the plug.
Never pull on the power cable to remove the plug from the receptacle.
3.5 System Setup and Installation

The system has passed full quality assurance testing before shipment
and should be operational upon delivery.
Before connecting the Lumenis Pulse P120H holmium laser system

components, inspect the individual components, cables, and electrical
connections for dirt, debris, or damage. Ensure that the electrical cables
are not frayed or split.
Warning
Before attempting to operate the unit, wait 2 hours to
enable defrosting of water in the cooling system. Operate
the unit at room temperature only!
Note
High room temperatures and humidity can cause accumulation of
dampness to the Holmium bricks which can affect their performance.
Therefore, before installation, and calibration, adjustment and
alignment of the optical components, verify that the room
temperature is below 24°C and the humidity is lower than 50%.
3.5.1 AC Controller Configuration

1. Open the left and right cover and top cover.
2. Open the door to the AC controller by releasing the 2 screws (see
Figure 3-5).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-11

Figure 3-5 AC Controller - Open for Installation
3.5.2 AC Controller and Transformer Setup, 1-Phase

Configuration
Note
For AC Controller and Transformer Setup for 3-Phase, see Section
3.5.3‘AC Controller, 3-Phase Configuration’ on page 3-14
1. Check ground continuity: connect a DVM between the ground of

the main PLUG and the system chassis.
2. Check the wall line voltage. Record the reading.
3. Check the jumper on J8 of the AC controller. Verify that the jumper
is connected to the voltage corresponding to the reading received
on the DVM. If not, move the jumper to the correct voltage.
Voltage Selection
190-210 VAC
211-230 VAC
231-264 VAC
Figure 3-6 Voltage Selection
3-12
Figure 3-7 Jumper on J8: Configuration, 1-Phase
4. Make sure that the main transformer is configured with the correct
line voltage corresponding to the system configuration. If needed,
re-connect the corresponding transformer line voltage (brown wire)
according to the table: 208/220/240VAC.
Brown
wire
Figure 3-8 Main Transformer Line Voltage
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-13

3.5.3 AC Controller, 3-Phase Configuration

1. Check ground continuity: connect a DVM between the ground of
the main PLUG and the system chassis.
2. Check the wall line voltage. Record the reading.
3. Check the jumper on J8 of the AC controller. Verify that the jumper
is connected to the voltage corresponding to the reading received
on the DVM. If not, move the jumper to the correct voltage.
Voltage Selection
400 VAC
440 VAC
Figure 3-9 Jumper on J8: Configuration, 3-Phase
Input Mains:
340VAC - 414VAC wire jumpered to 400VAC on J8.
414VAC - 456VAC wire jumpered to 440VAC on J8.
3-14
3.5.4 Transformer Setup, 3-Phase Configuration

Make sure that the main transformer is configured with the
correct line voltage corresponding to the system configuration.
Check the main wall AC voltage phase-to-phase, and if needed, re-
connect the corresponding transformer line voltage (brown wire)
according to the table: 380/400/415VAC.
Figure 3-10 shows the default layout of the AC inlet from the main
contactor to the main transformer.
Figure 3-10 AC Inlet from Main Contactor to Main Trafo
4. Figure 3-11 shows the system configured for 400V; to configure

the system for 380V or 415V, refer to the chart in Figure 3-12.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-15

Figure 3-11 Line Voltage Layout, 400VAC
Figure 3-12 Voltage Configuration Chart
3-16
3.6 Main Plug Connection
Note
Systems shipped to China (GA-0006900CN) are shipped with the
main plug already configured and assembled.
1. Connect the plug supplied from the hospital site to the system
power cord according to Figure 3-13 and the table below:
Note
The system is shipped with a power cord which does not have the
cord plug connected. The plug must be supplied by the hospital.
The power cord socket must be configured according to the relevant

1-phase or 3-phase configuration.
Color Wire
Domestic Configuration: White Neutral

120W/60Hz
Black Phase
Green/Yellow Ground
Domestic Configuration: White Neutral

120W/60Hz 30A
Black Phase
Green/Yellow Ground
International Configuration: Brown Phase

120W/50Hz
Blue Neutral
Green/Yellow Ground
International Configuration: Brown Phase

100W/50Hz 32A
Blue Neutral
Green/Yellow Ground
3-Phase Configuration* Grey T: Phase III
*The system operates with a 3- Green/Yellow Ground

phase line voltage and ground Brown R: Phase I
without a neutral line.
Black S: Phase II
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-17

Figure 3-13 Power Cord - Domestic Configuration
Figure 3-14 Power Cord - International/100W Configuration
Figure 3-15 Power Cord - International/120W Configuration
3-18
Figure 3-16 Power Cord - 3 Phase Configuration
2. For all configurations: After the cord plug is connected, perform

ground continuity test: Using a digital multi-meter, connect the
probes between the plug ground and the system ground. Pass
criteria is resistance below 0.2Ω.
3. Make sure the main power is plugged in to the main wall power and
the keyswitch is turned on.
3.6.1 Attach Voltage Rating Label

Take the appropriate voltage rating label from the accessories box and
attach it on top of the existing label located on the manufacturing label
at the back of the system as shown in xxx. The labels included in the
shipment are as follows:
• 200VAC, 50Hz
• 220VAC, 50Hz
• 240VAC, 50Hz
• 200VAC, 60Hz
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-19

Figure 3-17 Voltage Rating Labels and Location
3.6.2 Filling the System with Water
Note
The system uses deionized water only (about 4 liters).
1. Take the service HASP and connect it to the service USB port.
Note
(the Service HASP has an expiration date of 1 year from the first
use.).
3-20
2. Verify that the circuit breaker is ON (UP) and the keyswitch is ON.
circuit
breaker
Figure 3-18 Circuit Breaker Location
3. Make sure all four large coolant fittings on the cooling unit are
connected securely and properly.
Figure 3-19 Cooling Unit Water Connections
4. Assemble the refill tool tubing and funnel as shown.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-21

Figure 3-20 Assemble Water Filling Tool
5. Insert the refilling tool into the water tanks’s top quick-connector.
Figure 3-21 Connecting Water Filling Tool to Water Tank
6. Pour water into the water tank until it reaches between the MIN and
MAX levels on the water tank.
7. Turn the system on by pressing the On/Off button (long press);
3-22
8. After splash screen, the message appears - press Yes and verify that
the LED indicator on the main service screen changes from red to
green.
Figure 3-22 HASP Detected Message
9. From the Main screen, click Subsystem and then click Cooling (see
Figure 3-23).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-23

Figure 3-23 Sub-system - Cooling Screen
10. In Cooling screen, press pump ON (#1 in Figure 3-23); the water
starts to pump around the system and the water empties from the
reservoir. Wait a few seconds until you hear a stop in water flow, or
until the reservoir empties of water. Press pump OFF.
3-24
11. Lift the lever on top of the particle filter up firmly several times to
release the air bubbles from the system.
Caution
The lever presses on the air release valve of the particle filter.
Make sure that the lever is pointed DOWN (red button not
pressed) each time before adding water. Failure to do so may
result in water leakage from the particle filter air release valve.
Figure 3-24 Particle Filter Lever
12. Pour more water into the water tank until it reaches between the
MIN and MAX levels on the water tank.
13. Repeat steps 12-14 until the reservoir is full (MAX) and there are
no bubbles in the particle filter and the water level in the reservoir
is stable.
14. Let the system run with the pump ON for 5 minutes. Verify
visually that there are no leaks in the system.
15. Verify on the Cooling screen that the System Flow Switch indicator
turns green.
16. In the Cooling screen, press Chiller ON (#2 in Figure 3-23). Verify
that all the statuses on the screen are active (green). In addition,
verify that the temperature of the chiller reaches 19°C within 3
minutes for V2 laser brick or 15°C for V1(#3 in Figure 3-23).
17. Remove the taped air valve from the side of the water tank and
insert it into its place on the water tank.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-25

Figure 3-25 Air Valve Location on Water Tank
3.6.3 Connecting the Footswitch

Connect the footswitch as follows:
1. Insert the footswitch connector into the FOOTSWITCH receptacle
on the rear of the console.
2. Align the red dot of the footswitch connector with the red dot of the
receptacle, then push it in.
Figure 3-26 Connecting the Footswitch
Note
If the footswitch is not properly connected when the laser is turned
on, the message Foot Pedal is not Connected appears in the
notification bar on the screen until the footswitch is properly
connected.
3-26
3.6.4 Connecting the External Interlock Plug
Warning
Ensure that the system is turned off and that the power
cord is disconnected from the outlet before connecting or
disconnecting the external interlock system.
The external door interlock is a safety feature that disables the laser if
the treatment room doors are opened or the interlock plug is removed
while the laser is in Ready mode. The external interlock plug is
installed in the back of the laser console.
Use of the external door interlock is optional; however, the use of the
connector is required. The laser remains inoperative until the
connector is inserted.
1. Align the pins of the external door interlock connector with the
socket of the external interlock receptacle.
2. Insert the external interlock connector into the external interlock
receptacle.
3. Turn the metal lock clockwise until it screws in.
4. If the treatment door is opened (when the external door interlock is
used) or if the external door interlock connector is removed, the
laser automatically disables and returns to STANDBY mode and
Remote Interlock notification appears in the notification bar.
5. To resume treatment, close the treatment room door or reinsert the
external door interlock connector, and press the READY selector.
Note
If you insert the external door interlock connector, remember to
screw in its sleeve.
Figure 3-27 Connecting the External Door Interlock
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-27

External Door Interlock Pin Assignments

The external door interlock is a safety feature that disables the laser if
the treatment room doors are opened or the interlock plug is removed
while the laser is in ready mode.
The interlock can be set up with an external double switch (Normally

Open-NO type ).
Note
Plug wiring may only be performed by a qualified electrical
professional. Total length of cable should not exceed five
meters (16 feet or 5 meters.)
1. Disconnect the Interlock plug (Figure 3-28) by removing the

single screw from the Interlock housing.
Figure 3-28 Interlock Plug-Remove Single Screw
2. Disconnect the jumpers wires from the Interlock plug (see Figure
3-29).
Figure 3-29 Disconnect Jumper Wires from Interlock Plug
3-28
3. Assemble by soldering the OR external switch to the cable and to

the interlock plug according to the diagram.
Figure 3-30 Pin Assignments-External Switch
3.6.5 Adjusting the Fiber Support Arm

1. Lift the fiber support arm so that it faces straight up, then turn the
collar knob clockwise to lock the fiber support arm in place.
2. Adjust the position of the fiber support arm and turn the arm knob
clockwise to lock it in place.
Figure 3-31 Adjusting the Fiber Support Arm
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-29

Caution
Ensure that the fiber support arm knob is closed properly in order
to prevent unintended arm movement that may pull and cause
damage to the fiber.
3.6.6 Connecting the Delivery System

Before connecting the delivery system to the laser, refer to the
appropriate delivery system instruction guide for specific instructions,
such as delivery system inspection, sterilization, and assembly.
Note
A long SIS test fiber may be used for installation.
Warning
When using a fiber optic delivery device, always inspect
the fiber optic cable to ensure that it has not been kinked,
punctured, fractured, or otherwise damaged. The fiber
optic cable may be damaged if stepped on, pulled, left lying
in a vulnerable position, kinked, or tightly coiled. Do not
clamp the cable with a hemostat or other instruments. If
sterile tape is used, always remove the tape before lifting
the cable. A damaged fiber optic cable may cause
accidental laser exposure or injury to the treatment room
personnel or patient, and/or fire in the treatment room.
Note
The Lumenis Pulse 120H system will only operate with Lumenis-
qualified SIS (Secure Identification System) optical delivery fibers.
Connecting any other type of fiber will generate an error message
and laser emission will be disabled.
3-30
Caution
To avoid possible damage to the optical system, use only

qualified Lumenis delivery systems. Using other than Lumenis
delivery systems may jeopardize safe operation or damage the
laser and will void your Lumenis warranty or service contract.
Caution
To prevent accidental laser discharge, always turn off the laser

before connecting the delivery system.
1. Open the fiber port window by moving the window handle from
left to right.
Figure 3-32 Fiber Port
2. Inspect the delivery system as instructed in the appropriate delivery

system instruction guide.
Caution
Never inspect the delivery system while it is connected to the

laser. Accidental laser exposure can cause severe eye damage.
3. Remove the protective cap from the laser connector.

4. Secure the laser connector to the laser by screwing the connector
into the fiber receptacle on the front of the laser. If the laser
connector is not properly seated and securely screwed into the fiber
receptacle, Fiber not connected appears in the notification area on
the control screen.
Caution
When removing the protective cap, hold the laser connector, not
the strain relief or fiber optic cable. Pulling on the strain relief or
fiber optic cable may damage the delivery system and result in
unintended laser exposure.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-31

Figure 3-33 Fiber Delivery System Connected
3.6.7 Adjusting the Screen

1. Unfold the LCD panel.
2. Turn the LCD panel counter-clockwise to the position needed.
3. Adjust the angle of the LCD panel.
Figure 3-34 Adjusting the Screen
3.6.8 Connecting the Suction System

The suction system is used with an optional handpiece. Connection of
the suction system is necessary only when using the handpiece.
The surgeon may use Lumenis Pulse 120H laser's built-in suction
system to remove tissue, liquids, stones or other debris into the
collection container. The Lumenis-supplied disposables required for
this are:
• Collection container kit.
3-32
• Sterile aspiration tube.

• Non-sterile drainage tube.
Refer to Figure 3-35:
1. Insert a new collection container into the designed holder in the

laser system.
2. Connect one side of a non-sterile drainage tube to the collection
container's Outlet port. Connect the other side to the operating
room's hazardous waste evacuation system.
3. Connect one side of the sterile aspiration tube to the surgical
accessory. Connect the other side of the tube to the collection
container's Inlet port.
Figure 3-35 Suction System
4. Pull open the suction pump.
Figure 3-36 Pulling Open the Suction Pump
5. Insert the drainage tube into the channel in the suction pump.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-33

Warning
Aspiration flows in the direction of the arrow on the pump
head. Always verify that the aspiration tube is loaded in the
required direction.
Figure 3-37 Directional Arrow for the Aspiration Tube
6. Close the suction pump until you feel it 'snap' into place.
7. Turn the Suction Rate knob clockwise to increase or counter-
clockwise to decrease the suction rate.
If the suction system does not function properly, or does not operate at
all, a warning to this effect will be indicated on the display. The laser
system may still be used without suction.
3.6.9 Plugging in the Main Power Cable

1. Insert the laser main power plug into the mains power socket. If the
laser has a locking plug and socket, connect the plug collar to the
socket so that the plug is secure
2. Turn on the main circuit breaker.
3-34
Figure 3-38 Main Circuit Breaker Location
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-35

3.7 Initial System Testing
Note
If any fault conditions are encountered during laser start-up and self-
test, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.
Before beginning system test, make sure that the laser operating area is
safe and secure. As when performing any laser procedure, flammable
materials should be moistened or beyond contact of the laser beam.
Protective goggles or glasses should be worn.
The required test includes the following procedures, which should be

performed in the order indicated:
1. Section 3.7.1‘System Startup’ on page 3-36

2. Section 3.7.2‘Footswitch Connection Check’ on page 3-38
3. Section 3.7.3‘Emergency Stop Button Check’ on page 3-38
4. Section 3.7.4‘Fiber Switch Check’ on page 3-39
5. Section 3.7.5‘Aiming Beam Intensity Inspection’ on page 3-39
6. Section 3.7.6‘Ready/Standby Check’ on page 3-39
7. Section 3.7.7‘Blastshield Check’ on page 3-39
8. Section 3.7.8‘Far Alignment Inspection’ on page 3-40
9. Section 3.7.9‘Centration Check’ on page 3-40
10. Section 3.7.10‘Power Meter Check - 120W’ on page 3-41 or
Section 3.7.11‘Power Meter Check - 100W’ on page 3-42
11. Section 3.8.1‘Installation Check List’ on page 3-50
If at any point during the initial system testing the system does not
perform as described, troubleshoot the problem.
3.7.1 System Startup

Service mode can only be accessed by Lumenis authorized technicians
by a service HASP. Auto lasing is disabled by the service HASP (if it
was plugged into the system before power up), for enabling service
personnel to control the system power Up process, wither with lasing
operations or without any lasing operation on startup.
3-36
The software does not enable switching back from the service mode to
user mode. In order to return to the system’s normal operation, the
system must be restarted.
The software activates the service mode only if the service HASP is
detected.
For more information about the service HASP, see Section 6.5‘Service
Mode’ on page 6-18.
1. Make sure the system's main circuit breaker is switched to the On

position.
2. Press the main On/Off button and hold for one full second, then
release. Upon release, the spring-loaded button pops back out.
• If the keyswitch is in the Off position, the system will only
allow you to access reports. To turn the laser on, you will need
to restart while the keyswitch is in the On position.
• If the keyswitch is in the On position, this starts a laser self-test
and warm-up procedure that take approximately one minute to
complete. A progress bar appears on the control screen during
the self-test and warm-up-up procedure.When the self-test is
successfully completed, the initial screen appears (Select
Specialty).
Note
If any fault conditions are encountered during laser start-up and self-
test, error messages can appear in pop-up windows or in the
notification area on the control screen. Refer to the Troubleshooting
Guide section of this manual.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-37

Figure 3-39 Main (Select Specialty) Screen
3.7.2 Footswitch Connection Check

Laser beam emission is disabled when the footswitch is not connected
or is improperly connected. To check this:
1. Set the system to Ready mode in the Treatment screen.

2. Unplug the footswitch; verify that the system goes into Standby and
displays the following error message: Error 141.
3. If the system does not display the error message and remains in
Ready mode, discontinue use and troubleshoot the problem.
3.7.3 Emergency Stop Button Check

The Emergency Stop button is designed to disable the laser system
when pressed. To check this button:
1. While the system is on, press the emergency stop button; error 137
and 255 appear in the Notification window.
3-38
2. To resume operation, turn the emergency stop button clockwise

until it releases and pops out; then use the keyswitch to turn the
system back on again.
3.7.4 Fiber Switch Check
Note
This activity can be performed with a long SIS test fiber connected.

2. Turn the optic fiber counter-clockwise until Fault 150 is displayed.
3.7.5 Aiming Beam Intensity Inspection

1. Connect a long test fiber to the fiber port.
2. Set the system to the Main Treatment screen.
3. Verify on the display that the aiming beam intensity increases when
the RIGHT arrow button is touched, and decreases when the LEFT
arrow button is touched.
3.7.6 Ready/Standby Check

In Standby mode, verify that the system does not fire when the
footswitch is pressed.
3.7.7 Blastshield Check

2. Remove the Main blast shield and verify that Fault 151 is
displayed.
3. Inspect the blast shield for cleanliness and for smooth operation in
and out of its slot.
4. Reinsert the blast shield and verify that “Fault 151” message
disappears from the screen.
5. Do the same for the spare blast shields; verify that Fault 162/163 is
displayed, and the system goes to Standby mode.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-39

3.7.8 Far Alignment Inspection

1. In Service Mode Self Test screen, press Run All Tests.
2. Color the tip of a short test fiber with a red marker and connect it to
the system. Make sure that the Lumenis logo on the fiber tip is
facing up.
3. In Service mode, in the Lasing Control screen, use the following
parameters: 2 Hz, 25-30J.
4. Press READY and then press the footswitch. The pedal press
should be short enough to generate only a few pulses.
5. Using the Inspection Scope, check each brick
separately that the spot is centered in the scope
(see Figure 3-40).
Figure 3-40 Burn Spot
6. Repeat the inspection check with the fiber tip’s Lumenis Logo
facing down.
7. After each brick is checked separately, perform the Final Optical
Inspection on all four heads together, checking for centration of all
four heads.
8. If the check does not meet an acceptable result, perform optical
alignment.
3.7.9 Centration Check

Perform this check for each head separately, and then the four head
together, checking for centration of all four heads.
1. Place the burn paper (wrapped in plastic) 5 cm from the fiber port
assembly aperture.
3-40
2. In the Lasing Control screen, set screen parameters to 2 Hz and 40-

50J.
3. Fire a pulse and verify that the spot size is a nice, round shape.
Bad sample Good sample

space in pattern dense pattern
Figure 3-41 Centration Check Samples
3.7.10 Power Meter Check - 120W

Use a long SIS test fiber for this check.
1. Turn the system on and in User mode select one of the parameters
in the table, then go to READY.
2. Fire the laser with a SIS long test fiber into external power meter at
different power levels, and check that it is equal to the desired
power.
Note
When performing the check, lasing should be for 1 full minute.
Short Pulse Width (800V)

The short pulse width is checked using either the left or right
footswitch pedal.
Results should be within the acceptance range ±10%.
Pulse Energy (J) Frequency Acceptance

(Hz) Range (Watts)
6 10 60
0.5 80 40
2 60 120
0.8 10 8
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-41


(Hz) Range (Watts)
0.2 80 16
2 50 100
Medium Pulse Width (650V)

The medium pulse width is checked using the left footswitch pedal.

(Hz) Range (Watts)
1.2 20 24
0.6 20 12
1.0 20 20
0.4 30 12
0.6 30 18
Long Pulse Width (550V)

The long pulse width is checked using the right footswitch pedal.

(Hz) Range (Watts)
0.6 20 12
0.4 20 8
0.2 30 6
0.3 30 9
0.5 30 15
3.7.11 Power Meter Check - 100W

Use a long SIS test fiber for this check.
1. Turn the system on and in User mode select one of the parameters
in the table, then go to READY.
3-42
2. Fire the laser with a SIS long test fiber into external power meter at
different power levels; check that it is equal to the desired power.
Note
When performing the check, lasing should be for 1 full minute.
Short Pulse Width

The short pulse width is checked using either the left or right
footswitch pedal. Results should be within the acceptance range ±10%.
Pulse Energy (J) Frequency (Hz) Acceptance

Range (Watts)
0.2 15 3
1.0 10 10
1.0 45 45
2.0 45 90
2.0 50 100
5.5 20 110
Medium Pulse Width

The medium pulse width is checked using the left footswitch pedal.
Pulse Energy (J) Frequency (Hz) Acceptance

Range (Watts)
0.2 10 2
0.5 20 10
1.5 30 45
2.0 30 60
3.2 20 64
3.5 20 70
Long Pulse Width

The long pulse width is checked using the right footswitch pedal.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-43


(Hz) Range (Watts)
0.2 10 2
0.2 30 6
1.0 20 20
1.2 20 24
3.7.12 Setting User Preferences

User preferences may be set or adjusted from the Quick Settings screen.
These settings include: date, time, and system beep volume.
Adjusting Volume and Sound
The Quiet mode check box does not affect the signal that is emitted
during lasing or any other sounds that are directly related to safety.
1. Press the cogwheel in the upper-right corner and select Quick

Settings.
Figure 3-42 Select Quick Settings
2. In the Quick Settings screen that opens, slide the upper slider to the
right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
If you do not want to hear any voice indications (“Ready”/
”Standby” vocal indications), select the Quiet Mode check box.
3-44
Figure 3-43 Select Quick Settings Slider
3. Press OK.
Setting / Changing Language

Available languages are English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and
Portuguese. The default language for user is English.
1. From the Main Menu screen, press the Setting & Utilities button.
2. Press the Language button.
Figure 3-44 Language Button
3. In the Change Language screen that opens, select the language that
you want to change to.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-45

Figure 3-45 Settings & Utilities > Change Language
4. Press OK.
Note
If you accidentally change the language to one that you do not know
how to read, open the language drop down menu and the flag will
appear next to the language in which it was installed (local
language).
Figure 3-46 Settings & Utilities > Language Reset Flag
3-46
3.7.13 Verify License

1. Enter the Settings & Utilities screen (from the menu in the right
upper corner).
2. Press Licenses.
Figure 3-47 Verify License
3. Press ‘View Licenses’ to verify that the license of the machine is

correct and the serial number and the part number match the label
on the system.
4. Verify that the correct fiber is enabled: Lumenis Fiber is for ROW
and Boston Scientific is for U.S. systems.
Figure 3-48 View License - Fibers
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-47

3.7.14 Copying the Calibration Files

Copy the calibration files to create a backup of calibration data in case
of corrupted hard disk.
Do the following:
1. Go to Service Mode.
2. Insert a memory stick (Disk on Key) into a free USB port on the
service panel.
3. Click Setting & Utilities.
4. Select Import/Export Operations.
Figure 3-49 Export System Calibrations
5. Press Export and then press OK.

6. When done, the “Export Operation completed successfully”, press
OK.
7. A Calibration Results folder is generated with files containing the
calibration data.
3-48
3.8 Installation Report

The checklist below lists the activities performed during installation.
Make and fill out a photocopy of this checklist to ensure that all
installation activities have been performed successfully. Keep the
signed copy for your records. Keep the original blank for further use.
It is highly recommended to save all the following data recorded on
USB (Disk On Key) Refer to Section ‘Exporting the Calibration
Data’ on page 6-31 .
Date:
System Serial Number:
System Series Number:
System Version:
LPU SW Version
MMCU SW Version:
MMCU FPGA SW Version:
HV PMCU SW Version:
HV PMCU FPGA SW Version:
Mirror Motor SW Version:
Chiller SW Version:
Potentiometer Calibration:
MainPyroGain: SafetyPyroGain:
MainPyroHolGain SafetyPyroHolGain
Aiming Beam Calibration:
Level 1:
Level 2:
Level 3:
Servo Motor Calibration:
Brick 1: Degrees:
Brick 2: Degrees:
Brick 3: Degrees:
Brick 4: Degrees:
Site Name:
Address:
Country:
Technician:
Comments:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-49

3.8.1 Installation Check List

Electrical Requirements (Section 3.3.1 )
OK Not OK Description Remarks

Correct Line supply (see Section 3.3.1‘Electrical
 
Requirements’ on page 3-3)
System power line not shared with other heavy
  variable loads such as elevators, air conditioning
systems, large motors, etc.
  Separate power line with separate circuit breakers
System power line not shared with other heavy
  variable loads such as elevators, air conditioning
systems, large motors, etc.
Space and Positioning Requirements (Section 3.3.5 )

  At least 50 cm (2 ft.) from the wall
  Adequate work area
  Fire, safety, and first aid equipment
Environmental Requirements (Section 3.3.6 )

  Room temperature between 10°C - 24°C
(50°F - 77°F)
  Relative humidity up to 50%
  System far from heating ducts or other outlets
Unpacking the System (Section 3.4)

  Verify that shipping crate is intact.
Check the shock indicator on the box; verify that the
  crate has not been subjected to shock.
  Open the crate and remove the system.
Remove all accessories from crate and check for
  missing items.
Move the system and accessories to the treatment
  room.
  Visually inspect the system exterior for damage.
  Mount the Danger sign in the treatment room
3-50
Setting up the System (Section 3.5)

  Connect the footswitch.
Check the system mains plug for compatibility with the local
  mains receptacle. If not, replace it with one that matches the
power socket.
Attach the relevant voltage rating label to the
  manufacturer’s label at the back of the system
  Add deionized water to the reservoir
  Connect the system power cable
Initial System Testing (Section 3.7)

  Turn on the system (Verify no errors appear).
  In the Options screen, adjust time zone, date and time.
  Turn off the system.

Perform the following checks:
  Section 3.7.1‘System Startup’ on page 3-36
Section 3.7.2‘Footswitch Connection Check’ on page 3-
 
38
Section 3.7.3‘Emergency Stop Button Check’ on page 3-
 
38
  Section 3.7.4‘Fiber Switch Check’ on page 3-39
Section 3.7.5‘Aiming Beam Intensity Inspection’ on
 
page 3-39
  Section 3.7.6‘Ready/Standby Check’ on page 3-39
  Section 3.7.7‘Blastshield Check’ on page 3-39
  Section 3.7.8‘Far Alignment Inspection’ on page 3-40
  Section 3.7.9‘Centration Check’ on page 3-40
Section 3.7.10‘Power Meter Check - 120W’ on page 3-41
  or Section 3.7.11‘Power Meter Check - 100W’ on page 3-
42
  Section 3.7.12‘Setting User Preferences’ on page 3-44
Section 3.7.14‘Copying the Calibration Files’ on page 3-
 
48
I hereby certify that the installation activities described in this checklist
have been performed successfully and to the satisfaction of the
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-51

customer. This installation was performed in accordance with the

instructions in the service manual.
Service Engineer Date

(Printed Name):
Signature:
3-52
3.9 Preventive Maintenance for

Pulse120H System
The Lumenis Pulse 120H system requires periodic maintenance on a
routine basis in order for the system to perform at original factory
specifications.
Preventive maintenance should be performed once a year or more often

as required.
The checklist below lists the preventive maintenance activities. Fill out
a photocopy of this checklist to ensure that all preventive maintenance
activities have been performed successfully. Keep the signed copy for
your records. Keep the original blank for further use.
Caution
Use proper laser eyewear when performing activities

involving the delivery system. Accidental laser
exposure can cause severe eye damage.
Caution
All preventive maintenance and repairs should be

referred to and performed only by a Lumenis-
authorized field service engineer (FSE).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-53

3.9.1 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

SYSTEM PART NUMBER;
SYSTEM SERIAL NUMBER:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION:
LPU SW Version
MMCU SW Version:
Main Board FPGA SW Version:
HV PMCU SW Version:
HV Board FPGA SW Version:
Mirror Motor SW Version:
Chiller SW Version:
Servo Mirror Parameters:
ACTIVITY TYPE: Preventive Maintenance 

Demo 
Sale 
CUSTOMER:
SERVICE ENGINEER:
DATE:
3-54
Visual Inspection
Pass Fail Description Remarks
Remove the covers and check the following:
  Loose hardware
  Broken components
  Abnormal wear
  Water stains
  Cuts or frays in electrical wiring
  Contaminated optics; remove the laser deck

cover and the cavity cover. Inspect all optics,
clean or replace if necessary ( 7.7).
  Clean external covers
Parts Replacement Activities

  Replace the particle filter-9.16.1
  Replace the DI cartridge-see par.9.16.2

  Replace the system water (distilled)-see
par.9.3.4
  Check/replace debris shield optic-see par.8.8
Cooling System Activities

  Check the coolant level. Add additional coolant
as required; use deionized water -see
par.3.6.2 .
  Tighten all hose clamps.
Operational Checks
Use a long SIS Test Fiber:
  Footswitch connection check -see par.3.7.2
  Emergency stop button check-see par.3.7.3
  Fiber switch check-see par.3.7.4
  Aiming Beam Intensity Inspection-see
par.3.7.5
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-55

  Ready/Standby Check-see par.3.7.6

  Remote Interlock check-see par.3.6.4
  Debris Shield Check-see par.3.7.7
  Section 3.7.8‘Far Alignment Inspection’ on
page 3-40
  Section 3.7.9‘Centration Check’ on
page 3-40
  Section 3.7.10‘Power Meter Check -
120W’ on page 3-41
or Section 3.7.11‘Power Meter Check -
100W’ on page 3-42
  Section 7.5.2‘Aiming Beam Intensity
Check’ on page 7-45
Comments:
I hereby certify that the preventive maintenance activities described in

this checklist have been performed successfully and to the satisfaction
of the customer. This preventive maintenance was performed in
accordance with the instructions in the service manual.
Service Engineer Date

(Printed Name):
Signature:
3-56
3.10 Shutting Down the System

1. Press the On/Off button and wait until the system power down.
• Normal system shutdown: press the main On/Off button for one
second (short press)
• Forced system shut-down: press the main ON/Off button for at
least five seconds (long press).
Caution
Use the forced system shut-down method only when the system
does not respond.
Note
You can also perform a normal system shut-down from the control
screen by selecting the Turn Off System from the cogwheel icon.
Figure 3-50 Turn Off System from Screen
2. Disconnect the delivery system from the laser.

3. Turn off the mains circuit breaker.
4. Remove the main power plug from the wall receptacle.
5. Remove the footswitch connector from the laser.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-57

3.11 Moving the System

1. Ensure that the laser is properly disconnected, as instructed above.
2. Rotate the LCD panel backwards and fold it down with the screen
facing downwards.
Figure 3-51 Folding the LCD Panel
3. Unlock both the front and back wheels in order to move the system:
• Unlock the front wheels by positioning the front break pedals in
the neutral position.
• Unlock the back wheels, with multidirectional movement, by
positioning the back break pedals in the neutral position.
• Unlock the back wheels, with unidirectional movement, by
positioning the left back break pedal down.
4. Move they system to the desired location. Verify that the Lumenis
Pulse 120H laser console is a minimum of 50 centimeters (20
inches) from walls, furniture, or other equipment..
Caution
As with any heavy equipment, use caution when tilting the laser
console or moving it up or down an incline. For optimum safety,
use a second person when moving up or down a steep incline.
Note
Do not move the laser console rapidly over uneven surfaces; doing
so may damage the equipment.
5. Lock the laser console wheels by pushing the front or back right
brake pedal down.
3-58
Figure 3-52 Brakes
3.11.1 For Shipping the System outside the Facility

• Don’t ship the system without the factory packaging materials.
Doing so may result in damage to the components during
shipping and void the warranty. Use the original packaging.
• The system must be drained of all its water before shipping.
Refer to Section 9.3‘Water Draining Procedure’ on page 9-11.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 3-59

3-60
C H A P T E R
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4.1 Introduction
Lumenis lasers and delivery systems are precision medical instruments.
They have undergone extensive testing and with proper handling are
useful and reliable clinical instruments. If you have questions regarding
your laser or delivery system, contact your local Lumenis representa-
tive.
Warning
Lasers generate a highly concentrated beam of light which may
cause injury if improperly used. Before operation, make sure that
you read and understand the operator manual for the laser and
the appropriate delivery system, including all Safety and
Regulatory sections.
Lumenis Pulse 120H is a new generation of high power Holmium

lasers A totally new design of
• Electronics
• Software
• Cooling
• Mechanics
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-1

Based on the VersaPulse PowerSuite optical deck design with changes:
• Green aiming beam

• Updated Focus lens for compatibility with 230 micron fibers
• Updated mirror motor & control for 80Hz operation
• Updated flash lamps for improved durability
Laser Features
• Maximum power increased to 120W in several regimes
• Maximum pulse energy is up to 6J/pulse at up to 10Hz for improved
stone fragmentation
• Maximum repetition rate is 80Hz for stone dusting
• Reduced Peak Power pulse with long duration for coagulation
System Features
• SIS fibers system
• Suction system
• Fiber and suction tube support arm
• New 12.1” touch-screen with a modern GUI
Maintainability and Serviceability

• Improved modularity
• Improved Built-In-Test and reporting
• Works with an external USB drive for generating user level reports,
saving user presets, and exporting log files that can be sent by the
user to the service.
The Lumenis Pulse 120H is a 120 Watt surgical Holmium laser. The
system is based on a Ho:YAG rod with flash lamp cavity. A charger
charges the capacitor bank with energy, then the switching module
simmer ionizes the Flash lamp so it will be ready for lasing by
maintaining a low arc current between electrodes. Once the switching
module IGBT (Insulated Gated Bipolar Transistor) switches the
capacitor bank to the flash lamp, high current flows into the flash lamp
and the attached Holmium rod starts lasing power into the attached
Fiber.
4-2
General Description
The Holmium brick is cooled by a cooling water system (deionized

water) and chiller (gas unit), cooling the water to 16°C. The lasing
power is controlled in real time closed loop (Pyro) by adjusting the
pulse width to the switching module to achieve the requested power.
The system has a green aiming beam that points the operator/technician
to the lasing point. The system includes a blast shield in front of the
fiber output connector. The system and the fibers integrate an RF-ID
Security Identification System (SIS) to prevent the use of fibers that are
not approved by Lumenis.
The System uses Lumenis SIS Slim Line fibers.
The system is comprised of a main console with an output optical port,

which a fiber is connected to. The fiber usage is managed by a Security
Information System (SIS) embedded within the machine. The system
also integrates with a dual pedal footswitch. The system operates in a
one- phase configuration or three-phase configuration.
4.1.1 Characteristics of the Holmium Laser

Wavelength
The holmium laser wavelength falls in the near-infrared region of the
electromagnetic spectrum. This wavelength is invisible to the human
eye; therefore, a low-power, visible aiming beam is used to target
tissue.
The holmium laser wavelength is strongly absorbed by water in tissue.

Since soft tissue is comprised primarily of water, holmium laser energy
can be used effectively for excision, incision, ablation, and vaporiza-
tion when in direct contact with soft tissue, and for coagulation when in
near contact with soft tissue.
The system is plugged into an electrical receptacle, the appropriate

receptacle should already be installed by the customer’s electrician.
The installing engineer connects the plug to the end of the Lumenis
Pulse 120H holmium laser electrical cable.
A delivery system SIS fiber is attached to a fiber port on the front of the
system console.The delivery fiber comes in a number of styles to meet
the requirements of various applications (angled, etc.). The system will
not fire without a valid SIS delivery fiber attached.
Once the system operating parameters are selected, the user selects the
READY mode, positions the fiber output at the treatment site, then
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-3

depresses the footswitch to deliver treatment pulses at the rate and

energy selected. The treatment delivery will continue until the
footswitch is released. The shutter opens and treatment delivery begins.
Fault monitoring continues for as long as the system is turned on, and
any detected fault is reported on the touchscreen display.
An emergency off button is located on the front cover next to the ON/
Of button. The emergency button does not shut off the power, it stops
all activity (lasing, suction, etc.) that could have safety implication.
Figure 4-1 presents a description of the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium

laser system. This product, as all Lumenis products, is designed and
manufactured according to the highest quality standards ISO 13485, by
which Lumenis is certified.
4-4
General Description
4.2 System Description and Main

Features
The Lumenis Pulse 120H laser comprises the following components
and features:
• Laser console
• Rotatable control screen
• Dual-pedal footswitch
• Integrated suction pump
• Fiber support arm
• Security Identification System (SIS) technology
• Green aiming beam
Figure 4-1 Lumenis Pulse 120H Laser Console
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-5

4.2.1 Laser Console

The laser console houses the control screen, integrated suction pump,
the laser control keyswitch, emergency stop knob, main On/Off switch,
control electronics, laser source and associated optics, and power
supply. Fiber optic delivery systems connect to the fiber receptacle on
the front of the console, enabling laser energy to be delivered to the
treatment site.
Figure 4-2 Laser Console with Control Screen
4-6
General Description
Figure 4-3 Console Block Diagram
4.2.2 Control Screen

Communication with the system is performed by means of the
touchscreen panel. All commands are inserted into the system by
"pressing" the appropriate "buttons", or keys, on the LCD.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-7

Figure 4-4 Simple Block
4.2.3 Integrated Suction Pump

An integrated suction pump and suction control that determines the
suction flow rate. The suction pump can be used as either a stand-alone
suction pump or in conjunction with the laser.
Suction activation is performed using the Pulse 120H suction pump.
The suction channel cross section enables a smooth passage of stone

fragments that minimizes blockage during the procedure.
Figure 4-5 Suction Pump
4-8
General Description
4.2.4 Footswitch
The dual-pedal footswitch activates the laser treatment beam when
pressed, offers the ability to select treatment from two sets of
parameters by using the left or the right foot-pedal, and incorporates a
STANDBY/ READY foot-operated button.
Figure 4-6 Footswitch
4.2.5 Fiber Support Arm

The Fiber support arm can be used for routing the fiber and suction
tube in an ordered and controlled manner.
Figure 4-7 Fiber Support Arm
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-9

4.2.6 Delivery Systems

A variety of SIS fiber optic delivery systems are available for use with
Lumenis Pulse 120H laser. Refer to the appropriate delivery system
instruction guide for specific operating instructions.
4.2.7 Cooling System

The system is cooled by an internal closed-loop liquid-to-air cooling
system. The system uses only deionized water.
The purpose of the cooling system is to remove heat generated by the

laser system during the normal course of use. The plumbing loop
consists of aluminum and stainless metals, reinforced plastic tubing and
nylon fittings to prevent contamination and conduction. A positive
displacement vane pump circulates the coolant around the loop where
heat is added by a flash lamp and then is removed in a forced-air liquid-
to-air heat exchanger. A deionizing cartridge removes conductive
contaminants from the coolant and particle filter traps.
The main cooling fan blows air into the radiator, removing the heat
energy from the warm water.
A gas unit is used to cool the coolant returning from the optical bench.
The gas unit contains the cold loop (refrigerant) components such as
the compressor, condenser, receiver, filter drier and evaporator (plating
heat exchanger). Detailed description of the gas unit can be found in
‘Chiller (Gas Unit)’ on page 5-53.
4.2.8 Optical Bench Assembly

The optics include all components that act on the aiming and/or
treatment beam. This includes the YAG cavity module; YAG
combining optics; folding mirrors; the energy sample optics; shutters;
attenuators; aiming beam laser and combining optics; the fiber focusing
lens and blast shield.
The optics include the portions of the system that operate on the
Ho:YAG beam and/or diode green aiming beam.The rest of the beam
path includes the following optical components.
Wedge Optic -A wedge optic is required to monitor the power. Two

samples are reflected off the wedge. An imaging mirror directs the
sample toward two pyrodetectors mounted on the Pyro PCB. The pyro
4-10
General Description
circuitry translates the energy sample current into a voltage

proportional to the energy of the YAG pulse.
Safety Shutter -Blocks the treatment beam path when de-energized. If

the laser is fired with safety shutter closed (during autocal), all energy
is directed into the beam dump.
Aiming Beam Green Diode, Folding Mirror, and Combiner Optic -

Aiming beam is provided by a 532 nm diode laser. The user can select
high, low, or medium intensity; or turn the aiming beam off. The diode
mount is adjusted to place the aiming beam coaxial with treatment
beam.
Fiber Focus Lens -Focuses the beam into the end of the fiber to
approximately 230µm diameter spot.
Blast Shield -Protects the fiber focus lens from debris ejected from the
proximal end of the fiber in the event of a fiber failure.
Delivery Fiber -A number of delivery SIS fibers are available for use
with the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser system, each providing
features suiting it to certain applications, such as orthopedic,
endoscope, laparoscope, laser assisted disk surgery, etc. Some fibers
are reusable and some are designed for a single use and are not
reusable.
Detailed description of the optical system can be found in ‘Optical

System’ on page 5-62.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-11

4.3 Front Panel

The front panel includes the following components:
• Fiber Connection Port

• Main On/Off switch
• Emergency Button
Figure 4-8 Front Panel
4-12
General Description
Emergency Laser Stop Button

A two-position, normally released, push-type button for emergency
laser stop. It is located on the front cover next to the ON/Of button.
The button is a large, red mushroom-shaped knob that is operated by
pressing down. To release the switch to its normal position, rotate the
knob (direction is marked on the knob's face).
The emergency button does not shut off the power, it stops all activity
(lasing, suction, etc.) that could have safety implication.
No operation is possible as long as the button is pressed.
The emergency stop button should be used only in case of an

emergency.
Figure 4-9 Emergency Button Location
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-13

4.4 Rear Panel

The rear panel includes the following components:
• Footswitch
• USB (for service HASP)
• Interlock
• LAN
Figure 4-10 Rear Panel
Equipotential Terminal - External Ground Connection

For protective earth connection, use the equipotential terminal on the
system's service panel.
Note
Use the system only when it is properly grounded via the protective
earth terminal.
4-14
General Description
4.4.1 External Door Interlock Plug

The external door interlock plug must be inserted into the external
interlock receptacle on the rear of the laser console for the laser to
operate. It may be wired to an external switch to disable the laser if the
treatment room doors are opened during treatment.
Figure 4-11 External Door Interlock Plug
Remote Interlock Connection

The remote interlock connection is a safety feature that disables the
laser if the treatment room doors are opened or the interlock plug is
removed while the laser is in Ready mode.
The interlock plug is inserted in the service panel receptacle. The laser
remains inoperative until the plug is inserted into the receptacle.
When a remote interlock connection is in use, the laser is automatically

disabled and returns to Standby mode if the treatment door is opened or
the interlock plug is removed, and an error message displays on the
control panel screen. To resume treatment, close the treatment room
door or reinsert the interlock plug, and press Ready to resume normal
treatment.
4.5 System HASP

The Pulse120H includes a HASP key which will be unique to the
machine it is installed on.
The HASP data cannot be changed; it is encrypted and protected, and

cannot be accessed from the windows Explorer screen.
Changing (reading or writing) can be done only via a very specific tool.
The HASP serves as the “License” of the machine, and provides the
following data:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-15

• The system serial number is burned on the HASP. If the s/n on

the hasp is different than what is written in the machine, the
machine will not work.
• Features which the user bought. This will help the software to
configure the application for proper settings, according to the
license.
Updating the HASP:
If the user decides to buy a feature, a file will be sent to the user, this
file will be installed by the use via specific screen in the application.
and after the completion of the update, the new features will be
enabled.
The HASP is located on the LPU USB port.
Figure 4-12 System HASP
4.6 Service HASP

To enter service mode, the service engineer must insert the service
HASP plug. Access to Service mode is not possible without the service
HASP.
Service mode allows the following:
• Running the user mode

• Running the service mode
• Installing Lumenis software updates
• Installing Windows updates (when needed)
The Service Engineer can activate the service mode in user mode, but
will not be able to perform any software installations.
4-16
General Description
The service HASP can be connected in one of two locations:
• Rear Panel
• on the LPU
Figure 4-13 Rear Panel USB Port
4.7 Software Interface

The system is based on a micro-controller that monitors the status of
the different subsystems of the machine. It translates the selected
treatment parameters into electrical signals that generate the proper
energy fluence, pulse duration, delay between pulses, and number of
pulses from the treatment head. The interface to the user is carried out
through a touch-screen display.
This software module was designed with the operating system to

provide the Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium graphic user interface.
For more details regarding the system software, see Chapter 6 of this
manual.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-17

4.8 System Specifications

Treatment Beam
Wavelength: Holmium YAG (2.1μm)
Maximal Output Laser Power: 120 Watts maximum for 1-Phase 45A Configuration
100 Watts maximum for 1-Phase 32A Configuration
120 Watts maximum for 3-Phase Configuration, 18A
per phase
80Watts maximum for 1 –Phase 30A Configuration
Pulse Energy: 0.2 - 6 Joules per pulse, adjustable in variable
increments
For Japan configuration: Up to 3.5J
Peak Power: 12kW
Pulse Frequency: 5 - 80 Hz
Max Pulse Duration: 1300 μs
US FDA CDRH Class IV

Laser Classification:
European EN 60825 Class 4
Laser Classification:
Aiming Beam
Type: DPSS
Power: 5 mW maximum, continuous wave
Settings: Low, Medium, High
Wavelength: 532 nm
Laser Classification: Class IIIa / Class 3R
Color: Green
Fiber Delivery
Only with fibers using SIS
Input Power
(For details, see ‘Input Power (1 Phase and 3 Phase)’ on page 4-21)
Cooling
Chiller Gas-based chiller
Cooling air requirements Minimum 50 cm (20 in.) from walls
4-18
General Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions (W x H x L): 47 x 105 x 116 cm

15 x 41.3 x 45.7 inches
Weight 240 kg (529 lbs.)
Power Cable Length: 5 meters (16.4 feet)
Footswitch Cable Length: 5 meters (16.4 feet)
Console: Desktop Design, Microprocessor based, touch screen,

high resolution, multicolor GUI
Environmental Requirements (Operating)
Maximum Altitude: 2,240 meters (7,350 feet)
Temperature Range: 10°C to 24°C (50° F to 75°F) – must be above dew point
(see service mode cooling system)
Maximum Humidity: 50% at 25°C (77°F) non-condensing
Atmospheric Pressure: 77-106 kPa
System Heat Generation 20,000 BTU/Hr
Noise Level
Idle: 60DB
Maximum: 67 DB
Duty Cycle
85% duty cycle for calculations and tests
Environmental Requirements (Storage)
Temperature Range: -20°C to 70°C [(-4) - 158°F]
Maximum Humidity: 95% at 30°C (86°F) non-condensing
System Leakage: < 300µA for all inlet power
Inrush Current Data: For 1-Phase: The max inrush current at start-up is 50A
for 0.4 Sec. Circuit Breaker type C is suitable.
At duty cycle the inrush current is the max system
current i.e. 37A.
Laser Safety Eyewear
Refer to Laser Safety Eyewear in Chapter 2 of this manual for detailed laser safety
eyewear information.
Compatible Delivery Systems
The laser is intended for use only with Lumenis-qualified delivery systems.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-19

RF ID Reader Information
The Pulse 120H includes an RFID Reader with FCC IDENTIFIER: Z97-1149466
The following documents certify the Reader:
LOGRAD_EN.24374
LOGRAD_EN.24374C
LOGRAD_FCC.24374
13218725_AA00_201309251118
The reader has the following characteristics:
Center Frequency: 125KHz
Frequency Range: 119-135KHz
Modulation: ASK
Duty Cycle: 100%
Maximum Field Strength: 77.5 dBµv/m at the distance of 3m.
Operation of other transmitter equipment in the range of 125KHz near Pulse 120H
could cause interference with the operation of the SIS system.
4-20
General Description
4.9 Input Power (1 Phase and 3 Phase)

The Lumenis Pulse 120H system is delivered with one of the following
electrical input configurations, correlating to the customer’s predeter-
mined requirements:
Input Power Input Input Long-Time Momentary Notes

Voltage Power Power Maximum Current [Amp]
[VAC] Frequency Phases current [Amp]
[Hz]
200 50 1 42 N/A
200 60 1 46 N/A
208 60 1 45 N/A
220 60 1 42 N/A
208 60 1 24 N/A
32A System
220 50 1 32 N/A
configuration
220 50 1 38 N/A
32A System
230 50 1 32 N/A
configuration
230 50 1 37 N/A
32A System
240 50 1 32 N/A
configuration
32A System
240 50 1 35 N/A
configuration
380 50 3 18 20
400 50 3 18 20
415 50 3 18 20
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-21

4.10 Performance Settings Power Table
4-22
General Description
4.11 Performance Envelope for 60Hz 30A
SM-0006900 Rev. G 4-23

4-24
C H A P T E R
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides a detailed description of each component and
explains the functions of all modules and sub-systems.
Voltage input is 200-240VAC, going to the AC controller PCB via the

circuit breaker and main contactor which is activated by power coming
from the AC Controller PCB. AC power is delivered to the isolation
transformer, where there are three line filters: one goes to the LVPS,
one goes to the cooling system, and one goes to the charger. The
charger charges the capacitor bank up to 800V. Charger commands are
received by the motherboard. Four switching modules are connected to
the motherboard, one for each laser brick. Also the IGBT safety and
HV PMCU are connected to the motherboard.
Figure 5-1 Illustrates the system’s main block diagram.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-1

Figure 5-1 System Main Block Diagram
5-2
Functional Description
5.1.1 Temperature Selection Algorithms

This paragraph defines the algorithm for determining the water
temperature. The allowed water temperature depends on the ambient
temperature and relative humidity. Too low a temperature will cause
condensation and malfunctions inside the optical deck.
The algorithm measures the ambient temperature and relative humidity

inside the optical deck using internal sensors.
The Relative Humidity and the Temperature readings are rounded up to

the nearest entry in the table. If:
• The Dew point temperature is below 17°C, set the water temperature
to 17°C
• The Dew point temperature is above 17°C and below 20°C, set the
water temperature to 20°C
• The Dew point temperature is above 20°C, set the water temperature
to 25°C.
Figure 5-2 Dew Point Algorithm
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-3

Dew Point Measurement
Note
Dew Point Measurement is implemented from SW version 1.0.6.6.
and up. In addition, a spacer was added to the temperature sensor
in the optical bench for more accurate readings.
If the system reads a dew point equal to or greater than the water
temperature, the system will produce the Error #56.
If this is the case, the service engineer can continue working on the
system after resetting the temperature to 20 or 25°C. NOTE: If the set
temperature is modified to 20 or 25°C, the system will perform at a
lower performance.
Figure 5-3 Dew Point Measurement
This measurement and calculation are executed at startup and during

periodic BIT. The measurements are done only when no lasing is done.
5.1.2 Calibration Algorithms

Calibration algorithms provide the mapping between the required pulse
energy and the pump energy needed to generate it.
5-4
The calibration algorithms are executed anew each time the system is
powered up or recalibration is started. The calibration settings are not
kept between power-ups.
The calibration parameters are not updated between recalibrations.

The fine tuning required to achieve the target pulse energy is done by a
closed loop control of pump energy algorithms.
The calibration parameters are tested and calculated separately for

different pulse durations settings for Holmium. They depend on the
Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) as well.
5.1.3 Holmium Calibration

• Holmium laser calibration is done according to a configuration file.
The configuration file specifies the lasing scheme which comprises
warm-up and measurement points. The calibration is calculated
separately for each brick.
• Separate configuration tables are provided for each combination of
pulse duration and the defined PRF. Up to 6 calibration tables are
possible. Each configuration table can be marked as active or non-
active.The calibration formula is a linear function between the
required pulse energy and the pump energy.
5.1.4 Warm-up Lasing Algorithms

The warm-up lasing algorithms are intended to bring the lasers close to
the selected performance before opening the shutter.
The warm-up is divided into 2 stages:
• Open loop warm-up lasing

• Energy convergence lasing
The warm-up behavior for open-loop stage is defined in the configura-
tion tables. For Holmium the configuration tables specify the pump
energy range, and the lasing behavior. The tables comprise the
following fields:
1. Pulse energy range
2. Number of warm-up pulses
3. List of the percentage of required pump energy per pulse
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-5

After the open loop warm-up pulses are finished, the system starts
lasing in closed loop according to an algorithm. After each pulse the
error between the required pulse energy and the actual pulse energy is
calculated. After the error is below a predefined threshold, the warm-up
is finished. The threshold is defined in a configuration file. The
maximum number of convergence pulses is defined in a configuration
file.
5.1.5 Pulse Duration Control Algorithms

The pulse duration is controlled by setting the capacitor bank voltage.
After the capacitor bank voltage is set and stabilized, the actual pulse
length is determined by the requested pump energy, but is not
controlled directly.
The voltages used are defined in the configuration file.
Any change of capacitor bank voltage postpones the transfer to the

“lasing” state until the voltage has reached the required value.
After each change of the capacitor bank voltage from high values, to
low values, the system fires a sequence of pulses with the shutter
closed. The capacitor discharge pulses are managed according to a
table built similarly to the warm-up pulses tables. After each pulse the
capacitor voltage are tested. This process ends after the capacitor bank
voltage reaches the required value with an error of up to 25 volt TBR,
specified in the configuration file. The pulses to be fired are defined in
the configuration file.
After each change of the capacitor bank voltage from low values to
high values, the system monitors the capacitor bank voltage until it
reaches the required value with an error of up to 25 volt TBR, specified
in the configuration file.
The transition to low voltage is done only when a corresponding foot

pedal is pressed. The transition to high voltage from low voltage is
done after pressing the higher voltage pedal, or after a 5 sec time of
being in Ready state.
5.1.6 Lamp Performance Monitoring Algorithm

Lamp performance monitoring algorithm detects a condition in which
the lamp in the laser brick is close to or beyond its performance limit.
5-6
In general terms, aged lamp requires more pump energy for the same
pulse energy.
The system will support two thresholds for recognizing an aged lamp
condition:
1. A threshold for warning of an oncoming aged lamp condition.

Crossing this threshold means that normal operation is still
possible, but a warning should be issued to schedule maintenance.
2. A threshold for recognizing inoperable lamp. Crossing this
threshold means that the lamp is no longer capable of delivering the
specified performance, and that this brick will be disabled. A case
saver mode in which less bricks are used may be invoked according
to the system logic.
5.2 System Main Electrical Modules

The following list comprises the Pulse 120H Holmium laser system’s
main electrical modules and components:
• HV System, which contains the following components:

• HV Card Cabinet, which contains the following components:
> Holmium Switching Module (x 4)
> Safety IGBT module
> HV PMCU
• Capacitor Bank
• Capacitor Charger
• Isolation transformer
• Input Block (Rear Panel)
• AC Controller PCB
• Circuit Breaker
• Main Contactor
• Main Controller (MMCU)
• Mirror Motor PCB
• Suction Pump
• LVPS 24V
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-7

• DC /DC 24-12V
• LPU (Lumenis Computer)
• RF ID SIS PCB
• Front Panel
• Display & touch screen
• On/Off Switch
• Top Rear Panel
• Keyswitch
• USB 1/2
• Interlock
• LAN
• footswitch
The following System Block Diagram (single phase) represents main
functional components of the system and their interfaces.
5-8
Figure 5-4 Block Diagram
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-9

Figure 5-5 Internal Components
The console incorporates a modular design concept where each main

sub-assembly is housed in its own compartment in the chassis.
5-10
Figure 5-6 Modular Design Concept
Figure 5-7 illustrates the electrical diagram.

\
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-11

Figure 5-7 Wiring Diagram
5-12
5.3 HV Subsystem and PCBs
5.3.1 HV Flow
Figure 5-8 HV Flow Diagram
5.3.2 PCB Card Cabinet

The PCB card cabinet holds the following modules which are all
connected to a motherboard:
• 4 Switching modules (1 for each brick)

• IGBT Safety Module
• HV PMCU
The Switching Module is divided into 4 switching sub- modules, one

for each lamp + 1 safety IGBT module. It has the ability to ignite 4
lamps, and provides simmering for 1 lamp of up to 200[mA].
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-13

Figure 5-9 PCB Card Cabinet
5-14
5.3.3 Switching Module (SWM x 4)

The switching module functions are to ignite the Flash Lamp with the
Simmer and to give High Power pulses to the Flash Lamp.
The software initializes, controls and monitors the switching states.
The switching module receives 24V DC from the LVPS, receiving its
command from the HV PMCU, which then starts the simmer operation.
It also receives 800VDC from the safety IGBT.
There are 4 switching modules, referred to as IGBT A-D, one for each
of the 4 bricks in the system. Each IGBT simmers the lamps and is able
to discharge the stored energy in the Capacitor Bank to the bricks. The
system holds the provision to add an Nd:YAG IGBT module instead of
the 4th Holmium IGBT. Also, the system contains a cascaded Safety
IGBT for a secondary safety mechanism.
Figure 5-10 Switching Module Block Diagram
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-15

5.3.4 HV PMCU
HV PMCU controls the safety IGBT by enabling/disabling and gets
safety IGBT status.
The HV PMCU sets the Fire Pulse to SWM Holmium sub modules.
The HV Board sets the Fire Pulse to the SWM YAG sub module.
The HV PMCU gets statuses of SWM sub modules:
• IGBT Leakage
• Over Temperature
• Simmer status
• Holmium Lamp current
• Capacitor Voltage
• SWM sub module 1,2,3,4 - 24V exist
The HV PMCU controls all the components of the HV subsystem and

communicates with the main controller.
The HV PMCU is a peripheral control board which interfaces with the

MMCU via CAN interface for operating and sampling HW of
functional sub systems (A Peripheral Control board is a specially
designed electronic board, based on DSP low power micro-controller).
Features:
• Uses TI Picollo MCU

• Controls and monitor the Charger
• Control and monitors 4 switching modules
• Control and monitors the safety module
• Requires SW burning for FPGA and CPU
5-16
Figure 5-11 HV PMCU
Interfaces:
• Provides Simmer-on to the SW modules

• Monitors simmer’s status, IGBT leakage, over temp and voltage of
the HV cards.
• Provides fire pulses to the SW modules
• Controls and monitors the Capacitor charger’s operation
• Monitors the capacitor’s voltage and current from the safety module
• Performs an integral over the multiplication of the current and
voltage in order to reach the desired pump energy.
• Communicates with the Main via CAN interface
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-17

Figure 5-12 HV PMCU Block Diagram
The HV PMCU is responsible for the switching module, charger and

fire pulse operations. It receives from the MMCU the required
configuration for each module: Switching module, charger and lasing
for module’s operation (when requested by the MMCU). The MMCU
initiates operations such as Switching module ON, Charger ON, etc.,)
and samples back statuses (monitoring data is sent by HVPS PMCU to
MMCU periodically).
During lasing, a safety check is divided between the HV PMCU and the
Main (mother) board:
Board’s communication is done via CAN and 4 discrete lines: Safety

OK1, Safety OK2, Servo in Place, which is directed from the Main
FPGA to HVPS FPGA and Pulse Fired directed from the HVPS PMCU
board to the Main FPGA and MMCU.
5-18
HV PMCU SW is responsible for monitoring of HVPS correct

operation status and check for safety status OK between pulses.
At any Main board/servo motor board error Safety OK1/Safety OK2/

Servo in place are set by Main FPGA to an error status in which HVPS
PMCU FPGA is defined to stop/prohibit an output of pulses.
Lasing Pulses
HV PMCU SW is responsible for delivering pulses. The condition for
delivering a pulse depends on the HV PMCU SW (HV SW BIT
between the pulses) and also by HV FPGA (per discrete lines).
Per lasing setup (burst of pulses), the HV PMCU does the following:
• Set holmium mode in the LASER_MODE register (Ho/Nd:YAG)

• Set desired capacitor voltage
• Set capacitor (voltage sampled - Vlamp sampled) error register
• Set (Ilamp - Ilamp - 1) delta register
• Set frequency limits registers
• Set FIRE_ENABLE_TIME
HV PMCU Status
The HV PMCU LEDs can be observed for diagnostic and troubleshoot-
ing problems with the HV PMCU. Figure 5-13 illustrates the LED
status when in normal functioning condition:
Upper LED should be blinking, and 2 lower LEDS should be lit all the
time.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-19

Figure 5-13 HV PMCU LED Status
5.3.5 Safety IGBT
Figure 5-14 IGBT Safety Module
The Safety module has several main functions:
5-20
• Unplugs the lamp energy immediately in case of a failure in one of

the switching modules through Safety IGBT ON/OFF
• Measuring current of each lamp in real time and transmit the data to
the HV-PMCU module. (Double current measurement is performed
for Safety needs of the system).
• Measuring the voltage over the capacitor bank and half voltage bank,
and transferring the data to the HV-PMCU.
• Reporting to the correctness / failure in defined statuses:24V Exist,
Over Temperature, Leakage Status
Specifications:
• Voltage input 24vDC +10%
• Capacitor bank voltage – 0 – 800VDC
• Current Transfer capability - 350A @ 400uSec @ 80Hz
Figure 5-15 Safety IGBT Diagram
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-21

5.3.6 Charger and Capacitor Bank

• 1 Phase Capacitor charger – 6kJ 800V.
• 3 Phase Capacitor charger– 6kJ 800V.
The charger’s main functions are to charge and discharge the capacitor
bank. The software initializes, controls and monitor the charger’s
states.
The charger charges the capacitors bank in order to allow enough

energy for lasing operation.
The Charger module is powered directly by the isolation transformer

output voltage and line filter. The signal goes from the line filter 220V
AC to the charger. The Charger module charges the capacitor bank to
400-800V DC.
The capacitor charger is controlled by the HV PMCU card via the

charger’s Analog interface.
Figure 5-16 Capacitor Charger
The Charger is connected to the capacitor bank +/- terminals.
The capacitor bank includes 4 capacitors 7.5mF 450V for total

capacitance of 7.5mF 900V.
5-22
The Capacitor Bank stores the energy required for the lasing process.
Capacitor bank interface:
• Charger
• Switching module
Figure 5-17 Capacitor Bank
Capacitor Board
To achieve a high energy pulsed Laser the module can transfer a high
current (up to 300A) and high voltage (800v) in a very short time.
For safety reasons the Capacitor Bank must be discharged when the
system is off.
There are 2 mechanisms to discharge the capacitor bank (dumping

circuit).
1. Built-In to the Capacitor Charger: this circuit works every time the
system schedules shutdown. Discharge time is about 2 minutes.
2. In the PCB attached to the Capacitor Bank: This 2nd dump circuit
is activated at sudden shutdown i.e. mains disconnect, circuit
breaker–off, forced shutdown by pressing more than 4Sec. on the
On-Off switch. On the board a red LED flashes when the Capacitor
Bank is charging and stops being lit when the voltage on the
Capacitor Bank decreases to a safety level of 24V. Discharge time
is about 10Sec.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-23

5.3.7 Motherboard
The switching modules, the safety IGBT and HV PMCU are connected
via a central motherboard. The line voltage is received from the LVPS
and the command signal is received from the main controller.
5.4 Isolation Transformer

There are two types of isolation transformers, 1-phase and 3-phase.
The isolation transformer operates on 8 KVA. The efficiency is 96%

which gives 320 watts to dissipate. This amount of power is dissipated
to ambient by fan.
Figure 5-18 Isolation Transformer
The transformer is located in a metal box in order to meet the safety

standard; it can’t be cooled using natural convection. At a room
temperature of 20°C, the transformer core will heat up to 70°C. since
the environmental conditions allow ambient temperature up to 30°C.
The switch is activated at 110°C.
By means of an AC fan, the air flow is streamed from the bottom of the
machine, through an air filter (35 ppi) into the transformer box. The air
flows on the trafo external surface and then exits the box from the rear
side of the cover.
5-24
There are 4 OUT lines, each of which carries 230V from the
transformer to the component:
• Charger
• Pump
• Chiller
• LVPS
Figure 5-19 Transformer, 1-Phase AC OUT (Left Side)

connect the corresponding transformer line voltage.
Figure 5-20 Transformer, 1-Phase AC IN (Right Side)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-25

Figure 5-21 shows the AC IN and OUT lines for 3-Phase configura-
tion.
Figure 5-21 Transformer, 3-Phase AC OUT (Left Side)

connect the corresponding transformer line voltage.
Figure 5-22 Transformer, 3-Phase AC IN (Right Side)
5-26
5.5 Input Block (Rear Panel)

The input block consists of the AC control board and the main circuit
breaker.
Figure 5-23 Input Block Diagram
5.6 AC Controller
The AC Board contains system on-off sequence circuitry, system soft
start circuit, isolation transformer thermal switch control, surge
protection circuit and 3 phase monitor.
On the board an auxiliary low voltage power supply for all the above
circuit. The board is the same for single phase or 3 phase system.
The AC Board is completely isolated from the rest of the system by

auxiliary transformer and photo couplers.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-27

Figure 5-24 AC Controller Layout (1 Phase)
5-28
Auxiliary Lower Voltage Power Supply

The AC Board contains the circuitry for an isolated +24VAC and
+12VDC power supply.The input for the circuit is 24VAC 4A from
auxiliary isolation transformer that located near the board (chassis
mount). This isolation transformer is full medical grade transformer.
The transformer primary side connected to the main AC, via the board,
to the circuit breaker. It has 5 tap windings, J8 on the board, for (single
phase) 200, 220, 240 VAC and (3 phase) 400, 440VAC operation. The
secondary output is 24VAC for the contactor coil and the input for
+12VDC/0.5A switching regulator. That voltage feeds the all on board
circuits. Both the input and output are completely isolated from the rest
of the system. The +24VAC and +12Vdc exist as long as the circuit
breaker is on.
System Soft Start Circuit

When a transformer is first energized, a transient current up to 20 times
larger than the rated transformer current can flow for several cycles.
To maintain the inrush current, the transformer is connected to three

resistors (for 3-phase). For single phase only 2 resistors are in use: Line
phase and Line neutral). 3.3 ohm resistors are used, connected via 2
soft-start relays, to the mains.
At turn on the soft start relays are energized connecting the transformer
via the resistor to the main. After soft-start time (300-450mS), the main
contactor energized shunting the current around the soft start resistors
and applying full current to the isolation transformer. The loads are
energized, specifically the low voltage power supply, turning on the
control electronics system.
Main Isolation Thermal Switch Control:

For protection reason, the isolation transformer contains an internal
normally closed 110°C thermal switch.
The soft-start relay and the contactor relay can energize via the thermal
switch only. In case of over temperature the thermal switch will
disconnect soft- start and contactor coil relays from the power supply
voltage. The contactor will turn off, disconnecting the transformer from
the mains.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-29

Additionally, this action will reset the system on-off sequence circuitry
to prevent automatic start up if the thermal switch resets again.
System On-Off Sequence Circuit:

Turn on sequence:
When the system in off, pressing the on-off switch (for 450mS de-
bouncing time), causing to a Flip-Flop in the circuit to change its state.
Soft-start and contactor relays will energize and all the system will turn
on as described in the system soft start circuit description above.
Turn off sequence:
a)Automatic log-out.
When system is on, momentarily pressing the on-off switch causing the
circuit to send a “SHUT-DOWN” signal to the main controller.
The main controller saves all the data, logs out and sends back a
“SYSTEM-OFF” signal. This signal resets the on-off circuit, de-
energizing contactor relay and shuts down the entire system.
b)Forced shut down
When system is on, pressing the on-off switch continually for 4

seconds will reset the on-off circuit and shut down the entire system.
Surge Protection Circuit:

Main power enters the AC board at J3. Three Varistors surge protectors
are connected across the main between phases.
Phase monitor:
For 3 phase system, the AC Board sends a acknowledge (active low)
signal: “3 PHASE” to the main controller.
This is done by connecting a jumper on J9/ 1-3 (technician pre-setting).
The AC controller Board, located between the circuit breaker and the
Isolation Transformer, controls the AC input to the system.
Functions:
5-30
• Connects AC supply to the system on turn-on

• Disconnects AC supply to the system in case of shut down / TF
over temperature
• Avoids high in-rush current to TF (Main transformer) to avoid
CB tripping.
• Distinguishes between 1-phase / 3-phase and alerts the main
controller accordingly.
Medical grade transformer + isolation on electrical interfaces (as it is

placed prior to the main Trafo).
Figure 5-25 AC Input
It may shut down the system due to a user-selected power-off or due to

heating of the isolation transformer, caused by a malfunction.
The configuration for the AC Control board is different between the

single-phase and three-phase configurations. Figure 5-26 illustrates the
AC input for 3-phase configuration
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-31

Figure 5-26 AC Input Diagram
5-32
5.7 MMCU (Main Controller)

The MMCU performs the following functions:
1. Performs all system initialization and safety and functional checks

upon startup.
2. Configures the system outputs to the safe states upon startup.
3. Receives the required configuration and user selected setting from
the LPU.
4. Monitors the connection of a fiber, reads the fiber type from a
compatible RFID based Secure Information SYstem (SIS) and uses
it to set the maximum allowed operating parameters.
5. Monitors the cooling system for proper temperature and flow.
6. Monitors the footswitch and transfers the system between the
required states.
7. Selects which laser (rod) is to be activated.
8. controls laser output by adjusting pump energy to achieve the pulse
energy value required by the user and stops lasing if a fault or an
out of bounds output occurs.
9. Positions the mirror motor to receive the output from the
appropriate laser rod.
10. Monitors and closes the safety shutter.
11. Controls the aiming beam.
12. Controls the built in suction pump.
The software for each CPU is stored in a Flash memory, and includes
fields for verifying the correctness of the data and version. The Flash
can be programmed only at manufacturing or using special Lumenis
tools used by trained and authorized service engineers. The LPU SW is
stored on a Solid State Disk (SSD) and its correctness is verified during
startup testing. The configuration parameters are stored in files on the
SSD. These files are protected from tampering and their correctness is
verified during startup testing before they are loaded.
The system gathers and records on the SSD logs of the system
operation which include the used presets, amounts of energy used, user
generated events (e.g. fiber connection or foot pedals operation) and
faults occurrence.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-33

The MMCU hosts and controls application critical tasks, performing

state machine by operating various sub systems and system periodic
check.
A Main Controller board is a specially designed electronic board, based

on micro-controller (MMCU), FPGA and additional peripheral
components.
Figure 5-27 MMCU Card Interfaces
The Main controller’s communication interfaces are:
• LPU via LAN 10/100Mbit interface.

• HV PMCU via CAN Bus interface.
• cooling controller via RS485 interface.
• Communication with mirror motor PMCU through CAN Bus
and/or has the required analog circuitry to support it.
The Main controller is powered by 24V from the LVPS, consumes up

to 400mA, and has internal voltages sampling capability.
MMCU interface communication:
• LPU via LAN

• HV PMCU via CAN Bus interface
• Cooling controller via RS485 interface
5-34
• Mirror PMCU via CAN Bus

The main controller controls the turn ON/OFF of the AC powered
cooling pump.
Suction - The main controller controls the suction device by an on/off

signal and an intensity control through the PWM. The main controller
has the ability to monitor the suction pump driver’s proper operation.
Aiming beam - the main controller controls the aiming beam through a
PWM interface.
Attenuator board - the main controller provides the required current

for the solenoid within the attenuator board. It receives a single
indication regarding the solenoid position within the attenuator board.
Pyros and shutter board - Main controller provides the required

current for both solenoids within the Pyros and Shutter board. The
Main controller controls both solenoids within the Pyros and Shutter
board. The main controller receives a single indication regarding the
service solenoid position within the Pyros and Shutter board.
The main controller receives a double indication regarding the shutter

solenoid position within the Pyros and Shutter board.
PYROs circuitry – one of the pyros (“main”) samples is monitored

through an SPI interface from the FPGA of the main controller. The
other pyro (“safety”) is read by the DSP in one of two options – analog
or digital (SPI). If the digital option is used, a reference signal of ~2.5V
to the A/D is used.
• Main controller has 2 HW signals to the HV PMCU, in opposite

logic (redundancy), designating lasing-readiness of the system.
• Main controller receives a MOTOR_FB indication from the Mirror
Motor PMCU. This signal is differential.
• Main controller outputs GO_TO_NEXT_POS to the Mirror Motor
PMCU. This signal is differential.
• Main controller sends an output MOTOR_IN_PLACE indication to
the HV PMC
• HRSReq_38 Main controller receives PULSE_FIRED indication
from the HV PMCU. This signal is differential.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-35

External Inputs, Sensors and Indicators:

• Main controller has 3 binary and 2 analog footswitch inputs. Each
binary input is double: 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. switch logic.
• Main controller identifies if the footswitch is connected to the
machine or not.
• Main controller controls a set of 12 dual-color LEDs (either dual-
color LEDs or pairs of LEDs in different color), indicating that the
machine is ON or that it is in READY mode or lasing in a later-to-
be-determined logic
• Main controller controls an on-board audio “buzzer”.
• Main controller receives an Emergency button input (doubled; 1
N.O. and 1 N.C.), and stops all lasing activity when at least one of
the poles is activated.
• Main controller has a key switch input (doubled; 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.),
and writes its state to an internal register. No lasing is allowed if the
key is not present in the Keyswitch.
• Main controller has a momentary on/off button input.
• Main controller receives a door interlock input (doubled) and will
stop all lasing activity when at least one of the poles is deactivated.
• Main controller has a wiring for Service Safety Bypass switch input
(1 momentary).
• Main controller has a 3 x Blast Shield switch input (1 N.O. each),
and writes their state to internal registers.
• Main controller receives 2 fiber connection switch inputs, and stops
all lasing activity when at least one of the switches suggests a
possible fiber misconnection.
• Main controller receives a Temp & Humidity sensor input (from the
laser deck surrounding), and writes the temperature and humidity
values to internal registers.
• Main controller receives an analog water temperature sensor input,
and writes its value to an internal register.
• Main controller monitors the proper water-flow of the cooling fluid
by interfacing with a binary flow switch.
• Main controller has an on board capability to measure water
conductivity (Determining threshold at ~250 kOhm).
• Main controller writes to an internal register the machine’s input
power configuration, i.e. whether it is a 1-phase or a 3-phase system.
5-36
• Main controller has spare inputs and outputs to/from FPGA/DSP (in
between and to the connector).
• Main controller has additional future growth capabilities – free 2 x
SPI + CAN bus interfaces + PWM
The Main controller is connected to the chassis and has the option to
shorten the chassis to the power ground. The Main controller has
internal analog/digital grounding separation.
The main controller incorporates a non-volatile on board FPGA and a

non-volatile on board memory from which the FPGA is loaded on
startup.
There is an option for main controller FPGA burning via DSP.
5.7.1 Circuit Breaker

There are three circuit breaker types, one for 45A, one for 32A, and
18A for 3-Phase.
The circuit breaker is tripped when an over-current occurs. The CB

may be different between the single-phase and three-phase configura-
tions.
This master switch should be turned off when the system is left
overnight or for extended periods of time.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-37

5.7.2 Line Filter

The line filter gets AC voltage from the main transformer and splits it
into three lines, going to the following components in succession:
1. LVPS
2. Water cooling system
3. Charger
5.8 LVPS 24V

The LVPS implements all low power voltages required by the device
subsystems and is monitored by the software to ensure correct
operation.
The LVPS receives 220V AC signal from the line filter, and provides
the following voltage as follows:
• +12V DC to the cooling controller

• +24/12VDC to the mother board
• +24V to DC/DC
• +12V DC to the Main controller
5.8.1 LVPS Interfaces

• Power inlet
• Control board
• SWM
• Charger
The LVPS has an external capacitor whose functional is to prevent line
voltage interference (for 220V line configuration only).
DC\DC 24-12V
The DC\DC module converts the 24V DC from the LVPS to 12V DC
to the LPU and Display.
5-38
5.9 LPU (Lumenis Computer) and Hard

Disk
The LPU is the main user interface for the system control. e.g, Using
the Display of the LPU, the user may set the system in a lasing state,
the technician may debug system faults and the laser system may be
calibrated during the optical bench assembly.
The LPU SW component includes PC, LCD with Touch screen.
LPU hosts and controls the application non-critical tasks, application

workflow (business logic), Graphical User Interface (GUI), Remote UI
and implement various application required services. The LPU also
hosts the system HASP.
LPU Application communicates the with main controller over TCP/IP

communication protocol, in order to receive from controller required
information or to execute specific command.
LPU maintains and manages all the system’s configuration data and
manages the required data security functions.
LPU specifications:
• Model: Nex-607 from Nexcom

• Storage: SATA 32 Gb SSD
• Sandy bridge architecture, with Dual core Celeron processor
(1.6 GHz each)
• 4 GB RAM
• Windows Embedded standard 7 as OS
Figure 5-29 LPU and Hard Disk
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-39

5.9.1 Display
The color touch screen is the primary user interface of the laser system.
The screen size can rotate and fold.
Figure 5-30 Screen Rotation
The touch screen and fiber arm are normally positioned on top of the
optical bench during treatment; the touch screen and fiber arm swing
out next to optical bench when optical bench servicing is needed.
5-40
Figure 5-31 Screen and Fiber Arm Positions
Users can select a specialty and procedure, and store personalized

settings in the system. The system allows a minimum of 10 personal
presets.
The screen also displays videos and animations that are pre-loaded in
the laser system.
The screen displays error message and suggested resolution. The screen
provides a command to activate and de-activate simultaneous suction
while lasing.
The GUI display is available in the following languages in User mode:

English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Dutch,
Japanese, Simplified Chinese, and Russian. Service mode displays
English language only.
The System includes a voice indication feature.
The system includes a simulator operating mode which allows all

system operations with actual lasing disabled, for training and demo
purposes.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-41

5.10 SIS RFID

The SIS RFID module performs Lumenis certified fiber detection and
communication using the RFID protocol.
The SIS is intended to monitor and allow control of which and how
fibers are used with the system.
Figure 5-32 SIS RFID Board
The SIS subsystem consists of the following modules:
• RFID board
• RFID antenna
• Antenna impedance matching circuit
• Fiber port and its micro switches
• HW in the loop (fiber connectivity)
• SW logic in the LPU
The antenna is located at the fiber port and the RFID board and the
accompanied impedance matching circuit are located close to the
antenna. The communication interface to the LPU is via USB, from
which it will also take its DC power.
5-42
Figure 5-33 SIS Antenna
The existing tag’s memory-map and parameters are used.
5.11 Footswitch
The system includes a multi-function footswitch. The footswitch
activates the laser system for incision/ablation or coagulation mode
along with stone and stone dusting modes as well; it also allows
selection between the standby and ready mode of the system. When
simultaneous suction function is selected (“Auto”), while the
footswitch is pressed down for lasing, the suction feature is activated
simultaneously to allow for removal of the stone fragments. The
footswitch can be stored on the cord wrap when it is not in use.
Figure 5-34 Footswitch Storage Location
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-43

Figure 5-35 illustrates the pin layout of the footswitch cable

connection.
Figure 5-35 Footswitch Connector Pin Layout
5.12 Front Panel

The front panel includes the following components:
• Display and touch-screen

• On/Off switch
• Laser Emission Indicator
5-44
5.12.1 On/Off Switch
On/Off Logic
TURN ON
When the machine is turned-off, and the On/Off button is pressed, the
AC Control board activates relays to incorporate series resistors for the
isolation transformer’s primary coil, avoiding high inrush current.
After input voltage had settled, the contactor is closed for normal
operation. The outputs are automatically feeding the Charger, LVPS
and cooling subsystem.
TURN OFF
Shut down from touch screen:
When the machine is turned-on, and the user selects shut down option
from the display using the touch screen, the LPU initiates a log off
sequence, which includes informing the user via the display and
alerting the main controller via LAN. The main controller initiates
peripherals shut down as necessary, including but not limited to
terminating lasing activities via the HV PMCU, terminating cooling
controller (which in turn terminates the compressor operation if on),
fans, suction and so on, logging special events, etc. It waits for a
dedicated GPIO from the LPU, indicating that the log-off has ended
and that the display is off. Once all peripherals are off and the GPIO
from the LPU indicated the LPU is ready for shut down, the main
controller sends a signal to the AC Control to shut down the system. In
turn, the AC Control, opens the contactor and terminates power supply
to the isolation transformer.
If a malfunction occurs here, the user may turn off the machine
manually.
“Soft” shut down from On/Off button
When the machine is turned-on, and the user presses the On/Off button
for up to 3 sec, the main controller senses that press through dedicated
hard-wired lines, and initiates a similar shut down sequence described
in section A above, via the LAN interface to the LPU.
“Hard” shut down from On/Off button
When the machine is turned-on, and the user presses the On/Off button
for more than 3sec consecutively, the AC Control board senses that the
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-45

On/Off button is presses and opens the contactor immediately to shut

the entire system down.
.
Figure 5-36 Conceptual block diagram for the On/Off Logic
5.12.2 Emergency Button

This red button is designed for emergency shutdown. When pressed it
immediately disables the laser and switches the system to OFF. To
release the emergency shut-off button, turn it clockwise in the direction
of the arrows. Once released, if the system keyswitch is still turned ON,
it must be turned Off and then On again to activate the system.
The emergency button does not shut off the power, it stops all activity
(lasing, suction, etc.) that could have safety implication.
No operation is possible as long as the button is pressed.
5-46
5.12.3 Keyswitch
To prevent unauthorized use, the laser can only be turned on with the
master key. The key is provided instead of a user password. The key
can only be removed when the laser is turned off, and the laser only
operates when the key is inserted into the keyswitch. When the
keyswitch is turned to the (ON) position, the laser power-up sequence
is initiated.
Figure 5-37 Keyswitch Location
5.13 Suction Pump

The main controller controls a suction device by an on/off signal and an
intensity control through PWM. It has the ability to monitor the suction
pump driver proper operation. It identifies the state (i.e. open/close) of
the suction pump head. The Main controller has similar interfaces
mentioned above to an external suction option. The suction flow rate is
controlled by the user through an external potentiometer.
Features:
• Uses Peristaltic pump 24V/350rpm

• Includes head pump with Door
• Controlled by the MMCU
• Includes potentiometer for suction speed control
• Includes Door open/close indication
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-47

Figure 5-38 Suction Pump
5-48
5.14 Cooling System

The cooling sub system is a water cooling system whose purpose is to
cool the laser optical bench and remove heat generated by the laser
system during the normal course of use. The heat dissipation amount is
4 kW. The cooling system is “closed loop” flow containing a water
reservoir, pump, 0.2 micron filter, DI cartridge and cooling unit
(chiller). The cooling liquid is DI water. The cooling liquid pumps
from the bottom of the reservoir and flow through the laser brick,
dissipating the heat from the laser rod and from the flash lamp. The
coolant set point (exit from the chiller unit, enter the brick) is 17°C
(for V1) or 19°C (for V2) ± 1°C. Cooling system technology is chiller
based.
Laser efficiency depends on the brick temperature. In order to get a

stable laser output, the brick has to be cooled by a coolant.
The cooling system loop is built from a number of sub-modules which

meet at the evaporator unit. The cooling unit sub-module uses DI water
as the coolant in order to remove the heat generated by the laser. The
cooling system flow path containing an “active” water reservoir which
the coolant pumps from the bottom of the reservoir and returns to it at
the end of the cooling cycle. The plumbing loop consists of aluminum
(laser brick), stainless steel metal (pump head), reinforced silicon and
PVC tubing and nylon / acetal fittings to prevent contamination and to
reserve the low electricity of the deionized water (cooling liquid).
A positive displacement vane pump circulates the coolant around the
loop where heat is added by a flash lamp and the laser rod (parallel
connection) and then is removed to the gas at the liquid-to-gas
evaporator.
A deionizer cartridge removes conductive contamination from the

coolant and particle filter traps any suspended particles (mainly due to
pump vane wear). Thermal sensor which located at the entrance to the
optical bench is monitoring the chiller activity to remain the water at
the desire temperature. The DC fans at the condenser unit are speed
control and can be reduced in order to avoid acoustic noise. The fans
are fully controlled by the chiller unit.
The cooling system’s main components include:
• Chiller (Gas Unit)

• Radiator
• Fan
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-49

• Cooling Unit
• Water Pump
• Water Tank
• Flow Switch
• Deionizer Filter
• Water Conductivity Sensor
• Particle Filter
Figure 5-39 illustrates the cooling system block diagram.
5-50
Figure 5-39 Cooling System Block Diagram
The entire coolant loop holds approximately 2.5 liters of coolant.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-51

Figure 5-40 Cooling Cycle
5.14.1 Water Interface of Optical Bench
Figure 5-41 Cooling Under Optical Bench
5-52
5.14.2 Chiller (Gas Unit)

The chiller contains the cold loop (refrigerant) components such as the
compressor, condenser, receiver, filter drier and evaporator (plating
heat exchanger).
The chiller’s components include:
• Radiator
• Compressor (Gas reservoir)
• Temperature Sensor
• Cooling Controller PCB
• Refrigerant receiver
• Evaporator
• Condenser
• Refrigerant Filter
• Solenoid x 2
• Sight Glass
• Bypass valve
• Copper Tubing
• Vibration Eliminator copper tubing
Figure 5-42 Chiller (Gas Unit)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-53

The chiller uses a sensor array and control for diagnostics and
monitoring of the correct chiller operation. The control maintains a
nominal output temperature of 17°C (for V1 or 19°C for V2) ± 1°C.
Refrigerant sensor array indicates a lack of gas, electric failure of the
compressor of fan, low or high gas pressure or any diagnostics indicate
working out of spec. The control indicates a fault that either prevents
the operation of the chiller at required performance, or could have a
reliability impact.
The chiller control unit interfaces with the main controller by a Can-
Bus communication interface.
5.14.3 Radiator (Heat Exchanger) and Fan

A four row copper heat exchanger (radiator) is installed at the bottom
of the chassis. All of the water is passed through the radiator, directly
from the flashlamp cavity. Heat from the water is absorbed by the
copper and dissipated through convection to cool the water. Once out
of the heat exchanger, the water returns to the main reservoir (tank).
The radiator also contains a drain fitting and hose, which enables the
system to be drained. Once filled, draining will still leave small
amounts of water in the cooling loop. If the system is hen exposed to
freezing temperatures, these pockets of water can freeze, expanding to
create failures in the solid portions of the coolant loop (especially the
heat exchanger).
5-54
5.15 Cooling Unit

As the lamps in the laser head are flashed, heat energy is produced in
the flash lamps, rods, and housings. The cooling system transfers the
heat energy from the flash lamp, rod and housings to the outside air. It
utilizes a closed loop, forced air heat exchanger which contains
approximately 3 liters of distilled water. The cooling system also
provides cooling for the two beam dumps.
The cooling unit includes the following:
• water pump relay

• water tank
• water pump
• flow switch
• water conductivity sensor
• deionizer (DI) filter
• particle filter
Figure 5-43 Cooling Unit
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-55

5.15.1 Water Pump Relay

The water pump relay is the pump on/off switch. It provides the signal
for 220VAC to the pump via the main controller.
The relay has a green indication LED when it is in active mode.
Figure 5-44 Water Pump Relay
5.15.2 Water Tank

The water tank contains the amount of DI water which serves as a
thermal buffer for the control system (about 5 liters). Water filling must
be performed during first-time installation and/or Preventive
Maintenance or for other troubleshooting activities.
Figure 5-45 Water Tank
5-56
5.15.3 Water Pump

The water pump is propelled by the water pump and to the gas unit via
the particle filter. Hot water reaching the gas unit is then chilled,
whereafter it reaches the optical bench.
The water pump is connected to the chiller sub module using quick
connectors.
Figure 5-46 Water Pump
5.15.4 Flow Switch

Coolant flow is monitored by a flowswitch as a part of the MMCU
circuit. If flow is not sufficient, the system will not latch on and if
already started it will shut off.
5.15.5 DI Filter
Installed in the cooling loop is a replaceable de-ionized filter cartridge.
Since the maximum recommended flow through the cartridge is up to 1
liter/minute, while the total cooling loop is about 10 liters/min., the
filter cartridge is connected in parallel across ½ ID hollow pipes. The
cartridge connected to ¼ ID tubing in order to reduce the flow rate
through the filter itself. The figure below illustrates tubing and T-
fittings position to able the flow rate value of less than 1 liter/minute
through the de-ionized filter.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-57

Figure 5-47 Deionizer Filter
5.15.6 Water Conductivity Sensor

Coolant resistivity and temperature are monitored by sensors that
report an analog voltage to the microprocessor. The software checks
the coolant resistivity and temperature at regular intervals.
5.15.7 Particle Filter

Installed in the cooling loop is a particle filter housing which contains a
replaceable 0.2μm filter cartridge. The purpose of the filter is to trap
any suspended particles that are larger than 0.2μm. Since the cooling
loop is a closed system, the filter should remain clean. Normal pump
head wear due to carbon graphite internal components will dirt the
water and change the cartridge filter color to grey or black. The filter is
typically replaced on an annual basis.
Figure 5-48 Particle Filter Assembly
5-58
5.15.8 Flowswitch
A switch is used to monitor the coolant flow. The switch is a pressure
activated, magnetic reed spring-loaded float. As water is forced from
the inlet of the switch housing, the float is pushed back toward the
magnetic reed closing the switch. When coolant flow has stopped, the
spring returns the float to the open position.
The components come in contact with the DI water are the spring (316
stainless steel) and the sensor body (Polypropylene).
The sensor set point is 113 liter/Hr. since the sensor indicates only
flow/No flow (and not the amount of flow), the set point flow rate can
be any value.
The sensor can be mounting at any orientation. The top of the switch
can be removed for cleaning and /or inspection.
5.15.9 Ventilation Management

The external air enters the system and cools the gas unit, which
consequently cools the system coolant.
The interface between the chiller and water is with the use of the heat
exchanger.
The main concept guiding the design is ventilation isolation of areas.

The concept is that each of the components use its own internal cooling
without using or interrupting other modules. In practice, sheet metal
partitions as well as plastic ribs in the machine skins create these
isolated cooling areas.
In order to prevent dusting, both side covers as well as the bottom of

the machine are covered with replaceable air filters.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-59

Figure 5-49 Side Covers Air Filters
The filters should be replaced by the service engineer annually.
The air flow directions as well as the temperature fields inside and
around the machine are presented in Figure 5-50.
5-60
Figure 5-50 Ventilation Management
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-61

5.16 Optical System
5.16.1 Basic Holmium Laser Theory

A laser, an acronym for Light Amplification of Stimulated Emission of
Radiation, produces a highly concentrated beam of light of a given
wavelength. Laser energy is generated by converting electrical energy
to light energy using a flash lamp. The flash lamp energy is then used to
excite the lasing medium, in this case a holmium YAG laser rod. The
laser energy is amplified in the laser resonator cavity and a small
portion of the energy is allowed to leak out as the laser working beam.
The Lumenis Pulse 120H holmium laser emits a laser beam at a

wavelength of 2100nm. This wavelength is strongly absorbed by water
in tissue. Since soft tissue is comprised primarily of water, holmium
laser energy can be used effectively for excision, incision, ablation, and
vaporization when in direct contact with soft tissue and for coagulation
when in near contact with soft tissue. Calculi (stones) also contain a
sufficient amount of water that absorbs the laser energy leading to
lithotripsy.
When working in liquid environment the holmium laser energy

provides additional safety, since laser energy will be absorbed by the
surrounding liquid, limiting its reach to non-target tissue.
The holmium laser wavelength falls in the near-infrared region of the

electromagnetic spectrum. This wavelength is invisible to the human
eye. Therefore, a low-power, visible aiming beam is used to verify the
laser’s target tissue.
5.16.2 Optical Operating Concepts

Lumenis Pulse 120H utilizes four solid state pulsed lasers. The lasers
comprise a flash lamp, a solid state rod and an enclosure that reflects
the light from the lamp to the rod and enables cooling liquid to flow
around the lamp and the rod. This entire assembly is usually call the
“brick”. Four such bricks are assembled together in the an assembly
called the “pod”. The liquid used to cool the bricks is deionized water.
The pod is assembled between sets of the resonator mirrors, which

include calibration screws to tune the resonating cavity.
The laser cavities are fired in sequence, so that each cavity operates at
1/4 of the repetition rate of the entire system.
5-62
Next in the optical path are several folding mirrors which direct each
laser cavity output beam to a rotating mirror. The rotating mirror is
calibrated and controlled in such a way that each time a laser cavity
emits a pulse, the mirror is directed towards it and reflects the laser
beam down a common path. This way the beams from the four cavities
are combined together into a common optical path.
After the rotating mirror, the beam is directed by additional folding

mirrors towards the following elements:
Attenuator - this is an optional element based on a beam splitter that

directs part of the energy towards a dumper. It reduces the peak power
of the main beam and is used for operating the laser at very low energy
settings in order to improve the lasers stability, or for using lower peak
power beam for various clinical techniques e.g. coagulation. The
attenuator is operated by a solenoid, with its default position out of the
optical path.
Energy measurement subsystem.
Optical wedge - a beam splitter element that reflects a very small

portion of the pulse energy towards two pyro measurement devices.
Focusing reflector - focuses the measurement beam onto the pyro

devices.
Two independents redundant pyro devices. The pyro devices

electronics are calibrated at production and service to provide correct
measurement of the pulse energy emitted from the fiber, compensating
for the tolerances in the entire optical and electrical control chain.
Service attenuator - a device similar to the regular attenuator. This

device is used only during manufacturing or service for optical
calibrations.
Safety shutter - a mirror reflecting the beam energy towards a dumper

preventing any of it from exiting the system. The shutter is closed at all
times except when the user requests the working beam by pressing on
the foot pedal. The shutter position is monitored at all times in
hardware safety mechanisms.
Aiming beam - a green CW laser
Optical beam combiner - combining the working beam and the

aiming beam into a common optical path.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-63

Focus lens - focuses the laser beam onto the fiber.
Fiber port - an optical SMA connector. The connector includes 2

independent sensors for fiber connection.
Optical System Comprising:
4 laser cavities - The cavities are constructed from a laser brick, a

highly reflective mirror and an output coupler mirror. The laser bricks
contain a Holmium or an Nd:YAG crystal rod, a flash lamp, and an
enclosure that directs the flash lamp light to the rod, and enables water
flow to cool the brick. 4 Holmium bricks, folding mirrors that direct the
laser beam on the optical path.
Rotating mirror - enables combining the 4 laser cavity beams into a

common path.
Attenuator - enables operating the laser in a stable regime for lower

energy pulses.
Dual redundant pyros that measure the actual pulse energy and
enables calibrating and correcting the lasing to reach the required pulse
energy.
Green aiming beam laser that is coupled into the main laser beam
optical path, and enables visual indication of the target area.
Blast shield that protects the focus lens in case of fiber malfunctions.
Focus lens that focuses the working beam on the fiber entrance.
Fiber port with dual redundant connection indication that enables

connecting a fiber delivery device to the console in a precise and
controlled way.
Self-contained cooling system based on a gas cycle chiller, which

provides cold water to water based laser cooling cycle.
Console electronics comprising the main controller, the GUI PC and

additional electronic boards for sub-units control and interfaces.
Display integrated with touchscreen, located at the top of the console.

The display angle can be adjusted, and the display can be swiveled for
convenient operation and viewing.
5-64
Suction pump and control. The suction control determines the suction
flow rate. The suction operation can be selected to be always Off,
always On, or conditionally turned On when the treatment beam is
emitted.
Support arm for routing the fiber and suction tube to the user in an
ordered and controlled manner.
5.16.3 Laser Power Parameters

Tissue laser interaction is primarily governed by the laser wavelength
and the target tissue absorption coefficient at that wavelength, defining
the effectiveness of the laser energy absorption in the target tissue.
However additional characteristics of the specific laser affect the laser
tissue interaction.
Pulsed lasers (such as the holmium laser) deliver an average power

(measured in Watts) that is achieved by multiplying the laser energy
emitted during each pulse (measured in Joules) and the frequency at
which these pulses are delivered (measured in Hertz). For example the
Lumenis Pulse 120H can deliver a maximum average power of 120W
obtained by delivery of 2J per pulse at a frequency of 60Hz.
Holmium laser systems can deliver the same average power at different
settings to achieve different laser tissue effect. Changing the energy of
each pulse can be described as the “bite size” of the laser effect,
whereas the frequency as the “bite rate”. For example, setting the
system at 30W can be performed using the following sets of
parameters: 1.5J at 20Hz or 0.5J at 60Hz.
When working with calculi, for example, these different settings may
affect the stone by breaking the stone into particles versus disintegrat-
ing the stone into fine dust. The selection of the appropriate energy and
frequency settings is dependent on the procedure and specific target
tissue.
Each pulse is delivered at a specific time frame, leading to fast heating

rise in temperature of the target tissue. By increasing the pulse
duration, the time frame of energy delivery to the tissue changes and
thereby changing the temperature profile of the tissue. A different
temperature profile may lead to a heating rather than a vaporizing
effect and is useful for example when blood vessel coagulation is
desired.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-65

The selection of appropriate power parameters and delivery system is

dependent on the procedure and the specific patient condition. It is
recommended that you become familiar with laser characteristics and
techniques by attending courses and consulting with colleagues in
order to utilize the lasers capabilities in a safe manner.
5.16.4 Optical Bench

The optics include the portions of the system that operate on the
Holmium beam and/or diode aiming beam.The rest of the beam path
includes the following optical components.
The Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser system can hold up to four
rods. The maximum average power and wavelength(s) the system
provides is determined by the number and type of rods used.
The system has four identical cavities arranged in a 2x2 matrix. Each
cavity includes its own rod, flash lamp, high reflector, output coupler
and a set of two relay mirrors. The rods are operated sequentially -
never together - thus each rod is capable of producing the maximum
selectable pulse energy. Each rod delivers every fourth pulse. This
sequential firing allows the system to provide four times the pulse rate
as could be provided by a single rod, increasing the maximum average
power available by the same factor (four).
For example, at the 40 Hz pulse rate, each rod is operating at 10 Hz,

and is producing 1/4th of the average power. As a result, the Lumenis
Pulse 120H Holmium laser provides higher selectable pulse rates and
higher average powers without requiring the extreme rod cooling as
would be required in a single rod system at the same operating point.
The YAG cavity provides pulsed output of 2.1 micron wavelength light
energy. The cavity is pumped with a xenon flash lamp. The lasing
medium is a Ho:YAG rod. The rod is positioned between an HR and
OC mirror. Up to four such cavities can be housed in a single system.
MULTIPLEXING OPTICS - The multiplexing optics consist of an

imaging and flat mirror for each cavity, and the servo positioned
imaging mirror. For each cavity, an imaging mirror directs the OC
output off a flat mirror to the surface of the servo positioned imaging
mirror. The servo positioned mirror can be rotated to line up with each
of the up to four YAG beam paths, so that each output is directed down
a common beam path.
5-66
COMMON BEAM PATH - the servo positioned mirror output is

directed through two folding mirrors towards the fiber focusing lens. In
its path are the following additional optical components.
Low Energy Attenuator - The LE attenuator can be inserted into the

beam path to decrease the treatment beam power. This allows the
system to deliver pulse energies lower than the lowest stable pulse
energy available out of the YAG head.
Figure 5-51 Optical Bench
The optical bench includes the following optical components:
• Four laser bricks (each one with its lamp and rod)
• Four OC (Output coupler)
• Four HR (High reflector) optics
• Four FRM (First Relay Mirror)
• Four SRM (Second Relay Mirror)
• Two 45° folding mirrors
• Servo Mirror
• Servo Motor
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-67

• Wedge Lens
• Green Aiming Beam
• Beam Combiner
• Fiber Focus Lens
• Blast Shield
• Safety Shutter
• Attenuator
• Safety Attenuator
• Pyro Imaging Mirror
• Pyro Detectors
• Service Mode Button
• Humidity sensor
Figure 5-52 Beam Path
The optical bench includes the following electrical components:
• Ignition Board
• Attenuator Board
5-68
• Pyro PCB
• Mirror motor
• Humidity Sensor
5.16.5 Ignition Board

The Role of the ignition card is to ignite the 4 lamps.
In order to light a lamp, we should provide +1200 VDC Between the

lamp terminals (Switching Module), and in addition we have to supply
high voltage pulse of about 6kV to the Brick envelops of the lamps.
Once - Switching Module was ordered Simmer On, the ignition process
is created automatically until the lamp ignites or a period of 4 seconds
was passed.
If for example all four modules were Simmer On Ordered - ignition

circuit will start to create Ignition pulses until all four lamps are ignited.
If a lamp does not ignite - it will send a charge module status fault.
Figure 5-53 Ignition Board
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-69

Figure 5-54 Line Signal from SWM to Ignition PCB
Figure 5-55 Ignition Board Wiring Diagram
5-70
5.16.6 Laser Deck and Manifold

The laser manifold mounts on the laser deck, direct coolant through a
4-units laser cavity (Pod). The manifold is electrically isolated from the
chassis to prevent high voltage arcing during flash lamp start pulses.
The manifold is split the flow in parallel when directed the coolant
from the entrance (1) to both directions at the same time. The flow runs
through bricks #1 and #2 at the bottom of the manifold and parallel turn
up to bricks #3 and #4. (point 3). After flowing through the upper floor,
the flow is merged and leaves the manifold (4).
Figure 5-56 Laser Deck Diagram
The Laser Deck includes the following cards:
• Pyro and Shutter card

• Attenuator card
• Mirror Motor card
• Aiming Beam
• SIS RF antenna
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-71

Figure 5-57 Laser Deck and Manifold
5.16.7 Pyros & Shutter board

The Pyro is basically consist of a gain control circuit, integrator and a
peak detector.
The circuit measures the received signal by the Pyro each time there is
a laser, and stops the laser when it reaches the desired energy.
This card also controls 2 shutters: Laser shutter and service attenuation
shutter.
5-72
• The card includes 2 PYRO channels: Main and Safety

• In each laser pulse both Pyro channels are measured and compared.
• The card includes Laser Safety Shutter and service attenuator.
• The Pyro card requires calibration. This is done in the integration
stage with Scope and service application.
Figure 5-58 Pyro and Shutter
5.16.8 Attenuator Board

The main controller provides the required current for the solenoid
within the Attenuator board. It controls the solenoid within the
Attenuator board, receiving a single indication regarding the solenoid
position within the Attenuator board.
The control is done by PWM from the Main controller card. This card
also monitors the Attenuator position by an optical switch. This card is
derived by 24V.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-73

Figure 5-59 Attenuator and PCB
Figure 5-60 Attenuator Board Diagram
5.16.9 Service Attenuator

The service attenuator is used when performing optical alignment (far
alignment). It is enabled via the service screen.
5.16.10 Mirror Motor & Mirror Motor PMCU

There are up to 4 bricks in the system. In order to get laser from a
specific brick, the mirror has to be in a correct reflection position.
5-74
Mirror motor controls the mirror to do so. An encoder mechanism to

assure the right position pre-firing may be used.
Figure 5-61 Mirror Motor Block Diagram
The MM PMCU card controls and monitors the mirror motor.
The card is derived by a CAN bus from the Main controller
The mirror motor includes a DC motor and an Encoder
The mirror motor control relies on an HW device that performs the

actual closed loop control of the motor. The system interfaces with this
device to:
• Set the required parameters for the motion control

• Set the required movement command
• Read the current position
The system performs at start-up a homing procedure and a test to verify
the correct operation of the motor sub-system.
The home position is found by commanding the motor to move a single

index position with motion control parameters, in a constant direction
until the Home index is identified.
The motor is tested by commanding it to:
• Move in the opposite direction of the home search with the same
parameters until the Home position is reached again. The number of
steps taken must match the number of steps for a full circle.
• The motor is then commanded to move to each of the firing positions
using motion control parameters, which are identical to the
parameters to be used in the operational movement. The motor
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-75

position is tested before a pulse is fired and verified against the

required position.
The system commands the motor during the lasing state to move to the
next position at the end of the pulse.
Before firing the next pulse the system reads the mirror position and
verify against the required position. If the position is incorrect, the
system raises a fault event and act according to the fault handling
procedure.
All the parameters in this paragraph are defined in a configuration file.
Figure 5-62 Mirror Motor
5.16.11 Green Aiming Beam

Aiming Beam Diode, Folding Mirror, and Combiner Optic - Aiming
beam is provided by a 532 nm green diode laser. The user can select
high, low, or medium intensity; or turn the aiming beam off. The
folding mirror and combiner are adjusted to place the aiming beam
coaxial with treatment beam.
The main controller controls the aiming beam through a PWM

interface.
5-76
Figure 5-63 Green Aiming Beam
5.16.12 Pyros and Shutter Board

The main controller provides the required current for both solenoids
and controls them within the Pyros and Shutter board. It receives a
single indication regarding the service solenoid position within the
Pyros and Shutter board. It receives a double indication regarding the
shutter solenoid position within the Pyros and Shutter board.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-77

Figure 5-64 Pyro PCB
Figure 5-65 Pyro Block Diagram
Pyros circuitry
One of the pyros (“main”) samples is monitored through an SPI
interface from the FPGA of the main controller. The other pyro
(“safety”) is read by the DSP in one of two options – analog or digital
(SPI). If the digital option is used, a reference signal of ~2.5V to the A/
D is used.
5-78
There are two pyro sensors: safety and main. Main pyro is connected to
the MMCU and serves the MMCU to close an energy system loop.
Safety pyro is connected to the FPGA and serves to check output laser
energy.
Figure 5-66 Pyro Safety Circuit
After sensors calibration in the manufacturing, in the user mode,

software compares main and safety pyro values (reads safety pyro
value from FPGA register). In the user mode, FPGA checks safety pyro
to predefined 40% limits.
5.16.13 Shutter and Footswitch Safety Circuit

The main FPGA allows laser shutter opening when all safety lines are
valid. This raises the SAFETY_SHUTTER_ENABLE signal.
The software may bypass SAFETY_SHUTTER_ENABLE signal by

configuring main FPGA to a MANUFACTURING_MODE and setting
SHUTTER_BYPASS register.
The Software is responsible to enable/disable shutter opening by the

SW_SHUTTER_ENABLE.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-79

Figure 5-67 Shutter Safety Diagram
5.16.14 Safety Shutter

The safety shutter serves to redirect, and therefore block, the treatment
laser beam from entering the combiner mirror, thereby preventing the
treatment laser from leaving the aperture.The safety shutter consists of
a reflective metal blade that is rotated into the treatment laser beam
path by way of a rotary solenoid. Once rotated into the beam path, the
treatment laser beam is safely redirected to the beam dump where the
laser energy is absorbed. By means of optical switches, the position of
the safety shutter is monitored by the control electronics.The safety
shutter is in the treatment laser beam path whenever the laser is de-
energized, during the turn on self-test auto-calibration (test firing)
sequence, while in STANDBY mode and after any fault condition is
detected.
5.16.15 Beam Combiner Mirror

The beam combiner mirror serves to bring together, or combine, the
treatment laser beam and the aiming laser beam onto one coaxial beam
path.This optic is capable of performing this function since it is a (cold)
dichroic mirror.The optical element is known as a cold mirror since it
transmits the hot, infra-red treatment laser beam while reflecting the
5-80
cold, visible aiming laser beam.From the combiner mirror, both the
treatment laser and the aiming laser beams are directed to the fiber
focus assembly.
5.16.16 Diode Laser Module

A 1mW, 532nm diode pumped Nd:YAG laser is used as the green
visible aiming beam.The diode laser beam profile is typically
elliptical.The diode laser is mounted in a tubular housing that acts as a
heat sink for the device. The diode laser is typically powered by a
+5VDC supply, and since the housing is at the supply potential, it must
be electrically isolated from ground.The diode laser module is mounted
in an adjustable mount to align the beam to be coaxial to the treatment
beam.
The aiming laser beam is directed towards a turning mirror on the fiber
focus assembly, which relays the beam towards the backside of the
combiner mirror. From the combiner mirror, the aiming beam passes
through the fiber focus assembly to the proximal end of a delivery
fiber.The delivery fiber will shape the elliptical beam into a round spot
with a relatively homogenous beam profile.
5.16.17 Blast Shield

The blast shield optic is flat, with parallel sides and is AR coated on
both surfaces.The blast shield is a sacrificial optic that protects the
focus lens from smoke and debris in the event of a fiber failure (blown
fiber). The blast shield optic is mounted on a user replaceable
aluminum bar. After the blast shield optic is damaged, the entire mount
must be replaced.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-81

Figure 5-68 Blast Shield Causes of Debris
5-82
Figure 5-69 Blast Shield Port
Lift the top cover door to access the blast shield storage space, storing 2
spare blast shields.
Figure 5-70 Blast Shield Storage
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-83

5.16.18 Laser Aperture

The laser aperture is typically at the end of any attached optical fiber
(delivery fiber) as noted by the label at the fiber port. Special care must
be taken with all optical fibers as any severe bending, pulling or
twisting can fracture and break the optical fiber. The treatment laser
energy will exit the fiber at either the break point or the distal end of the
optical fiber.
5.16.19 Optical Fiber (SIS)

A number of different optical fibers (delivery systems) are compatible
with this laser system. Each delivery system contains three of the
following basic elements:
• The fiber end face with a SMA thread nut and strain relief
• A length of fiber or “trunk”
• The distal fiber end, terminated by either a bare end or a specialty
hand piece.
All Lumenis Holmium fibers are made of high quality, low water (low
OH) quartz fiber for optimum 2.1µm transmission.
Figure 5-71 Delivery System
5-84
Fibers come in various diameters ranging from ~200 to 1,000µm.While

smaller diameter fibers have a tighter bend radius, large diameter fibers
often handle higher pulse energies and average power as well as have
longer lifetimes.
Certain Lumenis SIS fiber delivery systems for the Pulse 120H
holmium laser system are designed to allow several surgical
procedures, while others are limited to only one procedure. When a
fiber is connected, the system immediately knows:
• how many procedures the fiber can perform

• how many procedures have been performed with the fiber
• how many procedures are left before fiber expiration
• if all allocated procedures are exhausted and the fiber is expired
Every time the fiber is connected to the system, a pop-up message will
appear on the system display screen, informing the surgeon of the
fiber's status.
SIS Card
• RFID reader @ 125Khz, designed to read the Fiber tags
• Developed by Logitag
• Consist of Card reader, antenna matching circuit and 125Khz
antenna located at the fiber port.
• Connected through USB to the LPU card
Figure 5-72 SIS Card
5.16.20 RF-ID
RF-ID glass Tag made by Sakymat, diameter of 2.12mm with 2Kbit
memory read/write capability is installed in each SMA Fiber connector.
RF-ID Reader at frequency of 125-KHz is integrated into the Control
board. RF-ID antenna is integrated into the front panel.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-85

The RF-ID reader communicates in RS-232 serial communication with

the controller CPU and will get/send Fiber parameters (Type, Size,
O.K) and will display them on the screen.
RF-ID implements fiber security identification in order to prevent

unrecognized fibers use.
5.16.21 Fiber Focus Assembly

The fiber focus assembly contains a number of mechanical, electrical
and optical elements to perform the tasks of:
• Coupling the optical fiber to an SMA thread port

• Detecting the attached optical fiber
• Launching the treatment and aiming laser beams into the proximal
optical fiber end face
• Detecting the presence of the blast shield mount.
The optical SIS fibers (delivery fibers) are coupled to the fiber focus
assembly by way of a standard SMA thread. When the fiber nut is seated
on the SMA thread, an internal contact plate is shorted to ground and an
external momentary switch is closed, signaling the control electronics
that a fiber is attached.
The launch of the large treatment and aiming beams (~6mm diameter)
into the small optical fiber (~300 -1000∝m diameter) is accomplished by
focusing through a plano-convex zinc selenide fiber focus lens. Mid way
between the focus lens and the fiber end face is a protective optic called
the blast or debris shield. The blast shield protects the fiber focus lens
from smoke and debris in the event of a fiber failure (blown fiber). A
micro-switch checks for the presence of the blast shield mount.
Note
Spot actual diameter is up to 170 - 200um, depending on the lasing
regime.
5-86
Figure 5-73 Fiber Focus Lens
5.16.22 Laser Cavity (Brick)

The laser cavity, also known as a brick, contains the flash lamp (laser
pump), the laser rod (laser medium), and a twin port flow tube. The flash
lamp and laser rod each occupy one of the two flow tube ports, and each
flow tube is slightly larger in diameter than the flash lamp and laser rod
allowing coolant to pass over both simultaneously. Coolant enters one
end of the cavity by way of an end block, flows coaxially along the flash
lamp and laser rod, and exits the opposite exit block. The coolant
removes heat generated by the flash lamp and absorbed by the laser rod.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-87

Figure 5-74 Pod and Ignition Board
5.16.23 HR and OC
The optical resonator consists of two mirrors, the high reflector (HR)
mirror and the output coupler (OC) mirror. As its name implies, the HR
is highly reflective, directing nearly 100%of the laser light back into the
laser rod.The OC reflects the majority of the laser light back into the
laser rod for amplification, while it transmits or leaks the balance (a
small percentage) of the laser light out of the optic.The light that leaks
out of the OC is the usable laser light, the treatment laser.
5.16.24 Wedge Optic

The wedge optic is coated to reflect a small percentage (<0.5%)of the
treatment wavelength from each surface. The wedge optic directs the two
separate beams, leaving at diverging angles, toward the pyro detector
imaging mirror.
5.16.25 Pyro Detector Imaging Mirror

The pyro detector imaging mirror is a concave mirror that completely
reflects both sampled treatment beams sent by the wedge optic.
5-88
The concave mirror collimates the diverging sampled beams and directs
them toward the two pyroelectric detector elements.This mirror is
adjustable in both X and Y axes, allowing the sampled treatment beams
to be centered in the detector apertures.
5.16.26 Servo Mirror

The system uses a servo positioned rotating mirror to assemble the four
YAG beams into a single beam. The servo system must reposition the
mirror between pulses, pointing the mirror towards the head that will be
flashed.
The mirror is mounted to the end of the motor shaft, at a slight angle, so
that as the shaft rotates through 360°, the mirror orientation changes.
Between YAG pulses the mirror must be moved to and stopped at the
point in its rotation that aligns it with the output coupler of the head that
will be fired next. After the pulse, it must be moved to the next head to
be fired, and so on for as long as firing continues: 90° x 4 = 360°.
5.17 Moses Capability
5.17.1 Moses Feature Concept

Moses feature is based on the physical effect that Holmium laser pulses
are strongly absorbed by the water. Firing a laser pulse in water
medium causes an inflation of a bubble in front of the fiber, and after a
period of time a collapse of this bubble.
Energy losses of the laser pulse while travelling inside the bubble are
much lower than when travelling in water.
The concept of Moses feature is to shape the laser pulse into two
adjacent parts. The first part is optimized for a given fiber, and for the
target laser pulse energy. The second part is fired after a delay. The
delay is optimized so that the overall effect is optimal, e.g. an optimal
energy delivery through water at a given distance. The following figure
shows a conceptual time diagram of the process.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-89

Figure 5-75 MOSES Concept
5.17.2 Introduction
In a liquid environment when laser is emitted from the holmium fiber
tip, the water surrounding the tips heats to above the boiling
temperature and a vapor bubble is created. The vapor bubble expands
from the fiber tip towards the target tissue. As only a portion of the
pulse is sufficient to create the vapor bubble, the remaining pulse
energy travels through the air void contained in the bubble, and is less
attenuated compared to travel through liquid water. Depending on the
pulse energy and the distance from the tissue, this remaining portion of
energy will reach the target tissue.
When the distance between the fiber tip and the target tissue is very
small, this phenomenon is not observed, as the bubble is not created
and most of the energy reaches the target tissue. In contact the laser is
therefore the most efficient. However, when distance is increased, the
relative energy that reaches the target tissue is greatly decreased,
leading to reduced efficiency of the laser energy in ablating the target
tissue. The laser efficiency is therefore much dependent on the distance
between the fiber tip and the target tissue. This is defined as the regular
mode currently available for all system applications.
The Moses mode introduces a modulation to the energy pulse that-

combined with a Moses supported fiber- enables emission of a
controlled portion of energy to create the vapor bubble, while leaving a
larger portion as the effective energy portion that travels through the
vapor bubble to reach the target tissue. Laser efficiency is therefore less
dependent on the distance between the fiber tip and the target and laser
energy is delivered with higher efficiency.
5-90
Moses capability requires the use of dedicated Lumenis Moses

supported fiber and it is available only for systems that incorporate
Moses capability which has been activated.
5.17.3 Moses Fibers and Hardware

The Moses mode is enabled for a dedicated new Moses fiber family.
The following fibers are supported by Moses mode:
• Moses 200 D/F/L

• Moses 365 D/F/L
• Moses 550 D/F/L
The Moses fibers are an integral part of the Moses Technology.

The tailored premium quality fiber range of 200, 365 and 550 D/F/L,
are designed for optimal energy transmission and durability. Moses
Single Use end-firing fibers come in the following forms: Moses 200
D/F/L, Moses 365 D/F/L and Moses 550 D/F/L. The cutting edge
Moses™ 200 D/F/L fibers, allow surgeons to reach hard-to-access
stone locations, and enable smooth fiber insertion through a deflected
scope.
The Moses bricks are new bricks developed by R&D to support the
Moses Technology. Combined with the new pyro board – both of the
HW components allow the new and optimized pulse modulation
mechanism.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-91

The Moses kit, P/N SPMO-0006800 includes:
• Software upgrade and license

• Moses bricks (x4)
• Front panel with Moses logo
• Moses pyro board
Figure 5-76 Moses Kit
5-92
Figure 5-77 Moses License Enabled
Figure 5-78 Treatment Screen - Moses On/Off Button
SM-0006900 Rev. G 5-93

5-94
C H A P T E R
SOFTWARE
The following chapter describes the software of the system, its uses and
interface, and installation.
6.1 General
The software implements and manages device operational modes and
states, activates and monitors all functional components and
subsystems. It will enable device operation by the user. To enable
device serviceability, service features should be implemented to
support all required service functionality. To enable device and sub-
systems diagnostics and testing in service, the system contains a service
mode.
The service mode is a user friendly application with enables the CE to

perform system diagnostics, troubleshooting and maintenance
activities.
It also enables the CE to perform calibration tasks and view calibration

results.
There are two modes in the system: User mode and service mode.
The software provides the option to work in counted (for fiber

centration) or continuous mode.
Enables the service personnel to view log data (system error log data
and pyro log data) to copy it to an external application (Excel) and to
retrieve and save log files to memory stick device. The CE can also
view all system configuration data (Lumenis, Service or User).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-1

6.2 Software Features

The system comprises the main micro-controller unit (MMCU),
Lumenis Processing Unit (LPU), High Voltage Peripheral Control Unit
(HV PMCU) Mirror Motor Peripheral control Unit (MM PMCU).
The responsibilities partitioning logic is that the MMCU is responsible

for all the system operation aspects, the two PMCUs are responsible for
the local control of their subsystems according to the MMCU provided
control, and the LPU provides the User Interface and data storage
services.
The laser system’s MMCU software controls and monitors all of the
critical functions of the laser (power supply, footswitch, control panels,
pulse energy and pulse rate and laser firing).
The software is integrated with FPGA implemented hardware. The

hardware implements the actual lasing control according to the
parameters provided by the software. The safety aspects of lasing
control are implemented by the HW and respond much quicker than is
possible with SW. The SW provides the lasing pulse parameters,
monitors the resulting pulse and updates the parameters on a per-pulses
basis to provide accurate laser output.
The software installed in the system is divided into two main parts:
• User mode software

• Service mode software
6.3 User Mode
6.3.1 User Software Functions

After the system has been turned on and the self-test routines are
successfully completed, the Main Menu appears on the control panel.
The elements of the Main Menu screen are detailed as follows (the
numbered arrows in Figure 6-1 correlate to the numbered steps below):
6-2
Software
Figure 6-1 Main Menu (User)
1. Specialty – Identifies the currently-selected surgical specialty. This

can be set as a default specialty in the Settings and Utilities screen.
2. Specialties – Press this button to access the Other Specialties
screen. Here you may select another surgical specialty.
3. Utilities Cogwheel – Press this icon to access Quick Settings, Help,
About and to Turn Off System.
4. Help – Press this button to access the system's software help utility.
5. Manage Presets – Press this button to access the Presets
Management screen. Here you may create new presets with your
proprietary names and parameter protocols, or edit existing ones.
6. Reports – Press this button to access the Reports and Treatment
Logs screen. On this screen you may view the treatment logs of the
procedures performed by the system. The logs can also be exported
a USB mass storage device (disk-on-key).
7. Settings & Utilities – Press this button to access the Settings and
Utilities screen. Here you may configure or re- configure several of
the system's functional utilities.
8. Shutdown – Press this button to perform an orderly shutdown of
the system.
9. Fiber – Identifies the fiber connection status.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-3

10. Notification Bar – Notifications and error messages will appear in

this bar.
11. Presets – Lumenis Presets are hard-coded into the system software
and are marked with the Lumenis logo. Hospital Presets are
designed and entered to the system by the hospital's surgeons. Any
settings entered or re-entered on the Main Treatment screen during
a procedure, may be saved and named as a Hospital Preset. The
presets displayed on the Home screen are those defined as Favorites
and are marked with a numbered star.
Press the View All... button to display all of the available presets, not
only those defined as Favorites. After pressing the Preset button the
system will transition to the Main Treatment screen.
Figure 6-2 User Treatment Screen
The user software and its related screens are described in more detail in
the Operator Manual.
6-4
Software
6.4 System States

The SW application implements and manages the following system
states and corresponding state transitions:
• Power ON
• Standby
• Ready
• Lasing
• Idle
• Service Standby
• Service Ready
• Service Fire
• Error
• Shut down
Figure 6-3 System States
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-5

6.4.1 Power ON State

The Power ON state includes the following sub states:
• Initialization
• Wait for communication establish
• System configuration
• Self-test
Initialization (on control boards Power up) supports the following:
LPU Initialization
The PC powers up with the Operating system and application basic
workflow manager is created with basic required LPU services (User
DB, Error Manager, Log Manager, Configuration manager, HASP
Manager, SIS service)
The application startup screen is displayed, communication protocol

(LAN on PC side) initialization is performed, LPU initiates
communication establish between all control board (sends a request to
MMCU for communication to be established).
MMCU Initialization
MCU HW basic required initialization
Initialize and configure internal board interfaces: IPC, Initialize SPI

interface
EEPROM Initialization & FPGA initialization
• Initializes and configures external interfaces: CAN and LAN

• Configuration and Initialization of Board subsystem peripherals
• Initializes state machine & creates MMCU main Application
CNT manager class
• Creates and Initialization system functional subsystems. Each
subsystem creates and initializes a set of functional
components. (In this stage only subsystems which are
connected directly to MMCU (not via CAN) initializes its own
required set of functional components).
6-6
Software
• Creates and Initializes Services: Monitoring service (Set

periodic check subsystem for initial monitor), Log handler,
Error handler
In this stage the MMCU and FPGA watchdogs are activated.
PMCU Initialization
• DSP required HW initialization, in addition creates and configures
Debug I/O (blink led)
• External interface: Initialize and configure CAN Bus communication
• Internal interfaces: Initialize SPI interface (FPGA)
• PMCU and FPGA watchdogs are activated.
• Creates PMCU main Application manager class and PMCU
functional sub system class (i.e. HVPS subsystem class). PMCU
functional sub system creates and initializes a set of functional
components. (i.e. for HVPS operation and monitor)
• (HVPS PMCU specific) - creates Fire pulse manager class (This SW
object (in HVPS PMCU SW) is responsible for delivering pulse
requested by MMCU and HVPS monitoring during lasing)
• Performs basic functionality test of HW peripherals and internal
interfaces.(PMCU HW BIT)
• Waits for CAN communications establish with MMCU for PMCU
functional Sub system configuration and operation.
Board Communication establishment supports the following:
This sub state is entered after all control boards initialization and ready
for establishing communication.
LPU & MMCU - LPU (master) after basic initialization sends to

MMCU a special command for requesting to establish communication
between the two (using retries after time-out if required), MMCU
(slave) waits for connection.
MMCU & PMCU- MMCU (master) sends PMCU special command

for requesting to establish communication between the two (using
retries after time-out if required), PMCU (slave) wait for connection.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-7

If communication is not established between the LPU and MMCU

within 5 seconds, lasing stops, a communication error #10/11 is
displayed and the system enters ERROR state.
If communication is not established between a specific PMCU and

MMCU within up to 1 second time-out, a communication error #N1 is
displayed and system enters ERROR state.
Once communication is established between the MMCU and PMCUs,

the MMCU configures all of PMCUs sub systems (via CAN bus) with
the required configuration and receives confirmation from the PMCU
that the configuration has been applied successfully.
At the end of this state and conditional to moving to the next state, the
LPU receives information from MMCU that communication was
established with all the PMCUs and initialization is done successfully.
System configuration sub state supports the following:
• Before system configuration is started, the software performs an

integrity test for required configuration files. This procedure is
performed after system basic initialization and before start of
running the system in any of the operation modes.
• The system configuration is done via LPU Configuration Manager
Service.
• Before system configuration, system default values are used.
Self test (start up BIT)

After Licensing check (HASP), data integrity test and system
configuration, LPU sends requests to MMCU for performing device
tests according to list of tests (Indexes of tests as enumerator, taken
from Config. File), some tests are mandatory and some are according to
configuration file.
System self – test sequence are controlled by the LPU. The sequence of
the required tests to be run and its order is defined in the configuration
file and accessible to LPU application.
Notification of any errors or warnings is displayed in the notifications

window at the bottom of the screen.
MMCU supports the following tests:
• Performs FPGA test- for MMCU and PMCU boards
6-8
Software
• Performs Functional Sub systems self-test. Application manager

request each subsystem to perform following tests routines and to
report its tests results.
• LVPS test: Check LVPS +5V, -+15V, +24V (to each of the models
and of control boards- TBD)
• External UI subsystem self-test:
• Check Laser stop button. position
• Run Footswitch Test
• Check Interlock status
• Cooling subsystem self-test
Figure 6-4 Self Test Screen (Service Mode)
6.4.2 Charger subsystem self-test (550/650/800V):

If capacitors are charged, dump capacitors and wait until capacitors
voltage reaches ~0[v] (within defined time-out).
Set Capacitor Voltage desired value N[v] between 0- 450[V].
Check Capacitor Voltage is ~ N [V] (within defined time-out).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-9

Set Capacitor Voltage desired value N1[v] between 500 – 800[v] (N1).
• Check Capacitor Voltage is ~ N1 [V] (within defined time-out)

• Check Charger Fail status
• Check Capacitors balance
• Check Charger 24[v]
SWM (switching model) subsystem self-test:
• For each of 4 bricks check, if simmer is ON, then set to OFF (within
defined time-out).
• For each of 4 bricks, set simmer status ON, check that simmer status
is ON (within defined time-out).
• For each of 4 bricks check Over Temperature.
• For each of 4 bricks check IGBT leakage.
• For each of 4 bricks check 24[v] exist
• Check safety IGBT status
• Check SWM 24[v]
• Check Bricks correct location, availability and type (Holmium,
ND: YAG or NONE) (compare with configuration data)
Laser deck subsystem self-test:

• Shutter test
• Attenuator test
• Service Attenuator test
• Servo motor test
• Blast shield status
• Fiber connection and identification
In case of fatal error during self-test - the system enters ERROR state.
User will not be able to proceed with system normal operation, except
viewing test results.
If no Fatal Error occurred the system enters STANDBY state.
6-10
Software
Power ON State Transition

Enter state: This state is entered automatically on power-up. The SW
performs all required initialization and system required configuration.
Afterwards, SW performs system self-test and all required calibrations.
Exit state: The state is exited after completion of startup self-test. If no

service hasp is plugged in (before system Power ON) and full self-test
passes successfully (system normal operation is possible), the software
is enabled to enter Standby state. If errors are detected (fatal errors-
system normal operation is not possible), test results are displayed to
the user, and user can’t proceed with system normal operation. the
software enters system to Error state, only service technician can enter
Service Standby via service hasp. If service hasp is inserted (before
system Power ON), partial self-test is performed on startup and after
completion, software enters only the Service application for authorized
service personnel.
6.4.3 STANDBY State

In STANDBY sate the system gives a sound indicating entering state,
and the system enables navigation through all user screens.
The system enables ability to modify all treatment parameters and

aiming beam, user preferences, save edit its own presets, view Lumenis
presets, atlas of accessories etc.
Treatment parameters modification is restricted to the limits of the

model in use.
The modification of user treatment parameters is enabled via the Main

display and touch screen.
The software monitors for request for enter SERVICE mode received.
Standby state used when displaying statuses, information messages,

warning messages, and remote control connected status.
Charger System ON: Capacitors bank charged (to X[v] 300 msec)
Cooling system is set to work as needed (reduced/adaptive)
SWM system ON: The 4 Simmer is set to ON.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-11

Laser CNT prevents fire – shutter disabled and remains closed.
Safety is set – Mechanism for checking inadvertent exposure is ON.
External UI: Lasing LED indicator is set OFF, FSW is disabled
The software performs system monitoring – continuous BIT (appropri-

ate for this state).
STANDBY Transitions state

This state is entered upon one of the following events:
• After the successful completion of start-up self-tests.

• Exit from a Ready mode - user request.
• Exit from a Ready mode - Upon 5 min (Sys. Config. Value) if
no user activity in READY mode.
• Recovery from an Error state.
• Exit from a service Standby state. (in Service application)
• Exit from IDLE state.
This state is exited upon one of the following events:
• User successful request to enter Ready state.

• Service personnel request to enter Service mode.
6.4.4 READY State

In READY sate the system gives a sound indicating when entering
state. Note: Entering to “Ready” state from “Standby” state is indicated
with a long sound which is different than the sound indication for
entering any other state.
The system does not enable changing of any treatment parameters and
Aiming Beam intensity. Any change returns the user to Standby mode.
If the user choose to switch to another screen – the system goes to

STANDBY state.
6-12
Software
Display statuses, information messages, warning messages, and remote

control connected status.
Upon entering this state system saves treatment parameters into

dedicated User Configuration file.
Aiming beam ON (visible) with user requested intensity level
Charger System: Capacitors bank is verified to be charged to last

requested value.
Cooling system is set to work as needed (reduced/adaptive)
SWM system: The 4 Simmers is verified to be ON
Laser CNT prevents fire – shutter disabled, kept close.
Safety is set – Mechanism for checking inadvertent exposure is ON.
SW performs system monitoring – continues BIT (suitable for this

state)
External UI:
• Lasing LED indicator is set to BLINKING.

• Footswitch in disable state (before enabling it) is checked when
entering Ready state. If HW problem exist, the system gives an error
indication and not enable enter the Ready state.
• After footswitch is enabled, footswitch position is checked when
entering Ready state. If footswitch is pressed, the system gives an
error indication and not enable enter the Ready state.
• Footswitch position is monitored.
READY State Transitions

This state is entered upon one of the following events:
• Upon user request to enter Ready state from main GUI or

remote control.
• Upon mufti functional footswitch operation (switch states
Ready/Standby pedal)
• Upon exit from Treatment state (Left/Right pedal depress)
This state is exited upon one of the following events:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-13

• Foot Switch pressed and system enters LASING state.

• Exit Standby- Upon user request from main GUI or remote
control
• System request to enter ERROR state if error detected in the
system.
6.4.5 LASING State

In LASING state the system give a sound indication when entering the
state.
“Laser emission” appears on the control screen at all times

during treatment to alert the user that laser energy is being emitted.
The system disables all GUI inputs and its monitoring.
Charger System: Capacitors bank are verified to be charged to between

400 and 800 VDC.
Cooling system are verified to work as needed (full / reduced/adaptive)
SWM system: The 4 Simmers are verified to be ON.
The software performs system monitoring – continues BIT (suitable for

this state)
The message “LASING” is displayed in status bar.
External UI:
• Lasing LED indicator is set to ON.

• Footswitch position is monitored.
During lasing there a special lasing sound is emitted indicating lasing.
The volume can be controlled from the “User preferences” screen.
If the measured pulse energy or pulse rate are outside the specified
limits, the software halts lasing and goes to Error state.
6-14
Software
Pulse Pulse Rate (Hz) Acceptance Range (Watts)

Energy (J)
0.5 5 2.2 - 2.8

1.0 5 4.5 - 5.5
0.5 20 9.0 - 11.0
1.0 20 18.0 - 22.0
1.5 20 27.0 - 33.0
0.2 80 14.0 - 18.0
2.4 25 54.0 - 66.0
0.5 40 18.0 - 22.0
2.0 40 76.0 - 84.0
0.5 50 22.0 - 27.5
2.0 50 90.0 - 110.0
2.0 60 110.0 - 130.0
When the footswitch is released or a fault is detected during lasing, the

system stops lasing the lamps and closes the safety shutter.
The system goes back to Ready state or Error state if a fault is detected.
Lasing State Transitions

This state is entered when the footswitch is pressed in READY state.
(One of the treatment pedals is pressed).
This state exits upon one of the following:
• Exit to Ready –Upon release of footswitch (The treatment pedal

is released)
• Exit to Error state- If error occurred and system enters ERROR
state.
6.4.6 IDLE State

In IDLE state the GUI indicates IDLE mode. The system “wakes up” to
STANDBY upon the following events:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-15

• Touch screen event/Remote control event.

• Fiber connection event.
• Any External UI event.
• Cooling system is set to off
• SWM system OFF: simmer is set to OFF.
• Charger System: Capacitors discharged
Subsystems are notified when entering the state. Each subsystem

defines the monitoring scope for this state.
Laser CNT prevents lasing: shutter disabled and kept closed.
Safety is set to Inadvertent exposure ON.
External UI: Lasing LED indicator is set to OFF.
The software performs system monitoring – continuous BIT (relevant

for this state)
IDLE State Transition

This state is entered if there was NO activity in STBY state for X min
(Sys. Config. Value), It is exited upon one of the following:
• Event from Touch screen/Remote Control
• Any event in one of External UI (i.e. Fiber/Blast shield

Connect)-excluding footswitch press because its disabled in
STBY state
• New warning/error status reported to error handler.
ERROR state
In ERROR sate the system gives a special error sound indication and
the GUI indicates ERROR state on display - User appropriate Error
message and recover error instruction is displayed (Please refer to UI
documents in references)
In case of fatal error, the cooling system continues to work as long as

there is no Flow Switch Error. The Cooling system continues working
at the same power it was before the fatal error appeared.
6-16
Software
SWM system OFF: All simmers are set to OFF in user mode. In service
mode only if a service fatal error exists.
Charger System: Capacitors bank are dumped in user mode. In service

mode, only if a service fatal error exists.
Subsystems are notified when entering the state. Each subsystem

defines the monitoring scope for this state.
Laser CNT: Disable shutter.
Safety is set to Inadvertent exposure ON.
External UI- Lasing LED indicator is set to OFF.
ERROR State Transition

This state is entered when an Error event in the system occurs.
This state is exited when one of the following occurs:
• To STANDBY state if error is recoverable

• Upon request enter Service mode.
• Upon user request for system shutdown
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-17

6.5 Service Mode

Service Application enables Lumenis Service personnel to perform
system diagnostic, maintenance and calibration tasks.
Service mode can only be accessed by Lumenis authorized technicians

by a service HASP.
The service mode is enables maximum system functionality, except in

cases when a service fatal error condition occurs in the system.
The service screens functionality enables control and monitoring of

main hardware components and subsystems.
Auto lasing is disabled by the service HASP (if it was plugged into the
system before power up), for enabling service personnel to control the
system power Up process, wither with lasing operations or without any
lasing operation on startup.
The software does not enable switching back from the service mode to
user mode. In order to return to the system’s normal operation, the
system must be restarted.
The software activates the service mode only if the service HASP is
detected.
6-18
Software
Figure 6-5 Service Screen Work Flow
6.5.1 Accessing Service Mode

The software checks if the service HASP is inserted, and if not displays
an informative message to remind the user to insert a service HASP.
Access to the service mode can be done in two different scenarios:
If service personnel has inserted the service HASP on start up, before
system power up - the software performs a power-up process including
self-test, without any lasing operations such as test pulses, auto
calibration and warm pulses.At the end of partial power-up process, the
software displays information message such as “Auto lasing disabled,
please enter service application”, and provides the option which
enables access to the service application, if service HASP is still
inserted.
If the service HASP is not detected on startup - the software behaves as

during system normal operation, performing a full power up process
including full self-test, with all required lasing operations. The
software enables access to service mode via the GUI (from the Utility
screen), if the system is in one of the following states: Error, or Standby
state.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-19

The service mode enables service personnel to do the following:
• view all system configuration data (Lumenis, Service or User)

• retrieve and save Log files to memory stick (disk-on-key).
• activate each system module separately, test and view its status (i.e.,
cooling system, Switching module, charger, LVPS)
• perform self-tests and view its results
• Perform SW upgrade.
• perform Lumenis Factory configuration data upgrade.
• Set/read system clock.
• Read SIS tag data
• perform lasing both in open loop and in closed loop with full system
periodic check (as in User mode).
• perform lasing with fibers which are not SIS protected.
• perform lasing in non safety mode without fiber attached.
• perform different operations limited due to system restrictions (i.e.
simmer is not turned ON without cooling active).
• perform pyro gain calibration, manually and automatically. The
potentiometers are digital and not mechanical, and are set by the
software via a service potentiometer screen.
The service mode supports functionality of reading power from an

external power meter (using Ophir Nova device and special Ophir
protocol based on RS232 interface).
To access the service mode, do the following:
1. Make sure the main power is plugged in to the main wall power and
the keyswitch is turned on.
2. Take the service HASP and connect it to the service USB port.
Note
The Service HASP has an expiration date of 1 year from the first use.
6-20
Software
Figure 6-6 Connect HASP to Service USB
3. Verify that the circuit breaker is ON (UP).
circuit
breaker
4. Turn the system on by pressing the On/Off button (long press).

5. After the splash screen appears, the System Mode message appears,
indicating that the service HASP is detected - press Yes; the Main
Screen appears.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-21

Figure 6-8 System Mode Message
Figure 6-9 Service Main Screen
6. Verify that the Technician HASP LED indicator on the screen

changes from red to green.
7. Service Mode is now active.
6-22
Software
6.5.2 Quick Settings for Service

The Quick Settings screen has two sub-screen:
• Volume and display brightness settings

• Settings and Utilities - includes:
• Date & Time set
• MMCU Verbosity Level
• Error Log
• Export data to USB
The system can also be shut down from the Quick Settings screen.
The screen does not affect the signal that is emitted during lasing or any
other sounds that are directly related to safety.
Volume and Display Brightness

1. Press the cogwheel in the upper-right corner and select Quick
Settings.
Figure 6-10 Select Quick Settings
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-23

2. In the Quick Settings screen that opens, slide the upper slider to the
right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume. If you do
not want to hear any voice indications, select the Quiet mode check
box.
Figure 6-11 Select Quick Settings Slider
3. Press OK.
6.5.3 Settings and Utilities Screen

The Settings and Utilities screen includes:
• Settings
• Error Logs
• Date and Time
• MMCU Verbosity Levels
• Updates
• Update License
• Update Service Pack (for enabling future fibers)
• Firmware Update
• Import/Export Operations
• Export Data to USB
• Export System’s Calibrations
6-24
Software
• Import System’s Calibrations
Figure 6-12 Settings & Utilities Screen
Settings - Error Logs

From the Settings and Utilities Screen, press View Error Logs. The
screen displays all active and warnings accumulated from the last
system startup, and Error History, errors accumulated since system
installation.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-25

Figure 6-13 Error Logs
Quick Settings - Logs

From the Settings and Utilities Screen, press Logs. You can then select
to see pyro logs, error logs, or full log according to selected dates.
Press Read Logs for the logs to appears.
Press Clear to clear the screen of error logs.
Figure 6-14 Quick Settings - Logs
6-26
Software
Settings -Date & Time

From the Main Menu screen, press the Settings & Utilities button.
From the Settings & Utilities screen, Date & Time line, press Set.
Use the date and time window to set the date and time.
The time can be set to either 24h or AM/PM format.
After setting the date and time, press OK.
Figure 6-15 Set Date & Time
Settings -MMCU Verbosity Level

This indicator is for informative reference only. The MMCU Verbosity
Level performs a sampling of the MAIN and SAFE pyros. The settings
available are Level 1, 2, and 3.
Maximum log verbosity gives us the ability to get the following

information:
-Verbose 3: energy and pyro data per brick
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-27

-Verbose 2: the status of the machine: all the components are reporting
their status in 1 second resolution, and this is written to the verbose 2
log.
This may help us identify when a problem arises, and the status of the
machine at that time.
When you select verbose3, it also generates verbose2 data. (The

opposite is not true).
Updates - Licenses
Figure 6-16 Settings and Utilities – Updates Expander
Installed license screen. Type/part number/ serial number changes

according to machine data (in case license allows other fibers, you will
see a line for this too.
Update license (HASP) popup. After OK, either confirmation popup

will be shown, or failure message.
6-28
Software
Figure 6-17 View Installed Licenses
Updates - Firmware Update

The Pulse 120H software is capable of performing a burn of all the
embedded boards, in order to upgrade (or downgrade) the installed
firmware. For a detailed description of how to burn the firmware, see
‘’ on page 6-126.
Figure 6-18 System Update Operations
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-29

Import/Export Operations - Export Data to USB

The system error log history and all the system parameters and
calibration data can be downloaded, or “exported” to a USB. This is
useful for diagnostics and investigation.
Figure 6-19 Export Data Screen
Exporting the Error Log

To export the error log from the system to memory stick:
1. Insert memory stick into the USB port.

2. In Service mode, go to the Setting & Utilities screen, press Import/
Export Operations.
3. Press Export Period: Select one of the following error log history
periods (recommended to select One Month):
• All
• One Month
• One Week
• One Day
6-30
Software
When export is complete, the message “Export operation completed

successfully” appears. Remove the memory stick.
Figure 6-20 Import/Export Operations
Exporting the Calibration Data

Before replacing the LPU/hard disk, the calibration data must be
exported and stored on a memory stick; otherwise the data will be lost.
To export the calibration data:
1. Insert the service HASP into the USB port at the back of the system
(or the USB port on the LPU).
2. Turn on the system and go the Service main screen.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-31

3. From the menu, select Settings & Utilities.
Figure 6-22 Setting and Utilities
4. In the Settings & Utilities screen, press Import/Export Operations.
6-32
Software
Figure 6-23 Import/Export Operations Screen
5. Press Import/Export Operations.

6. The following prompt appears (see Figure 6-24); press OK. The
data is exported and the message “Export Operation Completed
Successfully” appears.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-33

Figure 6-24 Export Calibration Data
Note
The exported calibration data can be viewed on an external laptop
by navigating to the folder Lumenis/CalibrationResults.
The following data is exported:
• Aiming Beam Calibration

• Machine Serial Number
• Mirror Motor Data
• Potentiometer Data
6-34
Software
Importing the Calibration Data

After replacing the LPU/hard disk, the stored calibration data can be
imported back to the system.
To import the calibration data:
1. In the Settings & Utilities screen, press Import/Export Operations
Figure 6-25 Import/Export Operations
2. Press Import; the following prompt appears (see Figure 6-26); press
OK.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-35

Figure 6-26 Import Calibration Data
3. Import the aiming beam data which will be updated in the

machine’s disk:
• Press Import: the aiming beam data is copied.
• Press Cancel: data will NOT be copied; proceed to the next
step.
• Cancel operation: all copy operations are undo, no copy is
made, operation ends.
Figure 6-27 Aiming Beam Data
4. When the import completes, the following screen appears; press

OK.
6-36
Software
Figure 6-28 Import Calibration Data Completed Window
5. Import the Potentiometer data which will be updated in the

machine’s disk:
• Press Import: the potentiometer data is copied.
step.
Figure 6-29 Potentiometer Data Import

OK.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-37

7. Import the mirror motor data which will be updated in the

machine’s disk:
• Press Import: the mirror motor data is copied.
step.
Figure 6-31 Mirror Motor Data Import

OK.
6-38
Software
9. Shutdown the system via the screen.

10. Turn off the system, turn the system back on, and verify proper
system operation.
6.5.4 Service States

The following service states are possible on the system.
SERVICE STANDBY state

The safety shutter behaves upon user request (closed, opened, normal);
In this state, the laser will not fire if the footswitch is pressed.
In this state, GUI is enabled and also service screens navigation.
SERVICE READY state

The safety shutter is upon user request (closed, opened, normal);
The laser will fire if the footswitch is pressed.
In this state, the GUI is enabled, no screen navigation is allowed in this

mode.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-39

SERVICE FIRE state

The safety shutter is upon user request (closed, opened, normal).
Lasing is started when the footswitch is pressed (continuous or counted

mode).
No energy/temperature correction algorithm and no warm-up pulses.
Lasing is stopped when the number of requested pulses delivered

(counted mode) is reached or the footswitch released (continuous
mode).
In this state, GUI is disabled.
During lasing a special lasing sound is heard to indicated lasing. The

volume can be controlled from “External IND” service application
screen.
6-40
Software
6.5.5 Service Main Screen

When accessing the service mode, the main screen appears, displaying
the following software information:
• System Version
• LPU System software version
• Controller (MMCU) SW version
• Main Board FPGA SW versions
• HV PMCU SW Version
• HV Board FPGA SW Version
• Mirror Motor SW Version
• Chiller SW Version
• Technician Override: Indicates when in Service Mode:
Green = service button pressed; Red = Service button not pressed
• Technician HASP detection
Green= HASP connected; Red = HASP not connected
Figure 6-33 Main Service Screen
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-41

6.5.6 Self Test Screens

The self test screen allows the FSE to initiate the running of system
functions with or without lasing, and to select either individual tests to
perform, or an automatic execution of running all tests.
Figure 6-34 Self Test Options
Note
Before Self Test, make sure the system is in STANDBY (see Figure
6-46.
A From the Main Screen, Select Self Test to enter the Self Test screen.
6-42
Software
B 1 Press Run All Tests to run all tests with lasing.
2 Press Run Tests No Laser to run all tests without lasing
3 Press Select Tests to select individual Tests to be run
C 1 Press Run Selected Tests to execute the tests on the items

selected in the checkboxes
2 Press Unselect All Tests to clear all the checkboxes
3 Press All Tests to run all the Tests
4 Press the checkboxes to select the individual tests to be run
D Selected Tests running and status in progress.
When the self test completes, the following screen appears; press OK.
Figure 6-35 Self Test Completed Window
6.6 Sub-Systems Screen

Each sub-system has a separate screen which enables operation of the
sub-system and viewing all its statuses. The sub-system screens
include:
• Switching Module (SWM)

• Charger
• Cooling subsystem
• Laser Deck
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-43

• External Indicators
• LVPS
• Suction Control
6.6.1 Additional Self Test

The Cooling system, Switching (SWM) and Charger sub-systems test
can be run one after the other, in the following specific order:
Cooling:
1. Turn on Pump; verify that flow switch is working (LED green)
2. Wait a few seconds Turn on Chiller; verify that the chiller status is
OK (LED green).
SWM
1. Turn on each (or all) bricks in order, and then turn on SWM safety.
2. Verify that each brick and safety is working (LED green).
Charger
1. Set the capacitors to 800V and then press Set.
2. Press ON; verify that the charger status are OK (LED green).
The following sections describe the main functions of the various sub-
systems service screens.
6.6.2 Switching Module (SWM)

The elements in the Switching (SWM) service screen display physical
measurements that are being monitored by the controller.
Enable / Disable simmer for 1-4 bricks
6-44
Software
1 2 3 4
Figure 6-36 Service Screen-Switching Module
1 Enable/Disable Simmer On/Off (Bricks 1-4)

Green = Simmer ON, Red = simmer OFF
2 SWM 24V signal from LVPS
Green = 24V OK, Red = 24V Not OK
3 Get SWM (IGBT) leakage status OK/Not OK (status of Bricks 1-4)
Green = pass, Red = fail
4 Get Brick Over temperature status (status of Bricks 1-4)
5 When the capacitor is charged to 800V, and the Safety is ON,
the LED indicator changes to Red. When the capacitor is discharged,
the LED indicator changes to green.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-45

6.6.3 Charger Screen

• Charge Capacitor bank to 400-800V, set capacitors voltage
• Dump capacitor bank to 0-400V
• Get capacitors voltage 0-800V
• Get capacitors balance status pass/fail
• Get charge/discharge status pass/fail (general charger status)
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 6-37 Charger Screen
1 Set capacitor charger 400-800V

2 ON = Charge, OFF = Discharge capacitors
3 Results status
4 Value should be equal to the above results status [3]
5 Value should be 1/2 of the results status [3]
6 Charger On: 810 V
• Charger = Green [Charger Done Status]
Charger Off: less than 24V
• Charger = Red [Charger Done Status]
It takes approximately 10 seconds for the capacitors to discharge.
7 Charger Done: green = fully charged; red= fully discharged
6-46
Software
8 Dump = Red: [Dump Done Status] indicates capacitor fully charged

Dump = Green [Dump Done Status] indicates capacitor fully dumped.
Figure 6-38 illustrates status indicators when dump is fully
discharged.
Figure 6-38 Dump Fully Discharged
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-47

6.6.4 Cooling Screen
4 6 7
1
Figure 6-39 Cooling Screen
1 Set Pump On/Off
2 Set Chiller On/Off, (Set after setting the pump)
3 Status of cooling system: water temperature, flow, conductivity, Ambient

Temperature, Ambient Humidity (from sensor located in optical bench), and dew
point (working range must be lower than the Water Temperature [4] in order to
minimize condensation on the optical components).
Water conductivity warning low level is set to 250 kOhm. It is recommended to

maintain a level of more than 1500 kOhm in order to maintain brick quality.
The system calculates the ambient temp and ambient humidity, resulting in the
dew point value.
4 If the Dew point temperature is below 17°C, set the water temperature to 17°C.
Status of Chiller: Active/Not active, Communication from MMCU for compressor,

condensor, Fans, Freezing
5 Make sure that the dew point is always less than the Chiller Set temperature.
6 If the Dew point temperature is above 17°C and below 20°C, set the water
temperature to 20°C.
7 If the Dew point temperature is above 20°C, set the water temperature to 25°C.
6-48
Software
6.6.5 Laser Deck Screen - Shutter Tab

This screen
• Shutter Test
• Attenuator Test
• Servo Motor Test
• Enable aiming beam settings: ON/Off, Blink and Set Intensity level.
• Fiber connection status
• Blast Shield status
Figure 6-40 Laser Deck Screen - Shutter Test
1 Check shutter control On/Off
2 Check attenuator control On/Off
3 Check service attenuator control On/Off - used when performing far alignment.
Green = IN, attenuator in place. RED = OUT, attenuator not in place
4 Statuses of laser shutter, blast shields, safety, fiber connected
5 Fiber Connected status (must been green, regardless if the fiber is connected or
not)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-49

6.6.6 Laser Deck Screen - Aiming Beam Test
Figure 6-41 Laser Deck Screen - Aiming Beam Test
1 Use the slider to select aiming beam intensity level, blink
6-50
Software
6.6.7 Laser Deck Screen - Servo Motor Test
Figure 6-42 Laser Deck Screen - Servo Motor Test
1 Mirror Motor init status:

2 Press to move motor to selected brick (1-4). Every brick has its own
angle value (analog)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-51

6.6.8 External Indicators Screen

This screen checks the functionality of the following:
• Lasing LED
• Footswitch connection
• Interlock status
• Keyswitch test
• Laser stop switch
.
Figure 6-43 External Indicators Screen
6-52
Software
6.6.9 LVPS Screen

This screen reads and displays low voltage values for MMCU and
PMCU control boards, FPGAs and Low voltages to all system
functional components as are monitored by the software.
3
1
Figure 6-44 LVPS Screen
1 Main Board LV (MMCU):
DC/DC voltage (1.2V, 3.3V, 5V)

Low Voltage going from LVPS (24V IN)
2 Mirror Motor:
DC/DC voltage (3.3V, 5V, 12V)

Low Voltage going from LVPS (24V IN)
3 HV Board LV
2.5V OUT
24V IN
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-53

6.6.10 Suction Control Screen

This screen checks the functionality of the suction.
Figure 6-45 Suction Control Screen
Override Potentiometer: there is an option to control suction intensity

from the GUI instead of the POT hardware (not simultaneously). By
selecting the checkbox, the suction intensity control is moved to the
GUI. By deselecting the checkbox, suction intensity control is moved
back to being controlled by the potentiometer hardware.
6-54
Software
6.7 Lasing Control Screens

The lasing screens checks the functionality of the laser bricks (either 1
or 2 or 3 or 4 separately or all together) in an open or closed loop.
It also checks the MAIN and SAFE functionality of the Pyro.
Lasing Control - Open Loop (see Figure 6-46)
Lasing Control - Closed Loop (back to User Mode, see Figure 6-49)
Figure 6-46 Lasing Control - Open Loop
1 Energy Per Pulse
2 Repetition Rate
3 Pyro Readings
4 Select Continuous lasing or number of pulses
5 Turn ON/OFF main shutter
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-55

The screen in Figure 6-47 shows the Lasing Control screen from SW
V1.0.5.4, which contains menu tabs at the top of the screen to navigate
to any of the other diagnostic screens without having to go back to the
main service screen.
Figure 6-47 Lasing Control - Open Loop (V1.0.5.4)
Press READY to enable lasing. When in READY state, the other

components of the screen are “frozen” (disabled). A lasing danger icon
appears on the screen.
6-56
Software
Figure 6-48 Lasing Control -Screen Ready State
After performing checks in open loop, go to Closed Loop and perform

calibrations, go to Closed loop (user mode) and check with the long test
fiber, according to the table (cal screen).
For 120W Configuration
Pulse Pulse Rate Hz Acceptance Range Results

Energy [W]
0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
1 40 36-44
2 60 108 - 132
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-57

For 100W Configuration
Pulse Pulse Rate Hz Acceptance Range Results

Energy [W]
0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
1.0 10 9 - 11
2.0 10 18 - 22
3.0 20 54 - 66
4.0 20 72 - 88
5.0 20 90 - 110
Figure 6-49 Closed Loop, Left and Right Pedal Lasing
6-58
Software
6.7.1 Calibration Screen-Holmium Laser Cal

This screen supports the following functionalities:
• Pyros calibration using an external power meter. The software

enables automatic calibration (with power meter connected to the
system) to set the desired value to be read from the external power
meter (according to treatment parameters set to the brick) and start
the pyro calibration process. In addition, the software enables
manual calibration (digital potentiometers are used), by enabling the
FSE to modify potentiometer values from the service screen.
• Attenuator calibration - measures the optical transmission of the
low-energy attenuator at each wavelength in use. Displays LE
transmission values for each available wavelength.
• Aiming beam intensity calibration - calibrates a three middle
intensity levels of aiming beam from a total of 5 existing levels, the
first one is always OFF (0% duty cycle) and the last is maximum
(100% duty Cycle).
• Calibration can be executed for every pulse width: High, Medium
and Low (550V/660V/800V). Calibrate executes a specific pulse
width, and Calibrate All executes calibration for all pulse widths.
The results of the calibration are displayed graphically.
Note
System must be in READY mode before any calibration.
Note
Check the calibration results in table 2, Low.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-59

Figure 6-50 Laser Calibration Screen
Laser Bricks Calibration Screen

In system calibration, the system fires each laser rod at two specified
pump energies, measures the laser pulse energy at each pump energy,
and calculates the relation between pulse energy and pump energy for
each rod.
In order to determine what pumped energy is required for lasing in

specific pulse energy, every time the system is turned on – the system
performs calibration.
The calibration is done at 5Hz in the following routine:
Select the Low (short pulse) tab and press Calibrate.
The pump energy changes from ~25J to ~160J and the pyro detects the
pulse energy in each pump energy for each brick.
The system displays the resulting graph of pumped energy as a function

of pulse energy of each brick.
Then, a calculation is done and the result of this is:
Epump = A x Epulse + B
6-60
Software
With the coefficients, we can determine the pumped energy needed for
getting a specific pulse energy.
After completing the above, if the system is in Service mode, it will

perform all necessary functions, including safety tests, that are required
to operate normally in User mode.
The screen displays the calibration results and calibration plots (4

graphs). This function allows viewing of graphs of pumped energy (or
current) vs. pulse energy for each laser individually, or for all lasers.
The graphs for the individual lasers also show the limits allowed for the
calibrations coefficients.If the value of the pump energy is above these
values, the system will go to Case Saver mode.
After calibration is performed, the result must be as follows:
Energy (J) Graph Results

0.5 <35.5
2 <70
3.5 <100
6 <151
Figure 6-51 illustrates a sample screen with graph showing good

performance.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-61

Figure 6-51 Calibration Screen-Holmium Laser Cal
The A and B values are indications of lamp aging. The values below
show the upper limits of lamp aging. If the pump energy is above these
values the system will display a notification and go to CaseSaver mode.
In this case, it is recommended to replace the flashamp.
Value Aging Upper

Limits
A 21
B 25
For System from Series 045 and newer:
Value Aging Upper

Limits
A 21
B 31
6-62
Software
Laser Calibration
Note
Before performing laser calibration, make sure that the system is in
Ready mode (via the Lasing Control screen).
Figure 6-52 Ready Mode, Lasing Control Screen
Press the Calibrate button (a long press) and wait for a beep to be
heard; the system executes the automatic laser calibration; the progress
of the calibration appears in the status log. When calibration is
complete, the message “Calibration Passed” appears. Calibration takes
approximately 10 seconds. After calibration, the system goes to
Standby.
To view calibration results, press View Calibration results; the data

appears in the Result Window.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-63

6.7.2 Calibration Screen-Holmium Attenuator Cal

Automatic calibration of attenuator software. Press Calibrate to
execute.
.
Figure 6-53 Calibration Screen-Holmium Attenuator Cal

.
6-64
Software
6.7.3 Calibration Screen-Aiming Beam Calibration
Note
When pressing any of the purple-colored buttons on the screen, hold
the button down for three seconds and then release in order to
ensure its activation.
The calibration is performed using and external power meter calibrated

to 532 nm.
Move the slider to adjust the aiming beam intensity:
0 = aiming beam intensity OFF
If the aiming beam intensity of the next level is not higher than the
previous level, reset levels 1, 2, and 3 and press Save Values.
.
Figure 6-54 Calibration Screen-Aiming Beam Cal
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-65

6.7.4 Calibration Screen-Potentiometer Cal

.
Figure 6-55 Calibration Screen-Potentiometer Cal
1 MainPyroGain/SafetyPyroGain (4V/6W) Measured via oscilloscope
2 Safety Pyro Main Integrator (10Hz/10W = 1J)
3 Results of Main and Safe calculation (#2); value should be equal.
4 Press Save to save the calculated values
6-66
Software
6.7.5 Calibration Screen-Servo Motor Cal

The servo positioning mirror is used to multiplex the four separate
YAG beams into a single beam path.
See ‘Optical Transmission Adjustment’ on page 7-23.

.
Figure 6-56 Calibration Screen-Servo Motor Cal
Move motor to brick - the servo mirror moves to reflect the laser to the
brick indicated on the screen.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-67

6.7.6 Servo Motor Calibration Screen

This screen displays the servo parameters used in production, in order
to calibrate the servo motor. This is done only in case of Error 169
(Mirror motor not in place).
Figure 6-57 Servo Motor Calibration - Calibrations Tab
For more information, refer to ‘Servo Mirror Calibration’ on page 7-

33.
6.7.7 Servo Auto-Tune Procedure

This procedure is performed only from software V 1.0.6.6 and newer
with Image V1.7.
This procedure executes calibration of the servo motor.
1. Turn on the machine with HASP and go to Service mode.

2. Open the Calibration | Servo Motor Calibration screen, Parameters
tab.
6-68
Software
3. Select the ‘Use Auto Tune’ checkbox.
Figure 6-58 Auto Tune Checkbox
4. Press ‘Set’.
5. Press ‘Save’.
6. Press OK.
7. Perform Self test – Run All Tests.
8. Open the Calibration/Servo Motor Calibration/Parameters
window. Be sure you see the “Parameters Calculated by Mirror
Motor’ line.
9. Open the Lasing Control window.
10. Set the system for open loop with frequency 85-90 Hz and energy
10J (minimal energy) – this confirms that the found AFF value is a
stable value.
11. Press READY and press the footswitch to fire the laser for 1 full
minute. Verify that there are no errors.
12. Open the Calibration/Servo Motor Calibration/Parameters window.
Be sure you see the “Parameters Calculated by Mirror Motor’ line.
Figure 6-59 Parameter Calculated by Mirror Motor
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-69

13. Deselect the ‘Use Auto Tune’ checkbox (checkbox empty).
Figure 6-60 Deselect Auto Tune
14. Press SET.

15. Press SAVE.
16. Press OK.
17. Turn off the machine.
18. Turn on the system in User mode; select 80Hz, 0.2J (short pulse),
fire the laser for 1 full minute. verify that there is no error.
6.7.8 SIS Screen

The SIS screen is accessed via the main Service screen and displays
information regarding the SIS fiber. The screen is divided into two
areas:
• Fiber Production Data

• Fiber Use Data
This screen displays the SIS tag content and its data fields.
6-70
Software
Figure 6-61 SIS Screen
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-71

6.7.9 System Configuration Screen

This screen allows the CE to reset the total energy and total pulses of
each brick in cases where the brick or flashlamp is replaced.
1. Go to the System Configuration screen.
Figure 6-62 System Configuration Screen (120W Configuration)
2. Open the System Counters line.

3. Press Reset (long press) for the relevant Brick.
Figure 6-63 System Configuration Screen - System Counters
6-72
Software
6.8 Software Upgrade (LPU and

Embedded) to V2.0.1.7
The Pulse 120H system software is capable of performing a burn of all
the embedded boards, in order to upgrade (or downgrade) the installed
firmware.
6.8.1 Image, LPU, and Embedded Update
Tools Needed
• Memory Stick (Disk-on-Key) at least 8 GB
• Service HASP, which will allows the running of the Pulse 120H
Service application.
• External power meter
• Software version needed for the installation. (Software is supplied by
Lumenis via link or via Partner Zone portal, which must be copied to
the root of a Disk On Key - USB)*.
Note
*It is NOT recommended to use a USB hub; doing so may cause
problems during the download and installation.
Instead of downloading, the software package can be ordered

in 2 formats – memory stick or hard disk as follows:
• Memory stick: SP-0002017 P120 V2 SW /W IMAGE 1.7.4

package on USB memory stick
• Hard disk: SPEL-1005419 - SPEL-1005419 P120 V2 SW /
W IMAGE 1.7.4 package (hard Disk). (This part can only
be used for any future hard disk failures instead of using
the LPU/hard disk kit).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-73

Software Package Setup

To set up the software package:
1. In the Partner Zone portal partnerzone.lumenis.com, navigate to the

Software & Upgrades section of Pulse120H.
Figure 6-64 Partner Zone, Pulse120H Section
2. Click on each of the 2 links to download 2 parts of the software

package, (includes Image Update 1.7):
• Pulse120H 2.0.1.7. Part 1
• Pulse120H 2.0.1.7. Part 2
Note
If you are performing the upgrade without Image 1.7, click the link to
download the file Pulse120 V2.0.1.7. no image.
3. Unzip each Zip file (Part 1 and Part 2) to the root of a (8GB)
memory stick (press “Extract Here” when unzipping).
6-74
Software
The figure below illustrates the files and/or folders of the software
package and the way they should appear in the root of the memory
stick:
Figure 6-65 Folders of Software Package
The table below lists the folders and files and for which part of the
upgrade they are used:
For Image Update Procedure • 1 wim file: Win_1_7_4.wim

1 • 1 ZIP file (do not unzip): Win_1_7_4
• 1 folder: ImageUpdate
1For Chiller Update: • 1 folder: Chiller installer

2
(*Optional, use as needed)
3 LPU Installer • 1 folder: Pulse120HInstaller
4 For Embedded SW Installation • 1 folder: Lumenis
5 For LPU Utilities: • 1 folder: LPU Utilities
For Troubleshooting only: (see • 1 folder: BootLoaderSolution

‘Other troubleshooting issues
6
– Boot Loader Issue’ on
page 6-95)
For Image CRC Validator • file: ImageUpdateCrcValidator
7 • 1 folder: Lumenis Version Crc
• 1 folder: CrcChecker
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-75

Note
To ensure that all the files have been downloaded properly, use the
CRC Validator to verify all the files are existing. Refer to ‘CRC
Validator’ on page 6-76.
The Pulse 120H system software is capable of performing a burn of all

the embedded boards, in order to upgrade (or downgrade) the installed
firmware.
The procedure is divided into 5 sections:
1. ‘Image Update’ on page 6-81

2. ‘LPU Software Update’ on page 6-98
3. ‘Embedded Firmware Update’ on page 6-104
4. ‘Post Installation Steps’ on page 6-120
5. ‘HASP Authorization for the system with New LPU/Hard Disk’ on
page 6-123
*The files for Sections 1, 2, and 3 (as above) should be downloaded,

unzipped, and copied to the root of a USB memory stick (at least 8
GB).
6.8.2 CRC Validator

This software package checks and validates that all the files needed for
the Image Update have been downloaded correctly, are complete and
accurate. After the validation is successfully completed, the Image
Update and the rest of the software upgrade can be performed.
This Image Update CRC Validator package can be downloaded from

the Partner Zone Portal as a Zip file. Instructions for using the validator
is detailed below.
Procedure
1. Download the Zip file ImageUpdateCrcValidator.ZIP from the

Partner Zone Portal, Pulse 120H section.
6-76
Software
Figure 6-66 Download CRC Validator ZIP from Partner Zone
2. Unzip the package and place the 2 elements (2 folders and a file) in
the root folder of the USB key of the Pulse120H upgrade with
Image Update to be used.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-77

3. Your USB key root folder should contain the following:
Figure 6-67 Validator Folders in Root of USB
Note
For this test, you must also include the image update folder as seen
above. Otherwise, an error will be received.
4. In your PC (or in the Pulse120H system – doesn't matter), run

(double-click or press <Enter>): ImageUpdateCrcValidator.cmd
5. The application starts to check the files; this should take ~40
seconds to complete (depending on the USB key speed, times may
vary). You will see a progress bar, displaying the CRC check
progress:
6-78
Software
Figure 6-68 Performing CRC Check
6. When completed, you should receive an OK message:
Figure 6-69 CRC Good Message
7. If a problem occurs, you will receive the following error message:
Figure 6-70 CRC Error Message
8. If you receive the above error message, this indicates that there is a
problem in the download. Please try again to download the "part 2"
package (the smaller one) from Partner Zone, and rerun the test.
9. If the error is still received, contact GSO to receive the software
package on Disk-on-Key.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-79

10. If you receive the 'OK' message, continue to the image update
procedure.
Note
To emphasize, the crucial part in the image update procedure is as
follows:
11. After you perform the 'create_dual_boot' sequence, if you don't

receive the screen exactly as shown below, do not continue the
procedure, go to ‘Troubleshooting Image Update’ on page 6-93.
• Line 1: making updates…
• Line 2: 115 File(s) copied - please note that this should be the
exact number. Anything else please go to troubleshooting
• Line 3: 1 File(s) copied)
Figure 6-71 Create Dual Boot Sequence Correct
6-80
Software
6.8.3 Image Update

The new Image Update 1.7.4 can be done on systems from series 002 -
019. Systems with series number 020 already have this image update
installed in production.
Estimated time to complete: 30 minutes
Tools Required:
• A valid Service HASP

• Disk-on-key (memory stick) with the following copied to the root
folder of the DOK):
• Update file: Win_1_7_4.wim
• Zip file: Win_1_7_4.zip
• folder "Image Update"
Figure 6-72 Download Image Update Files
1. Verify the Lumenis Image Version:

a. Turn on the system.
b. Press 'Log Off' in the start dialog.
c. Make sure that your service HASP is plugged in, and Login as
'Service User' (password: Lumenis1234).
d. Verify the older image version in the upper right hand corner
of the screen (1.6.0 or 1.7); Image version name: W7E32.1.7.
(The numbers after ‘W7E32' are the version number).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-81

Figure 6-73 Image Version Name
2. Open Windows Explorer. (If the Start toolbar is hidden, press the
lower left hand corner of the screen.)
3. Navigate to E:\ drive and double-click to open the ImageUpdate
folder.
6-82
Software
Figure 6-74 Image Update Folder
4. Run (double-click) the 'create_dual_boot.cmd' file.
Figure 6-75 Create Dual Boot CMD file
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-83

5. The following screen appears (run time is a couple of minutes).
Note
Verify that “115 File(s) copied” appears in the window above. If the
message is different or “Sharing Violation” appears (see Figure
below), please go to ‘Other troubleshooting issues – Boot Loader
Issue’ on page 6-95.
Figure 6-76 Run CMD File
6. When the process is complete, press the blue window bar and then
press any key (using the on-screen keyboard hidden on the left side
of the screen) to close this screen.
7. Open the folder: D:\Program files\Lumenis and run (double click)
the following file: SwitchToWinPE.
6-84
Software
Figure 6-77 SwitchToWinPE
8. The following screen opens:
Figure 6-78 SwitchToWinPE [2]
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-85

9. Press Y (using the on-screen keyboard hidden on the left side of the
screen) and then press Enter. Windows will restart, and the
following screen appears.
Figure 6-79 Press Y
10. The Windows Update runs automatically after waiting 15 seconds).

11. You will see the following screens:
Figure 6-80 Windows Update Run
6-86
Software
12. After loading the following screen opens:
Figure 6-81 Windows Update Utility
13. The highlighted number is the image version which is about to be

loaded.
Note
Refer to the troubleshooting section‘Troubleshooting Image
Update’ on page 6-93 if the box does not contain any version, or
contains the wrong version.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-87

14. Press Start in order to start the update process. The operation
executes with a progress bar, the estimated time to complete the
operation. (Note that this is estimation ONLY, actual time may be
longer).
Figure 6-82 Update Process
15. When the operation completes, the following screen appears.
Figure 6-83 image Update Success
16. Press OK. The system restarts, and loads the Windows normally.
6-88
Software
Note
If windows does not load normally, refer to the ‘Troubleshooting
Image Update’ on page 6-93).
17. Go back into Service User (password Lumenis1234) and verify

that the image version appearing on screen is has been changed to
W7E32.1.7.4.
Figure 6-84 Image Version Verification
Note
Important note: If you don't see the Lumenis logo with the image
version in the upper corner of the screen, do the following: Open
D:\Program files\Lumenis, and run LogOffCommand.exe. The
system will then log off. Log in again as service user; you should now
see a normal desktop with the current Image 1.7.4.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-89

6.9 Image Update-Systems with New

Service Shell
For details on the screen of the new service shell, see Section 6.11 New
Shell Screens for Service.
Figure 6-85 New Service Shell
For this, a standard USB keyboard is required (can be a small USB

keyboard).
Refer to Technical Note TN-3200114 for instructions on downloading

and unzipping the Image files.
1. Connect the service HASP to the system.

2. Connect the flash drive with the image update software.
3. Power up the system and go to service mode (press Log Off, login
as service user, password Lumenis1234).
4. In the Image Update tab, press Step 1 Image Update on the
navigation pane. The following screen appears:
6-90
Software
Figure 6-86 Step 1 Image Update
5. Disconnect the service HASP, and connect the USB keyboard (the
flash drive and the keyboard are now connected).
6. After a couple of seconds, the following screen appears:
Figure 6-87 Press Any Key
7. On your keyboard, press any key. The Image update screen

reappears.
8. Press Step 1 Image Update again.
9. The dialog closes, and in the service user application, the Step 2
Image Update button appears; press Step 2 Image Update.
10. The following screen appears:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-91

Figure 6-88 Step 2 Image Update
11. Press ‘Y’ on your keyboard.

12. The system restarts, image update continues according to the last
TN-3200114. At this stage, you can disconnect the keyboard, since
it is no longer needed.
13. Connect the service HASP, disconnect the image HASP, and
connect the USB with the new software and continue as usual to
install the software (LPU and Embedded).
6-92
Software
Troubleshooting Image Update
1 No version appears The application did not find any

in the Lumenis Lumenis update file.
update screen
Press “Refresh USB” and see if
the problem is resolved. If not,
proceed as follows:
Verify that the following files are in

the root of the memory stick:
WIN_<Version>.wim, and
WIN_<Version>.zip).
Copy the files to the root of the

memory stick, connect the USB,
and press "Refresh USB". You
should now see the version
number in the new image version
line.
Proceed with the procedure

normally.
In case the line is still empty, try

another type of memory stick.
2 The line contains The memory stick contains
wrong image version several Lumenis update files, and
which is desired: the software selects the latest
update file. Click on the dropdown
list, and select the desired image
version. If the desired version is
not found, see solution #1.
3 System suffered Restart the system, and the

power down during following screen will appear:
update process, or
update procedure Please perform the 'windows
reported a problem, update' operation again, and
and did not complete press 'OK' in the complete
or Windows boot message.
manager screen
appears
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-93

4 Error #35 after all the If, after all the installations, the
installations are system is powers up, and error
finished) #35 appears in the status line,
perform the following:
1.Power down the system
2.Turn on the system, and select

"Log Off" option in the dialog.
3.Make sure that the service hasp

is attached, and login as service
user (password: Lumenis1234)
4.Insert the memory stick with the

LPU installation.
5.Navigate to the LPU installer

folder
(located in the installation folder of

the LPU on the memory stick).
6.Run (double click or press

<Enter>:
Log Server Install; a window

opens, and you will be required to
press any key. Press any key
using the wired keyboard.
7.The system restarts. Verify that

Error #35 does not appear.
6-94
Software
Other troubleshooting issues – Boot Loader Issue

Use this procedure if one of the three scenarios appear:
1. If you are trying to perform the Image Update utility, and you
receive a black screen after the "fish" image.
2. If you start the Image update procedure, and after you run the
"Create_dual_boot.cmd", instead of getting the picture shown in
Figure 6-89 you see a screen with sharing violation message:
Figure 6-89 Sharing Violation
3. If you power up the system, and every time, you get the "Windows
Boot Manager" screen:
Figure 6-90 Windows Boot Manager Screen
If one of the above happens, perform the procedure below:
1. Make sure that the "BootLoaderSolution" folder is in the root of the

memory stick:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-95

Figure 6-91 BootLoaderSolution
The content of this folder contains 2 files:
• SwitchToWinEmb.cmd
• SwitchToWinEmb.txt
Figure 6-92 Switch toWinEmb FOlders
2. Connect the memory stick with the BootLoaderSolution" folder to

the system.
3. Make sure Service Hasp is attached, and power up the system.
4. In the boot loader screen, select Windows Embedded standard to
run the windows:
6-96
Software
Figure 6-93 Windows Embedded Standard
5. After the windows login screen appears, login as service user

(Password: Lumenis1234).
6. Open Windows Explorer.
7. Navigate to the BootLoaderSolution folder located within the
memory stick.
8. Run (double-click) the following: SwitchToWinEmb.cmd
9. This operation takes couple of seconds, afterward you will see the
following screen:
Figure 6-94 Press Any Key to Continue
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-97

10. Press any key (via the on-screen keyboard) to continue.

11. Immediately after the key is pressed, the system automatically
performs a restart.
12. .The system now restarts with the Login screen.
If you want to perform the image update again, you can start the
process from the beginning.
6.9.1 LPU Software Update

Tools Required:
• Service HASP, which will allows the running of the Pulse 120H
Service application.
• Software version needed for the installation. Make sure that the
folder LPU installer 2.0.1.7 is copied to the root of the memory
stick.
Procedure:
1. Insert the Service HASP into the USB port at the back of the system
2. Insert the Disk-On-Key with the LPU software into the USB port
on the system.
3. Turn on the system. Press Logoff.
4. Press the Service User icon to login as Service User. The Service
User screen appears.
Figure 6-95 Service user Icon
6-98
Software
5. In the on-screen keyboard, enter the code Lumenis1234 (code is

case sensitive) and press Enter.
Figure 6-96 Enter Service User Password
6. Navigate to the Removable Disk drive.
Figure 6-97 Removable Disk Drive
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-99

7. Navigate to and open the Pulse120HInstaller folder.
Figure 6-98 Pulse120 Installer
8. Double-click the Pulse120HInstaller-Shortcut.
Figure 6-99 Pulse120 Installer- Shortcut
The Pulse 120H Installer window opens.
Figure 6-100 Installer Window
6-100
Software
9. Press Next.
10. Continue pressing Next until all the version files are copied and the
message “Copy Files Completed; Press Next to perform final
configuration” appears. Press Next to perform final configuration.
Figure 6-101 Pulse120 Installer- Press Next
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-101

11. The files are configured and the message “Installation completed
successfully!” appears. Make sure the service HASP is connected
and then press Next; the system restarts.
Figure 6-102 Copy Files, Copy Completed
6-102
Software
LPU SW Installation Troubleshooting

If after LPU installation the system restarts and you don't receive the
option to select log-off (you only see a blue screen) do the following:
1. Make sure that the service hasp is connected to the system. After
restart, log off (press logoff in the dialog), and login as service user.
2. Shut down the system using the power button in the front panel.
3. Connect a wired USB keyboard to the rear USB entry
4. Power up the system.
5. Immediately after the power up, continuously press both shift keys
and don't release them until you see the Windows login screen.
Figure 6-103 Press Both Shift Keys
6. Release both shifts when you see the login screen:
Figure 6-104 Login Screen
7. In this case, login as service user, and perform the LPU installation
again.
8. If after the second attempt you still get a blue screen, please call
Lumenis for further assistance.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-103

6.9.2 Embedded Firmware Update
Note
Perform the Embedded Firmware update only if the software version
indicated does not match the figure below:
Figure 6-105 Embedded Firmware Software Version
1. Insert the service HASP into the USB port at the back of the system
(or the USB port on the LPU).
2. Insert the Disk On Key (memory stick) with the copied firmware
files into another service USB port at the back of the system (or an
additional USB port on the LPU).
3. The window appears. Press Yes.
6-104
Software
Figure 6-106 System Mode - Press Yes
Note
Some errors or “no communication” messages may appear in
several lines of the status window of the screen. Ignore them and
continue with the upgrade.
4. From the menu, select Settings & Utilities.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-105

Figure 6-108 Setting & Utilities
5. In the Settings & Utilities screen, select Updates .
Figure 6-109 Updates Screen
6-106
Software
6. Press Firmware Update and wait about 1 minute.
Figure 6-110 Firmware Update
7. The following message appears.
Figure 6-111 Firmware Update Window
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-107

8. Press OK The following prompt appears, “Updating firmware

version 2.0.1.7. Proceed with the operation?” press OK.
Figure 6-112 Firmware Update Proceed Prompt
9. The following screen appears.
Figure 6-113 Firmware Update - Select Elements
6-108
Software
10. Press Update All Elements, or select the relevant elements to

update.
Figure 6-114 Update All Elements
11. The burn process runs, copying the files from the Disk On Key to
the local disk (older files will be overridden). The burn process
executes the cycle below:
a. Getting ready to burn
b. Burning
c. End of burn
d. Check CRC
12. A progress bar appears when the element is being burned. The
number displayed represents % of the burn process done. When the
burn process is completed a green checkmark is displayed.
Note
This process takes several minutes.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-109

Note
If one phase of the burn process does not execute successfully, or
did not begin as expected, perform the burning process separately
for each failed, unstarted, or uncompleted element.
Figure 6-115 Incomplete Burning Process
Figure 6-116 Sample, Process Completed
13. After firmware update is complete, shutdown the system from the
screen, and then turn off the system by pressing the On/Off button.
Note
Performing shutdown from the screen does not turn off the
embedded boards; the system needs to be turned OFF via the On/
Off button.
6-110
Software
Troubleshooting - Problems in the Burn Process

The following problems can occur in the burn process:
• The intended file is not found on the hard disk

• Timeout of some sort in the communication, or problem in the
internal embedded card process
• CRC check fail
File not found on local disk
The following message appears:
Figure 6-117 Burn Process Problems - File Not Found on Local

Disk
And in the version screen:
Figure 6-118 Burn Process Problems - Version Screen
This means that the requested file to burn is not on the disk. Shut down
the machine, and perform the flow again from the beginning. Also,
verify if the Disk On Key contains the files required.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-111

Timeout
There are several types of timeouts:
• timeout for the component element not completing the delete of its
memory
• timeout of data handshake when passing the update file’s data to the
embedded component
Timeout for not passing the CRC result
Figure 6-119 Burn Process Problems -Timeout
In all cases, the following steps to recover may help:
1. Re-run the update of the selected element.

2. If this doesn’t help, shut down the machine, and re-run the entire
burn process.
6-112
Software
CRC Fail
In the end of the data burn, the embedded element calculates CRC of
the process.
If this calculation is not equal to the CRC from the update file, the CRC
fail message is displayed.
Figure 6-120 Burn Process Problems -CRC Failed
Recovery from this error:
1. Re-run the update of the selected element.

2. If this doesn’t help, shut down the machine, and re-run the entire
burn process.
3. If the problem persists, it might indicate a problem in the burn file;
contact Lumenis for further assistance.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-113

Service Application starts with Firmware Update window
If after starting Service Application, the following window does not

appear after pressing OK from step 9 of Firmware Update:
Figure 6-121 Service Application Starts with Firmware Update
Do the following:
1. Shut Down the system using the main On/Off button.

2. Press Log Off.
3. Login as Service User (password Lumenis 1234).
4. Connect the USB memory stick with the Embedded software.
6-114
Software
5. Navigate and copy the folder Emb from the path

Lumenis\LumenisPulse\Version_x.x.x.x\Emb and copy it to
D:\TEMP\Lumenis\LumenisPulse.
Figure 6-122 Emb Folder
6. If you receive the message “this folder already exists”, press “Yes”
to override it.
7. After the folder is copied, shut down the system by pressing the On/
Off button.
8. Restart the system: simultaneously press the green On/Off button
and press the service button on the optical bench for at least 3
seconds.
Figure 6-123 Service Button on Optical Bench
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-115

The Firmware Update screen should appear. Proceed with the

Firmware update as usual.
If after starting Service Application, the following window appears:
Figure 6-124 Service Application - Firmware Update
Do the following:
1. Shut Down the system using the main On/Off button.

2. Press Log Off.
3. Login as Service User (password Lumenis 1234).
4. Connect the USB memory stick with the Embedded software.
5. Navigate and copy the folder Emb from the path
Lumenis\LumenisPulse\Version_x.x.x.x\Emb and copy it to
D:\TEMP\Lumenis\LumenisPulse\
6-116
Software
Figure 6-125 Emb Folder [2]
6. If you receive the message “this folder already exists”, press “Yes”
to override it.
7. After the folder is copied, shut down the system by pressing the On/
Off button.
8. Restart the system and go to Firmware Update screen again.
9. Select the required SW elements as shown below and press Update
Selected Elements button:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-117

Figure 6-126 Update Selected Elements
10. After running, you should receive a message that the burn was
successful:
Figure 6-127 Burn Successful
11. After this step, shut down the system, and restart it. The system
should now run normally.
6-118
Software
Firmware Update window starts with an error message
Figure 6-128
The system detected that the update files are corrupted, and will restart.
Next startup should load the service application normally. Run the
firmware update process again.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-119

6.9.3 Post Installation Steps

Version V2.0.1.7
a. System Version: 2.0.1.7

b. LPU SW version 2.0.1602.11
c. MMCU SW version 2.0.1.6
d. MMCU FPGA SW version 1.0.1.57
e. HV PMCU SW version 1.0.1.30
f. HV PMCU FPGA SW version 1.0.1.43
g. Mirror motor SW version 1.1.3.12
h. Chiller SW version 3.11
Figure 6-129 Post Installation Version Verification
6-120
Software
1. In the Settings & Utilities screen, Settings expander section, set the
Verbosity Level to 3.
Figure 6-130 Verbosity Level 3
2. For systems up to and including series number 12: In the Bricks

Configuration Screen, select/verify that all the bricks have
“normal” type selected. After selecting “Normal”, press “Save
configuration” and restart the system.
\
Figure 6-131 Bricks Configuration
Note
For systems from 020 set the Brick Type to “Type 2”, press Save
Configuration and restart the system. (Otherwise the system will
display an error).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-121

3. Go to Self-Test screen and press Run All Tests.

4. Turn the system off, restart the system in User mode, set up the
external power meter, connect a long SIS test fiber, and perform the
power meter checks as explained in Chapter 4 of the service
manual.
5. Fill out the installation report in the Service Max application.
6-122
Software
6.9.4 HASP Authorization for the system with New

LPU/Hard Disk
This procedure must be done after replacing the LPU and hard disk.
Each machine includes its own unique HASP. The creation of this
HASP is done via the EMS web service.
• In the EMS, the serial number is burned into the HASP.

• The HASP includes licensing info, as well as part number and
serial number.
In order to prepare the system for the HASP, a new tool must run:
“SerialNumberGenerator”, which will create the needed data for the
system to operate with the HASP.
To run the Serial Number Generator tool, do the following:
1. Make sure that the service HASP is inserted and turn on the system.
2. While the system is booting up, the message “Technician HASP is
Detected” screen appears. Press Logoff.
Figure 6-132 Log Off Screen
3. Login as Service User. The Service User screen appears.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-123

Figure 6-133 Service User Screen
4. In the on-screen keyboard, enter the code Lumenis1234. (Code is

case sensitive) and press Enter.
5. Open Windows Explorer, and run the tool from the path
D:\Programfiles\Lumenis\LumenisPulse\Common_bin\Release\Seria
lNumbergenerator.EXE.
Figure 6-134 Serial Number Generator.EXE
6. Refer to Figure 6-135: Press Go. When finished, the message

“Operation Completed successfully” appears. Press Exit to exit the
tool.
6-124
Software
Figure 6-135 Serial Number Generator
Note
If an error occurs, an alert messages appears.
7. At the end of the procedure, restart the system and verify that:
• the HASP is valid for the system on which it is running.
• the license itself matches the system.
Note
If the system is 100W 50Hz, but does not have the correct license,
an error will be generated.
6.9.5 Installation Verification

1. Insert service HASP key and turn the system on.
2. In Service mode Utilities screen, verify the following:
• Service application start-up phase is ok
• No errors are received during this step.
• Verify that the LPU version, the Embedded versions and the
software version which appear in the start screen is exactly as
defined in the software release notes.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-125

Figure 6-136 Verify Software Version
3. Run the self-test to verify the self-test is ready.

4. Power down the machine, and run it in user mode, to verify full
user start-up flow is OK.
6-126
Software
6.10 Chiller Firmware Update

This section describes how to update the chiller firmware in 2 ways:
• Automatic installation (default method)

• Manual Installation (to be done in cases where the installation is not
completing as expected. If, for some reason, the automatic installa-
tion is not working, and the chiller version in the Pulse120H shows
0.0, please switch to ‘Manual chiller Firmware update Procedure
steps:’ on page 6-131. If problems persists and 0.0 is still appearing,
perform the troubleshooting activities o‘Troubleshooting Chiller
Update Errors’ on page 6-136.
Note
For this procedure, a standard Ethernet cable is required.
1. Turn off the system.

2. Open the left and right side system covers according to the service
manual.
3. Open the LPU module cover according to the service manual.
4. Disconnect the right Ethernet connector of the LPU and in its place
connect one end of the internet communication cable. Do not touch
the left cable going to the MMCU.
Figure 6-137 Connect Ethernet
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-127

5. Take the other end of the Ethernet cable and connect it to the
chiller’s controller on the other side of the system. (Route the cable
over the system from one side to the other).
Figure 6-138 Connect Ethernet [2]
Note
You can alternately connect the Ethernet cable as follows: connect
one end to the chiller controller and the other end to the Ethernet port
at the service panel. In this case, you have to open only the left side
panel of the system.
Figure 6-139 Connect Ethernet [3]
Automatic chiller firmware update Procedure steps:

1. Turn on the system.
2. Press 'logoff' in the start dialog
3. Make sure that your service hasp is plugged in, and Login as
6-128
Software
4. Run the chiller firmware update:

• Insert the USB key with the chiller installer folder.
• Navigate to the Chiller installer folder.
• Run the "Lumenis chiller firmware update.exe - Automatic"
program.
5. The application will automatically install all the needed

components; when completed, the chiller will emit a “click” sound
and will perform shutdown to the system at the end of this process -
automatically.
6. Go to Service Mode to verify that the chiller version is V3.11, and
not 0.0. If the version is 0.0, perform the manual install (‘Manual
chiller Firmware update Procedure steps:’ on page 6-131).
DO NOT TOUCH the touch screen; this may interfere with the
installation.
The following screen will appear, with progress bar, which displays the
progress of the install:
Figure 6-140 Chiller Install - Progress Bar
(This is an example– during the installation the background is constant,

and you will see windows opening and closing).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-129

Special cases:
• If the communications cable is not connected correctly, you will see

the following message:
Figure 6-141 Chiller Install - Message
Press OK to finish the install, and make sure that the Ethernet cable is
connected correctly.
Restart the process.
• In case the system is not responding after couple of minutes, and the
progress bar has reached 100%: Shutdown the system using the
power button, and restart the process.
• In case you receive a dialog with some error, for example:
6-130
Software
Figure 6-142 Chiller Install - Dialog Error
1. Shutdown the system using the power button

2. Make sure that you have copied all the needed files to your USB
key.
3. Restart the process
Manual chiller Firmware update Procedure steps:

If you see in the Service main screen the following chiller version:
Figure 6-143 Chiller Version 0.0
Continue with this procedure:
1. Turn on the system.

2. Press 'Logoff' in the start dialog.
3. Make sure that your service hasp is plugged in, and Login as
4. Running the chiller firmware update:
a. Insert the USB key with the chiller installer folder
b. Go to the "Chiller installer" folder
c. Run the "Lumenis chiller firmware update.exe - Manual"
program.
5. This will install several components; wait until you receive the
following screen:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-131

Figure 6-144 Chiller Install
6. Press the 'Controller' menu entry, and select 'Program Transfer to

PLC' option:
Figure 6-145 Program Transfer to PLC Option
7. In the following screen:
6-132
Software
Figure 6-146 Program Transfer to PLC Option [2]
Press the 'OK' button.
8. You should get the following screen:
Figure 6-147 Overwrite Message
9. Press the 'Yes' button; you should get the following screen.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-133

Figure 6-148 Compilation Success Message
10. Press the 'Start Transfer' button. After 10-15 seconds, you should
see the following screen:
Figure 6-149 Start Transfer In Progress
11. Press the 'Reboot' button, and you should hear a 'click' sound from
the chiller.
6-134
Software
12. Close the application, and perform a shutdown of the system:

Shutdown the windows. After the windows shuts down, close the
power to the system using the front panel button.
13. Power up the system, and run service application to check that the
version of the chiller is correct.
Version Ver 1.00.06.06 (Decathlon_V1_00_12_11_2014_ver6_6)
• System Version: 1.0.6.6

• LPU SW version 1.0.1412.11 (User+ R&D + service)
• MMCU SW version 1.0.1.56
• MMCU FPGA SW version 1.0.1.57 (for old key switch 56)
• HV PMCU SW version 1.0.1.29
• HV PMCU FPGA SW version 1.0.1.43
• Mirror motor SW version 1.1.3.12
• Chiller SW version 3.11
Figure 6-150 Version Screen After 1.0.6.6. Upgrade
14. Disconnect the communication and reconnect the cable on the LPU.
15. Close the LPU module cover and close the system covers.
16. In the Settings & Utilities screen, Settings expander section, set the
Verbosity Level to 3.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-135

Figure 6-151 Verbosity Level
17. Go to Self-Test screen and press Run All Tests.

18. Turn the system off, restart the system in User mode, set up the
external power meter, connect a long SIS test fiber, and perform the
power meter checks as explained in Chapter 4 of the service
manual.

Troubleshooting Chiller Update Errors

Case #1: If the communications cable is not connected correctly, you
will see the following message:
Figure 6-152 Troubleshooting Chiller Update [1]
Solution: Press OK to finish the install, and make sure that the Ethernet
cable is connected correctly. Restart the process.
6-136
Software
Case #2: The system is not responding after couple of minutes, and the
progress bar has reached 100%:
Solution: Shutdown the system using the power button, and restart the
process.
Case #3: In case you receive a dialog with some error, for example:
Figure 6-153 Troubleshooting Chiller Update [2]
Solution:
1. Shutdown the system using the power button

2. Make sure that you have copied all the needed files to your USB
key.
3. Restart the process.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-137

6.11 New Shell Screens for Service

The section below describes the various new service screens coming
with the new software V2.2.1.7.
6.11.1 Accessing Main Service screen

From the system Mode screen, press Log Off; Press Service User and
enter the password Lumenis1234. The new service main screen appears
with the System Information tab as default.
6.11.2 System Information Tab

Information displayed includes: system part number, serial number,
software version, Image version, Computer name, Logged in User,
EWF status and Free Disk space.
Also displayed is a system operation status indicator (used only in

production and for future remote connectivity).
Figure 6-154 System Information Tab
6-138
Software
6.11.3 Licenses Tab

This Licenses tab contains information about the HASP keys connected
to the device.
Figure 6-155 Licenses Tab
Each HASP shows its own status and features. If the feature has a time
limit, it will display the expiration date.
Figure 6-156 HASP License List
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-139

The System HASP and Service HASP can be updated via this screen by
pressing
“Update License from USB key”. The procedure is the same as

updating the HASP from the other applications. The HASP file should
be in <root>\Lumenis\P120H\LicenseUpdate and the file must start
with “Lumenis” and its extension must be V2C.
6.11.4 System Identification Operations

If the system displays Error 39 (HASP ERROR), or you need to merge
the system HASP with the system, press “Activate System Identifica-
tion”. The status line reports any issues related to the HASP and the
system.
Figure 6-157 System Identification Status
6-140
Software
6.11.5 Applications Installations Tab
Figure 6-158 Applications Installations Tab
This screen includes:
• LPU Applications Install – the current version is displayed; press

“Install LPU Application from a USB key” to install the LPU
application, after which the procedure is the same as usual.
• Chiller Firmware Update – Use this button to begin Chiller
Firmware update; refer to TN-3200111 (Rev B) for the chiller update
process.
• Lumenis Remote Service Install – TBD, for future use
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-141

6.11.6 Image Update Tab
Figure 6-159 Image Update Tab
Step 1 Image Update – see Section 6.9 Image Update-Systems with

New Service Shell.
• Image Update Recovery – If one of the conditions are met:

• If you have performed the image update procedure, but it was
interrupted in the middle.
• After ‘Step 1’, you did not receive the ‘115 files copied’ line
• The system always starts with a black ‘Boot loader’ screen
If one of these conditions are true, press ‘Image update Recovery’ to

return to a normal boot sequence.
Note
This button might not be visible if ‘Step 1’ is not performed.
6-142
Software
6.11.7 General Tab

This screen is for future use.
Figure 6-160 General Tab
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-143

6.11.8 New System Update Operations Screen

From the Service main screen, press the cogwheel in the upper right-
hand corner and then press Settings & Utilities. The Settings & Utilities
screen appears.
Figure 6-161 Setting & Utilities
6-144
Software
Press System Update Operations; the System Update Operations screen

appears.
Figure 6-162 System Update Operations Screen
The System Update Operations includes:
• Update License
• Update Service Pack
• Firmware Update
Update License Notes:
• Lumenis supplies the update license file.

• The file size is 2KB, and can be sent via email.
Update Service Pack
• For future use
Firmware Update
When replacing one of the FRUs in which the new software needs to be
reloaded, press this button to update the firmware.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 6-145

6-146
C H A P T E R
CALIBRATIONS, ALIGNMENTS &

ADJUSTMENTS
7.1 Introduction
This section contains procedures for the checks and adjustments
required to maintain the Lumenis Pulse 120H Holmium laser. The
procedures assume the reader has successfully completed a Lumenis
service training course on the Pulse 120H Holmium laser. Service
performed by untrained or unqualified persons can be a hazard to the
person or persons doing the service and to others present during the
servicing. An improperly serviced medical system can be a hazard to
the equipment user, to others present during use, and to the patient
upon whom the laser is used.
Caution
Use proper laser eyewear when performing activities involving

the delivery system. Accidental laser exposure can cause severe
eye damage.
The procedures should be performed in the order presented, from

beginning to end. If only a portion of the procedures are done, the
servicing engineer must consider the possible effect of doing just that
portion of the procedures (i.e.,there may be adjustments done earlier or
later in the procedures that impact or are impacted by the portion
performed).
Section 7.2 Optical Alignment is performed when the System Check

out procedure indicates a problem, any of the various optical/electro-
optical components have been adjusted/replaced or the system cannot
meet specifications during the various calibration procedures.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-1

7.2 Optical Alignment

Perform the Optical Alignment procedures whenever any optical or
electro-mechanical device have been replaced or adjusted in the optics
bench or in the laser head. Note that the procedures should be
performed in the order presented, from beginning to end. If only a
portion of the procedures are done, the servicing engineer must
consider the possible effect of doing just that portion of the procedures
(i.e., there may be adjustments done earlier or later in the procedures
that impact or are impacted by the portion performed).
Figure 7-1 Optical Bench Beam Path Schematic
7.2.1 Holmium Channel Alignment

When properly adjusted the Ho. channel will meet each of the
following three criteria.
• The cavity HR will be positioned to direct the Holmium output to the

center of the first relay mirror, and the cavity OC will be positioned
to provide maximum power for that HR position.
7-2
Calibrations, Alignments & Adjustments
• The first relay mirror (FRM) and second relay mirror (SRM or
plano) will direct the Ho. energy off the two folding mirrors so that it
is centered through the wedge optic apertures and centered into the
proximal end of the fiber.
The adjustment procedure for a single channel follows. The procedure
is a complete check out and alignment for a single channel. The
procedure is meant to be done in the order given, from beginning to
end.
It may often be appropriate to do less than the complete adjustment, but

in such a case the field service engineer must consider the possible
effect of doing only a portion, i.e., the adjustment may have an effect
on some other portion of the alignment. As an example, if a single
channel is only slightly out of center at the fiber port, it can usually be
corrected by simply adjusting the first relay mirror (using the fiber
detector signal) and then confirming the adjustment using a test fiber
burn.
When replacing a damaged optic, it should not be necessary to do the

entire procedure. Try to bring the system back into alignment by
adjusting the optic that was replaced.
7.2.2 Making Test Burns

Checking out and aligning the Ho. channels requires making burns on
photo paper to check alignment. It is recommended to cover the burn
paper on both sides with plastic to contain splatter. The Alignment
Aperture and Cross Hair Aperture are two special purpose tools used
when making burns.
In general, when making burns, lower pulse energies and fewer total
pulses are better. As the total energy of the burn increases, the footprint
becomes "blurred". In some cases it will be necessary to get a
"multiplexed footprint", i.e., the paper is burned by more than one
channel, allowing the Ho. beam positions to be compared. In other
cases a single channel burn will be required. The service engineer can
select the channels to be fired, a lamp current and a pulse rate at the
service screens. Setting a lower pulse rate allows the footswitch to be
operated to obtain just a single pulse from a channel, or from each
selected channel.
The alignment aperture is used to center the Ho. beam(s) in front of the
second wedge optic. It holds a piece of burn paper (covered on both
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-3

sides with plastic to contain splatter). A good burn will fall inside the
aperture (the aperture will not clip the beam). The tool is keyed with
two small posts that fit into holes on the face of the second wedge optic
housing block. To use the aperture, slide burn paper and plastic in
through the side, then insert it on the second wedge optic housing.
The cross hair aperture is used to align an individual cavity (OC and
HR) into the center of the first relay mirror. To install it, the first relay
mirror mount is removed, then the aperture slides into a hole in the wall
directly behind the spot the channel first relay mirror was mounted
(insert from the outside of the wall, so that it is further from the channel
OC).
Figure 7-2 Cross Hair Aperture
The aperture has two small wires running across it that block a small
portion of the beam (perpendicular to each other and crossing in the
center of the aperture). The resulting burn will have the cross hairs
superimposed on it. The cavity optics are adjusted to center the burn in
the cross hairs.
7-4
Figure 7-3 Insert Test Aperture
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-5

NEAR ALIGNMENT
Figure 7-4 Making Burns through Crosshair Aperture
7-6
By using the tool in Figure 7-5, adjust the beam at the OC optic to form
a nice round shape.
Figure 7-5 Tool for Adjusting Laser Beam at OC
7.2.3 Adjusting the Holmium Channel Optics

When the optics bench cover is removed, exposure to hazardous
high voltages is present. 10kV is present on the pod assembly
when the lamps are starting, and may be present any time the
system is turned on. B+ is present on the terminal block
whenever the system is on, and is present up to 5 minutes after
the system is turned off.
Refer to Figure 7-6: The channel HR, OC and relay mirrors all have the
same basic adjustment mechanics. The mirror is held in a mirror mount
by a metal retainer. The mount attaches to one of the optics bench walls
by a single mounting screw with spring. The spring pulls the mount
towards the wall - two adjusting screws and a ball bearing hold the
mount out away from its mounting surface against the tension of the
spring. One adjusting screw provides horizontal movement and the
other provides vertical movement.
A locking nut is threaded onto each adjusting screw. To unlock the

screw for adjustment back the locking screw away from the collar.
Once adjustment is complete, lock down the adjustment screw by
turning the nut down against the collar. As is common in such
mechanical lock down set ups, the locking down process will change
the adjustment a bit, so use the locking down to bring the optic to its
optimum position. It is best to use the hex wrench to hold the adjusting
screw in place while tightening down the locking nut with the box end
wrench. The adjusting screws require a 7/64th hex head wrench. The
locking nuts require a 7/16th box end wrench.
The channel HR and OC must first be aligned to each other through the
length of the Ho. rod in order to achieve lasing. Once the two mirrors
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-7

are aligned to provide a usable output (will make a burn on photo

paper), the two optics are adjusted together to "walk" the Ho. output so
that it is centered in the first relay mirror.
Finally, the OC is adjusted to peak the power and form a nice round
spot shape out of the cavity into the center of the first relay mirror. The
channel first and second (plano) relay mirrors are adjusted to center the
channel Ho. beam through the wedge optics and into the center of the
fiber port. The first relay mirror is the far (fiber port) adjustment (it is
concave, and provides less positional change to the beam downstream
at the fiber port). The second relay mirror is near (wedge optic)
adjustment, it moves the beam much more than the first relay mirror. In
general, unless the beam is grossly out of center at the second wedge
aperture, the second relay mirror should not be adjusted.
There are also two turning mirrors that steer all the Ho. channels off the
galvo/servo mirror down towards the fiber port. These mirrors do not
normally require adjustment. Obviously, adjusting one of these mirrors
will affect all four Ho. channels. The adjustment and mounting scheme
is the same as that for the channel optics.
• First Relay Mirror (FRM) - far (fiber) alignment

• Plano Mirror (SRM) - near (wedge) alignment
7-8
Figure 7-6 Optics Adjustment, Relay and Plano Mirrors
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-9

7.2.4 Resonator Alignment
Preparation:
1. Remove the top cover (see ‘Removing the Top Cover’ on page 9-4).
2. Remove the optical bench cover (see ‘Removing the Optical Bench
Cover’ on page 9-10.)
3. Examine the optics for any visual sign of damage. Replace
damaged HR, OC, or Relay mirrors.
4. Refer to Figure 7-6: To replace a channel relay mirror, HR or OC,
first remove the mirror mount by carefully removing the mounting
screw (it has a spring around its shaft to place tension on the mount)
while supporting the mount. Once the mount is free, set it down
face up and remove the retainer (held in place by three hex screws)
that hold the optic. The old optic can then be removed and the new
optic inserted (ball bearings inside the mounting hole center and the
optic in the hole). Reinstall the retainer, then the mirror mount.
Note that the mount should return to its former position, since the
adjustment screws were not removed.
5. Examine the end of the rod for visual damage.
The rod will be illuminated by the flash lamp when the unit is on (if
not, the flash lamp has failed or the simmer supply circuitry has a
problem). Replace a damaged rod or failed flash lamp.
6. Center and peak the cavity output into the first relay mirror.
Alignment
Note
Each procedure should be done for every head separately (brick 1-4).
For this procedure, the target alignment tool is

needed.
1. Insert the service HASP into the rear service target alignment tool
panel USB port.
2. Go to Service Mode (see‘Accessing Service Mode’ on page 6-19).
3. Press Run Test No Laser.
4. Disassemble the FRM (First Relay Mirror) of the head you want to
check.
7-10
5. If the Run Test No Laser is completed successfully (“Self Test Flow

Completed” message appears), go to Lasing Control screen.
6. In the Lasing Control screen, make sure the system is in
STANDBY.
7. Insert the target alignment tool in place of the mirror you removed.
Figure 7-7 Target Alignment Tool
8. In the Lasing Control screen, set the parameters of the relevant

head (select the relevant head checkbox) to 1Hz and 30-40J. (All
other heads should be in OFF position, checkboxes unchecked).
9. Press Open Shutter.
10. Place photo paper with plastic wrapping in front of the target.
11. Press Ready and then press the footswitch. Using the rear HR
mirror’s alignment screws, adjust the laser spot so that it is centered
in the target alignment tool.
Figure 7-8 Alignment
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-11

Use the table below for the proper adjustment screw direction:
Brick # Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment

Brick 1 To move spot left Turn CW To move spot up Turn CW
To move spot right Turn CCW To move spot down Turn CCW
Brick 2 To move spot left Turn CW To move spot up Turn CCW
To move spot right Turn CCW To move spot down Turn CW
Brick 3 To move spot left Turn CCW To move spot up Turn CCW
To move spot right Turn CW To move spot down Turn CW
Brick 4 To move spot left Turn CCW To move spot up Turn CW
To move spot right Turn CW To move spot down Turn CCW
* CW = Clockwise
* CCW = Counter-clockwise
Figure 7-9 Resonator Adjustment
12. Round Spot check: Remove the target alignment tool and set up the
external power meter. Change the parameters to 10Hz and 40J.
13. Adjust the OC two adjustment screws to achieve the maximum
energy.
14. Remove the cross-target tool and insert the tool for adjusting the
OC.
7-12
Figure 7-10 Round Spot Check Tool
15. Set the system to 1Hz/2Hz, 40J.

16. Readjust the OC 2 adjustment screws to achieve a nice, round
pattern.

Figure 7-11 Round Pattern
17. Repeat steps 7-15 until the spot size is centered in the target
alignment tool and the maximum energy is achieved, and the spot is
a nice round pattern.
7.2.5 Quality Laser Head Check

1. In Service Mode Lasing Control screen, set the parameters to 13Hz
and 60J.
2. Using the external power meter, verify minimum energy of 34W
and a round spot size.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-13

Note
Begin checking at 60J and increasing incrementing 1J up to 68J only
when increase is needed. Stop increasing when 32W is achieved.
3. Record the results in the table below for the relevant brick.
CAVITY #1 CAVITY #2 CAVITY #3 CAVITY #4
Mode Mode Mode Mode

Drive / J
Power/W
Figure 7-12 Cavity Output
7.2.6 Near Alignment
Note
For this procedure, the wedge aperture tool is
needed (see photo at right).
1. Connect the wedge aperture tool to the wedge

mirror, and insert a piece of black photo paper
covered with plastic inside the tool’s slot.
2. Set screen parameters to 1 Hz and 50J for each channel.
3. Press READY and then press the footswitch.
4. Verify that the spot size of each head is centered on the photo
paper. If not, adjust the SRM two adjustable screws until the spot
size is centered on the photo paper.
5. Repeat Far Alignment, and then Near Alignment, until both
alignments are successful.
7-14
7.2.7 Near Alignment Without Wedge Tool

The following procedure describes another method of performing Near
Alignment, without the use of the wedge tool.
Tools Needed:
• Standard tool kit

• Allen screwdriver 7/64” [A]
• Tools open wrench 3/8 [B]
Figure 7-13 Tools
1. Go to Service Mode and run the Self Test No Lasing test. If the Self
Test is completed successfully, the“Self Test Flow Completed”
message appears.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-15

2. Go to the Lasing Control screen and for each specific brick, set the
following parameters:
1 Hz and 50J, Open Loop number of pulses: FT_Counted, 1
Figure 7-14 Lasing Control Parameters
3. Open the main shutter in the Laser Deck tab, press READY and
press the footswitch.
4. Place the burn paper (wrapped in plastic) to 5 cm from the fiber
port assembly aperture.
5. Fire a pulse and verify that the spot size is a nice, round shape.
6. If the shape is not round (cut off), the second relay mirror could be
out of alignment.
Figure 7-15 Cut-Off Burn Shape - Bad Result
7. If the spot is not a round shape, open the 2 nuts of the relevant
channel and make small adjustments with the adjustment screws.
7-16
8. Fire again to verify that the adjustment corrected the shape. If not,
continue to alternately adjust and fire the laser to confirm proper
adjustment, until the burn shape is round and not cut off.
9. After near alignment is achieved, repeat the Far alignment

procedure.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-17

7.2.8 Far Alignment
Note
Each procedure should be done for each head separately.
Note
For this procedure, the transimpedance
amplifier tool is needed.
1. Go to Service Mode.
2. In the Lasing Control screen, make sure
the system is in STANDBY.
3. Connect one side of the transimpedance
amplifier tool to the system’s fiber focus
assembly and the other side to the oscilloscope.
4. Enable the Service Attenuator to the beam pass.
5. Set screen parameters:10 Hz and 50J.
6. Press READY and press the footswitch.
7. Using FRM two adjustable screws, adjust each head separately,
achieving a maximum signal on the scope (1V/Div 200µs).
7-18
7.2.9 Far Alignment - without Oscilloscope

The following procedure describes another method of performing Far
Alignment, without the use of an oscilloscope.
Note
This procedure must be performed when using
SlimLine 200 D/F/L P/N AC-1001635 or MOSES 20 micron fiber.
1. Take a short test fiber and color the tip with a red marker.
2. Connect a short test fiber to the fiber port connector, making sure
the Lumenis logo on the fiber is facing up.
Figure 7-16 Connect Short Test Fiber
3. Go to Service Mode and run the Self Test No Lasing test. If the Self
Test is completed successfully, the“Self Test Flow Completed”
message appears.
4. In the Lasing Control screen, select brick #1 and set the screen
parameters: 2 Hz and 35-40J, number of pulses: FT_Counted, 2
5. Open the main shutter in the laser deck tab, press READY and press
the footswitch.
6. Disconnect the short test fiber and attach it to the Inspection scope,
making sure the Lumenis logo on the fiber is facing up (see Figure
7-17; this improves the accuracy of the check). Check that the spot
is centered in the scope.
Figure 7-17 Lumenis Logo Appearing on Top of Tip
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-19

7. If the spot is not centered in the scope, adjust the relevant screws
according to the table, in quarter increment adjustments.
Brick # Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment

Brick 1 To move spot left Turn CCW To move spot up Turn CW
To move spot right Turn CW To move spot down Turn CCW
Brick 2 To move spot left Turn CCW To move spot up Turn CCW
To move spot right Turn CW To move spot down Turn CW
Brick 3 To move spot left Turn CW To move spot up Turn CCW
To move spot right Turn CCW To move spot down Turn CW
Brick 4 To move spot left Turn CW To move spot up Turn CW
To move spot right Turn CCW To move spot down Turn CCW
* CW = Clockwise
* CCW = Counter-clockwise
Figure 7-18 Far Alignment without Scope
8. Disconnect the fiber, clean the tip of the fiber, and recolor the tip
with a red marker. Reconnect it to the fiber port.
9. Rotate the fiber 180° until the Lumenis logo is facing down.
10. Reduce the pump energy to 30-35J, 1Hz.
11. Press READY and fire one pulse.
7-20
12. Inspect the result in the inspection scope; if the two laser spots are
not as in Figure 7-19 [A], adjust the relevant screws as in Figure 7-
18; make adjustments in half-corrections. The smaller spot (30-
35J) is the reference spot and should be coaxial (tolerance up to 25-
30 micron between the 2 spots) on top of the larger spot (40-45J) as
much as possible. If needed, repeat this procedure several times
until the desired result is achieved.
Figure 7-19 Spot Results - Bad and Good
13. Repeat the check for Brick #2, 3, and 4, each time cleaning the fiber
port connection and fiber tip from the red marker and re-coloring
the tip.
14. When adjustment is completed, go to the Lasing Control screen,
select all four bricks, re-color the fiber tip, and repeat steps 6-8 and
recheck.
15. At the end of the procedure, clean the fiber port connection with
alcohol on a cotton swab to clean the fiber port of any red marker
residue.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-21

7.2.10 Final Optical Inspection
Note
For this procedure, the inspection scope is needed.
1. Color the tip of a short test fiber with a red

marker and connect it to the system.
2. In Service mode Lasing Control screen, set
the Fire Control to FT_Counted 2 Pulses, 2Hz
30-35J.
3. Open the Shutter, press READY and press the footswitch, firing
onto burn paper.
4. Using the Inspection Scope, check each head separately that the
spot is centered in the scope.
Figure 7-20 Examining Test Fiber Burn
5. After each head is checked separately, perform the Final Optical

Inspection on all four heads together, checking for centration of all
four heads.
Centration Check
1. Place the burn paper (wrapped in plastic) to 5 cm from the fiber
port assembly aperture.
2. In the Lasing Control screen, set screen parameters to 1-5 Hz, 50J.
3. Fire a pulse and verify that the spot size is a nice, round shape. If
not, repeat ‘Near Alignment’ on page 7-14.
7-22

Figure 7-21 Near Alignment - Spot Size
7.2.11 Optical Transmission Adjustment

1. Enable one laser at a time.
2. Set the drive according to the table in Figure 7-12, with repetition
rate of 13Hz.
3. Record the output power.
Note
Record the output power for each laser.
Calculation: Fiber Delivery Power / Power From Head x 100 = Fiber

transmission Ratio (>75%).
Laser # Fiber Delivery Power Power from Head Fiber Transmission

[W] [W] Ratio >75%
Figure 7-22 Optical Transmission Adjustment
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-23

7.3 Electronic Adjustment

Electronic Adjustment is performed by connecting a scope to test
points on the Pyro board. The test points are as follows:
• TP24 - SAFE
• TP2 - MAIN
• TP131 - GND
Figure 7-23 Pyro Board Test Points
7.3.1 Pyro Detector Adjustment

To maintain system calibration accuracy, the pyro detector mirrors
must be properly aligned.
4. Insert the service HASP in the service panel USB port.

5. Go to Service Mode (see ‘Accessing Service Mode’ on page 6-19).
6. Go to Self Test screen and press Run Test No Laser.
7. In the Lasing Control screen, enter the parameters (open loop):
• Turn on Holmium flashlamp #1 only
• Set lamp energy at 50J
• Lamp volts at 800V
• Rep. Rate of 10Hz
8. Set the oscilloscope for 1V / Div. with sweep time of 200µS.
9. Align the pyro mirror:
7-24
a. Connect channel 1 from oscilloscope to TP2 on the Optics

Bench PCB. Use TP131 as ground.
b. Adjust the pyro mirror in both X-Y axes to achieve maximum
peak of the signal as seen on the scope.
Note
Make sure that the beams hit the center of the pyro sensors - search
the two points with the adjustment screws: increase/decrease the
amplitude signal; use the screws to adjust in the center between the
two positions. A full rotation can be necessary. If the laser is not
centered properly, it can hit the edge of the sensor and cause
problems.
7.3.2 Calibration and Offset Adjustment

To maintain system calibration accuracy, the pyro detector mirrors
must be properly aligned.
Perform this procedure when the Optics Bench PCB is replaced, or if

the pyro is misaligned, or if the pyro board is replaced.
1. In the Lasing Control screen, set the laser to the following

parameters (open loop): Voltage 800V, Pulse Rate 10Hz, Lamp
energy 40J. Turn on Brick 1 (all other channels should be OFF).
2. Attach a power calibration long fiber and in the Laser Deck/Aiming
Beam screen, turn ON the aiming beam. Direct the fiber output
toward the external power meter.
3. In the Lasing Control screen open the Shutter.
4. Place the laser in READY mode.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-25

Figure 7-24 Laser in READY Mode
5. Press the footswitch and fire the laser. Adjust the LAMP ENERGY
until 6 Watts is delivered out of the fiber to the external power
meter.
6. Set the Differential and Gain amplifiers (Refer to Figure 7-25):
a. Attach oscilloscope probes to the Optics bench PCB at TP24
(SDIF) and TP131 (GND); in the Calibrations screen,
Potentiometer Calibration screen, adjust the SafePyroGain
until the signal amplitude is 4.0 ± 0.1 VDC [#1]. Press Save
[#3] to save the results.
b. Attach oscilloscope probes to the Optics bench PCB at TP2
(MNDIF) and TP131 (GND); in the Calibrations screen,
Potentiometer Calibration screen, adjust the MainPyroGain
until the signal amplitude is 4.0 ± 0.1 VDC [#1].
7. Press Save [#3] each time the desired results are achieved.
7-26
Figure 7-25 Set Differential and Gain
8. Go back to the Lasing Control screen, increase the Pump Energy

until reaching 10W on the external power meter.
Figure 7-26 Lasing Control Screen
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-27

9. Press READY to enable lasing and then press the footswitch and
observe the reading; Press STANDBY and adjust the LAMP
ENERGY until 10W is delivered (displayed on the external power
meter).
Figure 7-27 Pyro Adjust
10. In the Calibrations screen, go to Potentiometer Calibration and

adjust the MainPyroHolGain and Safety PyroHolGain [#2] until the
Pyro Main and Safe values are 1J in the screen ([#4]). Use
increments of 10-20 steps.
• To increase the MAIN or SAFE, press the < LEFT arrow.
• To decrease the MAIN or SAFE, press the > RIGHT arrow.
Note
After each adjustment, press Save [#5] before firing the laser.
11. Press Save [#3] to save the values.

12. Go to Self Test screen and press Run All Tests (make sure the
Lasing Control screen is in STANDBY).
7-28
13. If the system successfully completed all the tests without any fatal
errors, take a service long test fiber, set the parameters according to
the table (Service Mode, Closed Loop), fire the laser into an
external power meter and record the results.
Pulse Energy Pulse Rate Hz Accepted Range [W] Results

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 80 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 60 108-132
4 10 36-44
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-29

7.3.3 Final Aiming Beam Check

The aiming beam is adjusted by repositioning the aiming diode mount
or by adjusting the position of the folding mirror (the mirror that directs
the aiming beam onto the beam combiner).
Figure 7-28 Adjusting Aiming Beam
Observe the aiming beam output from the fiber and adjust to obtain a
full spot of bright red light (no doughnut). Note: A faint halo is
acceptable.
Figure 7-29 Aiming Beam Profile
7-30
7.4 Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and

Capacitor Bank Calibration
This procedure should be done when the charger, HV PMCU, Safety
IGBT or capacitor bank is replaced, or after any fault related to those
modules.
1. Connect a DVM to the capacitor bank POS (+) and NEG (-) points
as shown in Figure 7-30.
Figure 7-30 Capacitor Bank DVM Connections
2. Set the system to Service mode and perform Self Test, Run Tests -
No Laser.
Figure 7-31 Run Test - No Laser
3. In Service mode Charger screen, press Set, 800V to set the

capacitors and then press Charge ON.
Figure 7-32 Charger Screen - Set Capacitors
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-31

4. Refer to Figure 7-33: Observe the DVM reading; the value should
be 800VDC. If not, adjust POT #1 on the HV PMCU until the
desired results are achieved.
5. Observe the Capacitor Voltage reading on the screen; the value
should be 800 VDC. If not, adjust POT #2 on the HV PMCU until
the desired results are achieved.
6. Observe the Capacitor Voltage (SWM) reading on the screen; the
value should be 800 VDC. If not, adjust POT #3 on the HV PMCU
until the desired results are achieved.
7. Observe the Capacitor Balance reading on the screen; the value
should be 400 VDC (half of the capacitor voltage). If not, adjust
POT #4 on the HV PMCU until the desired results are achieved.
Figure 7-33 Adjust Charger Values on HV PMCU
8. Go back to the Self Test screen, and perform Run all Tests.
Figure 7-34 Run Tests - Run All Tests
7-32
7.5 Servo Mirror Calibration
Note
Perform this procedure if either the servo mirror or servo motor are
replaced.
Caution
Wear the appropriate protective eyewear when performing this

procedure.
1. Take the fiber alignment tool and attach it to the fiber connection
port.
Figure 7-35 Connect Fiber to Port
2. Disconnect the diode harness and connect the other end of the fiber
alignment tool to the diode harness.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-33

Figure 7-36 Disconnect Diode Harness and Connect Fiber Align-

ment Tool
3. Turn the system on and in Service Mode, perform Self Test No

Lasing. go to the Sub-System screen, Laser Deck | Aiming Beam tab
and set the Density to Maximum.
4. In the Shutter tab open the Shutter Control.
5. Take the new servo mirror and install it in its location.
6. Make sure that the servo mirror housing is mounted on the motor’s
mechanical axis completely (until the end of the axis). At this point,
do not tighten the servo mirror locking screw.
7. Use housing 2 to adjust and center on housing 1.
8. Use housing 1 to adjust and center on the servo mirror.
7-34
Figure 7-37 45 Degree Mirror Housing 1 and 2
Adjustment:
9. In Service Mode, go to the Servo Motor Calibration screen.

10. Press Mirror Motor Init and select Channel 1 (Brick 1); press Move
Motor to Brick.
11. Adjust the degrees to 0, press Set, and then press Save Calibration.
Figure 7-38 Move Motor to Brick
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-35

12. Adjust the reflected mirror motors to SRM: manually adjust the
reflected beam from the servo mirror until the laser diode is
centered on the SRM of Channel 1 (see Figure 7-39). Once
centered, then tighten the servo mirror locking screw.
Figure 7-39 Adjust Reflected Mirror Motors to SRM
13. Verify that the beam SRM (Channel 1) is centered on the FRM; if
not, adjust using the SRM adjustment screws
Figure 7-40 SRM Centered on FRM
7-36
14. Adjust the FRM by using its adjustment screws so that the beam is
centered on Brick #1’s crystal rod.
Figure 7-41 Adjust FRM
15. Adjustment for channel #1 is complete; repeat the process in steps

1-7 for Channel (Brick) #2, #3, and #4, and for each Brick use
different starting settings, as shown in Figure 7-42
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-37

Figure 7-42 Adjustment Settings for Each Brick
16. Press Save Calibration after setting each channel.

17. Turn the system off and then on again. Go to service mode and
perform Self-Test No Lasing. Verify that the calibration values in all
4 channels have been saved.
18. Perform ‘Near Alignment’ on page 7-14.
19. Perform ‘Far Alignment’ on page 7-18.
20. Perform ‘Pyro Detector Adjustment’ on page 7-24.
7-38
7.5.1 Optical Alignment with Fiber Alignment Tool

This section describes the steps for performing optical alignment with
the fiber alignment tool, P/N TA-1074050 (see Figure 7-43).
Optical Alignment is performed in case of optical bench misalignment.
Figure 7-43 Fiber Alignment Tool
Tools Needed:
• Fiber alignment tool (as above)

• Short test fiber
• Long test fiber
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-39

1. Take the fiber alignment tool and attach it to the fiber connection
port (see Figure 7-44).
Figure 7-44 Connect Fiber Alignment Tool
2. Disconnect the diode harness and connect the other end of the fiber
alignment tool to the diode harness (see Figure 7-45).
Figure 7-45 Connect Fiber Alignment Tool to Diode Harness
3. Turn the system on and in Service Mode, perform Self Test No

Lasing; go to Sub-System screen, Laser Deck, Aiming Beam tab and
set the Density to Maximum.
4. Adjust the laser beam path for each channel separately:
7-40
5. In the Lasing Control screen, open the shutter.

6. Adjust the diode beam path by rotating the adjustable screws on the
45° mirror housing #1 to the center of 45° mirror housing# 2.
7. Adjust the 45° mirror housing #2 to the center of the servo mirror
(see Figure 7-46).
Figure 7-46 Adjust Diode Beam Path
8. Go to Servo Motor Calibration screen (see Figure 7-47). Press

Mirror Motor Init. Select Brick 1 and press Move Motor to Brick.
Adjust the Motor degrees to 0 and then press Set. Then press Save
Calibration.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-41

Figure 7-47 Mirror Motor Init
9. Use the 2 adjustable screws of the SRM to adjust the aiming beam
diode tool to the center of the FRM (see Figure 7-48).
Figure 7-48 Adjust Aiming Beam Diode to Center of FRM
7-42
10. Use the 2 adjustable screws of the FRM to adjust the aiming beam
diode tool to the center of the laser brick rod (see Figure 7-49).
Figure 7-49 Adjust Aiming Beam Diode Tool to Brick Rod
11. Refer to Figure 7-50: Repeat the adjustment process for Channels
2, 3, and 4, paying attention to the different settings for each
channel. At the end of each channel adjustment, press Save.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-43

Figure 7-50 Adjustment, Channels 1-4
12. After completing all 4 channels adjustment, perform Self-test (Run

Tests No Laser), turn the system off and then on again. Verify that
the calibration parameters for each channel have been saved
accordingly.
7-44
13. Verify that the beam path for each individual channel is centered in
the center of the brick rod.
14. Perform final steps:
• Perform ‘Near Alignment’ on page 7-14.
• Perform ‘Far Alignment’ on page 7-18.
7.5.2 Aiming Beam Intensity Check

Perform this procedure at the next service visit, PM, or when
encountering difficulty with the aiming beam intensity.
1. In Service Mode, select the Calibration tab and then select Aiming
Beam Calibration.
2.Change the level settings to the new values as follows:
• Level 1: 6
• Level 2: 20
• Level 3: 70
2. Press Save to save the changes.
3. Restart the system and perform Self Test; verify that the new values
have been saved.
Figure 7-51 Aiming Beam Intensity Check
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-45

7.5.3 Calibrating the Backlight Tool

This procedure is perform when a brick experiencing 0 energy, and you
are unable to get energy output from the HR and/or OC. This may be
due to misalignment of these mirrors. The backlight tool enables
adjustment of the two mirror to be parallel to each other.
1. Remove the FRM assembly of the relevant brick from its location.
2. Insert the Diode Backlight tool P/N 0624-042-51 into the First
Relay Mirror location (see Figure 7-52).
Figure 7-52 Insert Backlight Tool
3. Bypass the diode: Disconnect the diode harness and connect the
backlight tool in its place. This is the diode aiming beam signal.
4. Turn on the system and go to Service mode, Sub-systems | Laser
Deck screen.
5. In the Laser Deck screen, set the aiming beam to maximum
intensity.
6. Loosen the locking nuts on the OC mirror.
7. Insert a plain white piece of paper in front of the OC mirror. In a
darkened room, observe the red beam and verify if it is centered in
the OC mirror (see Figure 7-53).
7-46
Figure 7-53 Insert Paper in front of OC Mirror
8. If not centered, use the 4 adjusting screws on the tool to adjust

along 2 x-y axes.
9. Check for reflection coming back from the OC mirrors by
observing the assembled end of the tool. Use the mirror’s adjusting
screws to center any reflection back onto the source via the tool.
When centered, lock the mirrors back in place.
10. Remove the tool and perform‘Resonator Alignment’ on page 7-10.
Fiber Port Test Procedure

1. Open the optical bench cover.
2. Disconnect the fiber port harness from its place.
3. Set a DVM to
4. Connect positive (+) lead to one of the black wire and the negative
(–) lead to the second black wire.
Figure 7-54 Connecting DVM Leads
5. Attach a test fiber to the fiber port and turn it all the way in.
6. The DVM should be beeping meaning the switch is activated.
7. Turn the test fiber counter clockwise 1 to 1 1/4 turns, the DVM
should stop beeping, meaning that the switch is not activated.
If these conditions are not met, adjust the switch position by
loosening the screw that fastens the switch (see Figure 7-55).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-47

Figure 7-55 Fiber Port with DVM Leads
8. Remove the DVM leads from the 2 wires.

9. Connect positive + lead to the white wire and connect the negative
– lead to the lens carrier, connect test fiber to the fiber port, turn it
all the way, the DVM should be beeping, indicating a closed
switch.
10. Turn the test fiber counter clockwise, the DVM should stop
beeping.
7-48
7.6 1st and 2nd Turning Mirror

Replacement and Adjustment
The following tools are needed for this procedure:
• Standard tool set

• 10mm aperture tool P/N 0622-919-51
• Transimpedance amplifier tool P/N 0614-868-51
• Ophir External power meter
• Oscilloscope
Figure 7-56 1st and 2nd 45° Turning Mirrors Locations
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-49

7.6.1 1st 45° Turning Mirror Replacement
Caution
All personnel in the vicinity of the laser unit must wear safety
eyewear, and must ascertain that the safety eyewear provides
adequate protection.
Note
If this optic is replaced or adjusted, only adjust this optical element!
In general, position this optic such that all beams are centered in the
10mm alignment aperture P/N 0622-919-51.
Make test alignment burns before removing the defective optic; then
get the new optic aligned as perfectly as possible. If necessary, go
back and perform First Relay and Plano Relay adjustments.
To replace the 1st 45° turning mirror, do the following:
1. Remove the single Allen screw from the 1st 45° turning mirror
housing (see Figure 7-57).
Figure 7-57 Single Allen Screw, 1st 45° Turning Mirror
2. Remove the 45° turning mirror in its housing from the optical
bench.
3. Remove the two small screws to open the housing (see Figure 7-
58).
7-50
Figure 7-58 Remove 2 Screws to Open Housing
4. Remove the old mirror and replace it with the new one.
5. Tighten the two small screws to close the housing.
6. Place the mirror housing back in its location and tighten the single
Allen screw.
7. Insert the 10mm aperture tool P/N 0622-919-51
(see photo at right) into the wedge mirror housing.
8. Insert a piece of thermal paper inside the aperture.
9. Perform ‘Near Alignment’ on page 7-14.
10. Verify that the laser spot size is centered on the
thermal paper. If not, continue to the next step.
11. Loosen the two nuts on the Allen screws of the 1st 45° turning
mirror (see Figure 7-59).
Figure 7-59 Loosen 2 screws, 1st 45° Turning Mirror
12. Center the beam by adjusting the two Allen screws.

13. After centering the beam, tighten the two nuts on the Allen screws.
14. Verify alignment with a short test fiber.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-51

15. Check the pyro mirror alignment after performing the adjustment
(see ‘Pyro Detector Adjustment’ on page 7-24.)
7.6.2 2nd 45° Turning Mirror Replacement
Note
If this optic is replaced or adjusted,
only adjust this optical element! In
general, position this optic such that
all beams yield a peak signal on the
transimpedance amplifier tool P/N
0614-868-51 (see photo at right).
To replace the 2nd 45° turning mirror,

do the following:
1. Remove the two small screws of the 2nd 45° turning mirror housing
(see Figure 7-60). (There is no need to remove the entire mirror
housing assembly from the optical bench).
Figure 7-60 Remove Screws of 2nd 45° Turning Mirror
2. Remove the old mirror and replace it with the new one.
3. Tighten the two small screws.
4. Perform Far Alignment (see ‘Near Alignment Without Wedge
Tool’ on page 7-15).
5. Verify alignment with a short test fiber, then check the beam
alignment on the pyro detector.
Note
If using SlimLine 200 D/F/L P/N AC-1001631, perform ‘Far
Alignment - without Oscilloscope’ on page 7-19.
7-52
7.7 Cleaning Optical Bench Components

During long periods of inactivity of systems, a layer of dust or other
airborne contaminants may settle on the mirrors in the system's optical
bench. When such a mirror is first subjected to the laser beam, the dust
or contaminants can heat up and damage the coated surface of the
mirror.
This process of checking all the optical surfaces (and cleaning as

necessary) should be done at each preventive maintenance visit.
Required Tools:
• Normal FSE's tool kit

• Flashlight
• Compressed-gas duster (i.e. Falcon® Dust-Off®)
• Handled mirror tool (such as a dental mirror)
Do the following:
1. Gain access to the optical bench (see ‘Removing the Optical Bench
Cover’ on page 9-10).
Figure 7-61 Removing Optical Bench Cover
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-53

2. Use your flashlight and handled mirror tool to check the optical
bench's entire array of mirrors, as shown in the following sequence
of photos (see Figure 7-62). Check the mirrors for dust, fibers,
fingerprints or other oily smudges.
Figure 7-62 Checking the Mirrors
3. Check the optical faces of the crystal rod(s) for dust or other
contaminants (see Figure 7-63).
7-54
Figure 7-63 Checking the Crystal Rods
4. Check the window in the blast shield (see Figure 7-64)
Figure 7-64 Checking the Blast Shield Window
5. If you find that any of the mirrors or other optical surfaces is

covered with dust, clean them with compressed gas.
6. If the compressed gas cleaning is not satisfactory, clean them with
high-quality lens cleaning tissue dipped in high-grade acetone.
Caution
Never clean optical components with water or water-based

products.
Do not use alcohol to clean the optical surfaces – alcohol

contains water.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-55

7.8 Servo Motor Auto-Tune Procedure

After this SW is completed, perform this procedure which executes
calibration of the servo motor.
1. Turn on the 4machine with HASP and go to Service mode.

2. Open the Calibration | Servo Motor Calibration screen, Parameters
tab.
3. Select the ‘Use Auto Tune’ checkbox.
Figure 7-65 Auto-Tune
4. Press ‘Set’.
5. Press ‘Save’.
6. Press OK.
7. Perform Self test – Run All Tests.
Be sure that you see the “Parameters Calculated by Mirror Motor’
line.
9. Open the Lasing Control window.
10. \Set the system for open loop with frequency 85-90 Hz and energy
10J (minimal energy) – this confirms that the found AFF value is a
stable value.
11. Press READY and press the footswitch to fire the laser for 1 full
minute. Verify that there are no errors.
Be sure that you see the “Parameters Calculated by Mirror Motor’
line.
7-56
Figure 7-66 Calibration/Servo Motor Calibration - Parameters
13. Deselect the ‘Use Auto Tune’ checkbox (checkbox empty).
Figure 7-67 Deselect Auto Tune
14. Press SET.

15. Press SAVE.
16. Press OK.
17. Turn off the machine.
Note
The next restart and Self Test will be without the auto-tune process.
18. Audio beep adjustment: In User mode, press Settings & Utilities.
Use the slider to reduce the sound volume to a level acceptable to
the user. Press OK.
19. Turn on the system in user mode, select 80 Hz, 0.2J (short Pulse),
fire the laser for 1 full minute. Verify that there are no errors.
20. Update the local time in the Settings & Utilities screen.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-57

7.9 Suction Test

This procedure describes the steps for testing the performance of the
suction assembly after replacement of the suction board or any of the
other suction components. This procedure is also performed as part of
preventive maintenance activities.
This procedure requires the Suction Test Kit, SPSA-1102760 which

includes:
1. Collection Container 500 ml (x2) P/N SA-1102760

2. Aspiration Tube (x1) P/N 2521-0219
3. Drain tube (x1, identified by a blue stripe) P/N MP1177250
Figure 7-68 Suction Test Kit
7.9.1 Suction Test Kit Setup

Refer to the parts above when setting up the suction test.
1. Remove the filters from both (x2) collection containers.
7-58
Figure 7-69 Remove Filter from Collection Container
2. Attach the tubes to one of the collection containers as follows:

• Attach one end of the aspiration tube (the wider tube to the top
inlet port.
• Attach one end of the drain tube (tube with blue stripe) to the
side outlet port.
3. Place the collection container into its designated holder in the

system.
Figure 7-70 Container in Holder and Tubes Attached
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-59

4. Open the suction pump head.
Figure 7-71 Open Suction Pump Head
5. Using the adjustment wheels on both sides of the suction pump (1),
adjust the inner diameter of the suction tube (2) to 6.4 mm (see
Figure 7-72).
Figure 7-72 Suction Pump Adjustment Wheels
7-60
6. Insert the drain tube into the channel in the suction pump:
a. Route the drain tube into the pump head’s channel.
Caution
Aspiration flows in the direction of the arrow on the pump head.

Always verify that the aspiration tube is loaded in the correct
direction.
b. Close the suction pump until you feel it 'snap' into place.
Figure 7-73 Closing the Suction Pump
7. Place the other end of the drain tube into an empty waste container.
8. Take the other collection container from the kit and fill it with
water until it reaches the 500 ml mark (max water level indication
mark on the collection container).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-61

9. Place the other end of the aspiration tube into the filled collection
container. 7.9.2 shows the final setup before testing
Figure 7-74 Final Setup for Suction Test
7-62
7.9.2 Suction Test

1. Turn on the system (User mode) and in the Urology screen press
PCNL.
Figure 7-75 Urology Screen - PCNL
2. Turn the suction pump knob clockwise to the highest level (5).
Figure 7-76 PUmp Knob on Level 5
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-63

3. Set the suction in the system GUI to ON and observe that the water
leaves the filled collection container, enters the second collection
container, and drains into the waste container. Continue draining
until the collection container is empty. This is to verify proper
operation of the draining process before testing-verify that draining
is complete.
Figure 7-77 Suction ON Button
4. When draining is completed successfully, press Suction OFF.

5. Refill the collection container again with 500 ml (max water level
indication mark on the collection container).
6. Press Suction ON and measure 15 seconds of draining. Verify that
the collection container empties a quantity of 250-450 ml of the
water.
7. After 15 seconds, press Suction OFF.
8. Refill the collection container again with 500 ml (max water level
indication mark on the collection container).
9. Set the suction pump to the lowest level (1).
10. Press Suction ON and measure 30 seconds of draining. Verify that
the collection container empties a quantity of 50-170 ml of the
water.
7-64
11. Press Suction OFF. Test is complete. Remove the aspiration

collection kit from the system (container and tubes). Verify that the
suction pump is still set to 6.4 on both sides and close the suction
pump head.
12. After completing the suction hardware setup and test (and software
if needed), report this activity in Service MAX
7.9.3 .Troubleshooting Suction Operation

If proper aspiration of the suction does not occur, or if the water flow in
the tubes is low, troubleshoot the problem by following the steps
below:
• Check the routing of the aspiration tube and drain tube; verify that
they are not bent or kinked.
• Possible cause for improper suction: air bubbles. Release air bubbles
as follows: repeat step 3 of the above procedure (draining water
without measuring time) – allow the water flow through the system
until there are no air bubbles. Then repeat the suction test with the
measured times (first 15 seconds and then 30 seconds).
• Replace the drain tube with a new one and repeat the Suction Test
procedure as above.
• Replace the suction pump head according to the ‘Pump Head
Replacement’ on page 9-58. (Use pump head P/N SPMP-1002558).
If the suction does not work at all, check the LEDs on the suction
board, located under the suction pump assembly. They should be On. If
one or more of the LEDS are not lit, verify good connection between
MMCU and suction board. If there is good connection but the LEDS
are not lit, replace the MMCU.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-65

The following LEDs indicate existing voltage (DC voltage to the

suction board from the MMCU):
E3 24V Green
E4 5V Green
Check operation of the pump motor, on E1 LED: In Service Mode,

Suction Control tab, press On; verify that the upper LED on the suction
board turns off.
E1 Pump Motor Green

(when pump running)
Green blinking (when

motor stuck)
If E1 is blinking, check proper connection to the pump motor. Replace

suction board or pump motor.
7-66
Check the pump head door: open the door; LED E2 will turn red.
E2 Pump Head Red

Door (when door Open
In Service Mode, Suction Control screen, select the Override

Potentiometer check box.
Move the Suction slider to level 9 and turn the Suction ON. The
Current value should be between >70 and < 3800.
Figure 7-78 Suction Level Slider
SM-0006900 Rev. G 7-67

7-68
C H A P T E R
TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 Introduction
Warning
This equipment generates high voltages and emits pulsed
laser and light of high intensity which can cause serious
personal injury if handled improperly.
Before performing any preventive maintenance,

adjustment or repair procedures, turn off the system and
disconnect it from the mains power, unless the procedure
to be followed necessitates otherwise.
This chapter helps the FSE to identify, diagnose, and repair the Error in
the event of a malfunction. Except for the corrective actions that are
listed in the Pulse 120H operator's manual, no attempt should be made
by the end user to repair the system or any of its sub-systems.
Caution
All preventive maintenance and repairs should be referred to and

performed only by a Lumenis-authorized field service engineer
FSE.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-1

The following section sin this chapter include:
• Section 8.2 Handling Error Messages and Notifications

• Section 8.3 Error Messages
• Section 8.4 Error Messages - Service Mode
• Section 8.5 LPU Errors
• Section 8.6 Errors with No Error Number
• Section 8.7 HASP Reader Utility
• Section 8.8 Debris Shield Maintenance
• Section 8.9 Troubleshooting Gas Unit (Chiller) Errors
• Section 8.10 Troubleshooting Error 38
• Section 8.11 Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-209
• Section 8.12 Troubleshooting Error 11
• Section 8.13 Troubleshooting Checklist
8.1.1 Troubleshooting Guide Sections
The Troubleshooting Guide is divided into the following sections:
Error Messages – Describes error messages that may appear on the

system's display following a system malfunction.
Refer to the list of all system errors in the section 8.3
System Problems – Describes malfunction situations that are not
necessarily associated with an error message. Refer
to the list of all system problems in 8.3.
8-2
Troubleshooting
8.2 Handling Error Messages and

Notifications
If you press READY while there is an error, it opens the Notifications
screen. You can also open this screen from the notification bar by
pressing the Show Notifications button.
1. Follow the instructions for the error message or notification.

2. For notifications, press the Acknowledge button.
• A check mark will appear to show that you have acknowledged
the message and the notification will fade.
• If the notification is ignored, it will remain in the list. However,
you may continue lasing with the system.
• For errors, perform the required task as detailed in the error
message. If the error is fixed, the message will fade and no
longer appear in the notification bar.
• If the error is not corrected by a user action, the error will not
fade and you will be prevented from lasing.
3. Repeat for each error message and notification.

4. Press the Close button to exit the Notifications screen.
Figure 8-1 Notifications Screen
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-3

8.3 Error Messages

This section describes all error messages that may appear on the
system's display following a system malfunction.
Note
Error messages may appear intermittently if the mains power is
inadequate or unstable.
Once the system issues an error message, always check the mains
power first.
The possible technical reasons for the appearance of each message are
explained after each error message in this section.
8.3.1 Errors - User Mode

The Pulse 120H system generates errors in both User and Service
modes. Notification icons identify the severity of the error or event.
When there is more than one notification, the most severe icon is
displayed in the notification bar along with the number of notifications.
The different types of errors are:
Icon Severity Explanation
Safety A safety message pops up and forces

shutdown. Depending on the error that
occurred, the safety message may allow you to
export a log file to USB before shutdown.
Non- The error message is displayed in the

recoverable notification bar and lasing is prevented until
error shutdown.
Recoverable The error message is displayed in the

error notification bar and lasing is prevented until the
error is fixed.
Error message The error message is displayed in the

notification bar, but lasing is not prevented.
Notification The notification message is displayed, but

operation is unaffected.
8-4
Troubleshooting
8.3.2 Power On Failure

• Check power plug configuration
• Check circuit breaker
• Open the AC Input board Panel and check LEDs
• Check transformer and AC board taps
• Check On/Off button and harnesses
• Check LVPS output signal
8.3.3 Hard Disk Failure

Possible root causes:
1. Computer does not boot up; DOS screen displayed (Windows does
not come up)
2. Cannot update software.
3. The computer (LPU) fan is not working which can cause a short
circuit on the hard disk.
8.4 Error Messages - Service Mode

The following table lists the system error codes, descriptions, severity,
and corrective actions.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-5

Troubleshooting
8.4.1 Error List
Error Name Error Corrective Action

# Severity
MMCU Errors
2 HV PMCU Flash CRC Fail Fatal Burn the HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126). If error persists,
replace the HV PMCU.
3 MM PMCU Flash CRC Fail Fatal Burn the MM PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
replace the MM PMCU.
4 MMCU SW Error Fatal Restart the system. Burn the MMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine,
and run it in user mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-
126) and LPU software/Hard Disk.
5 HV PMCU SW Error Fatal Burn the HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
6 MM PMCU SW Error Fatal Check for latest software version. Upgrade if needed. Burn the MM PMCU software
(see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user mode, to verify full user
start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126). If error persists, replace the MM PMCU.
7 Error table load to MMCU Fail (missing data) Fatal Verify that software package versions are compatible.
8 Error table load to MMCU Fail (data wrong) Fatal Burn the MMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126) and LPU
software/Hard Disk.If error persists, replace the LPU/Hard Disk.
9 Error table load to MMCU Fail (loading time is more Fatal Burn the MMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
than specific timeout) mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126) and LPU
software/Hard Disk.If error persists, replace the LPU/Hard Disk
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-6

Troubleshooting

# Severity
Communication Errors
101 HV PMCU-MMCU Communication Error Fatal Check that connections between HV PMCU and motherboard are securely
connected. Check connections between HV PMCU and MMCU. Replace MMCU
and/or HV PMCU.
102 MM PMCU-MMCU Communication Error Fatal Check that connections between MM PMCU and motherboard are securely
connected. Check connections between MM PMCU and MMCU. Replace MMCU
and/or MM PMCU.
103 Chiller-MMCU Communication Error Fatal Check that connections between Chiller and MMCU are securely connected.
Replace Chiller Controller board.
104 MMCU-FPGA Communication Error Fatal Burn FPGA software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user mode,
to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126). If error persists, replace
the MMCU board.
105 HV PMCU-FPGA Communication Error Fatal Burn HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
replace the HV PMCU board.
Configuration Errors
108 MMCU Configuration data error (wrong data) Fatal Configuration fault. Burn LPU software. If error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
109 MMCU Configuration data missing Fatal Configuration fault. Burn MMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and
run it in user mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126). If
error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
110 HV PMCU configuration data error (wrong data) Fatal Configuration fault. Burn HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and
111 HV PMCU configuration data missing Fatal Configuration fault. Burn HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-7

Troubleshooting

# Severity
112 MM PMCU configuration data error (wrong data) Fatal Configuration fault. Burn MM PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine,
126). If error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
113 MM PMCU configuration data missing Fatal Configuration fault. Burn MM PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine,
126). If error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
114 Chiller configuration data error (wrong data) Fatal Configuration fault. Burn LPU software. If error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
115 Chiller configuration data missing Fatal Configuration fault. Burn LPU software. If error persists, replace LPU/Hard Disk.
116 MMCU FPGA incompatible version Fatal Configuration fault. Burn the latest MMCU software version.
117 PMCU FPGA incompatible version Fatal Configuration fault. Burn the latest PMCU software version.
118 MMCU configuration timeout Fatal Configuration fault. Burn the LPU software. Try restarting the system. If the problem
persists, export log files and send them to GSO. If error persists, replace the MMCU.
Low Voltage Errors
120 MMCU - Power Supply 24V ±5% Fatal Check MMCU or MMCU 24V harness. If more than one 24V error check LVPS. Low
voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
121 MMCU - Power Supply 5V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
122 MMCU - Power Supply 3.3V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
123 MMCU - Power Supply 1.2V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
124 HV PMCU - Power Supply 24V ±5% Fatal Check HV PMCU or HV cabinet 24V harness. If more than one 24V error check
LVPS.Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error
persists, replace the HV PMCU.
125 HV PMCU - Power Supply 2.5V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-8

Troubleshooting

# Severity
126 MM PMCU - Power Supply 24V ±5% Fatal Check MM PMCU or MM PMCU 24V harness. If more than one 24V error check
LVPS. Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error
persists, replace the MM PMCU.
127 MM PMCU - Power Supply 3.3V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
replace the MMCU or MM PMCU.
128 MM PMCU - Power Supply 5V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
129 MM PMCU - Power Supply 12V ±5% Fatal Low voltage fault. Refer to Figure 6-44 to verify low voltages value. If error persists,
External Indicator Errors
135 External Indicator - Remote Interlock Open Lasing_Stop Check the interlock door connection or the short circuit plug.
Check COM harnesses. If error persists, replace the MMCU.
136 External Indicator - Remote Interlock Status Fail Lasing_Stop Check interlock harnesses or MMCU. Check COM harnesses. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
137 External Indicator - Emergency Stop Pressed Lasing_Stop Emergency Stop button is pressed. Release the emergency stop button and restart
the system to resume operation. Check emergency switch harnesses or MMCU.
138 External Indicator - Emergency Stop Status Fail Lasing_Stop Check COM harnesses. If error persists, replace the Emergency stop harness or
replace the MMCU.
139 External Indicator - Key switch OFF (key not Lasing_Stop Verify that the keyswitch is turned ON. Restart the system.
inserted)
140 External Indicator - Key Switch status fail Lasing_Stop Check key switch harnesses or MMCU. Check COM harnesses. If error persists,
replace the MMCU.
141 External Indicator - Footswitch not attached Lasing_Stop Check footswitch harness connection. If error persists, replace the footswitch or
MMCU.
142 External Indicator - Foot switch SW1 status fail Lasing_Stop Left foot pedal has malfunctioned. Verify the fault using External Indicators screen.
Check the foot pedal, the internal foot pedal harnesses or the MMCU.
If error persists, replace the footswitch.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-9

Troubleshooting

# Severity
143 External Indicator - Foot switch SW2 status fail Lasing_Stop Right foot pedal has malfunctioned. Verify the fault using External Indicators screen.
Check the foot pedal, the internal foot pedal harnesses or the MMCU.
If error persists, replace the footswitch.
144 External Indicator - Foot switch SW3 status fail Lasing_Stop Standby/Ready foot pedal button has malfunctioned. Verify the fault using External
Indicators screen. Check the foot pedal, the internal foot pedal harnesses or the
MMCU. If error persists, replace the footswitch.
145 External Indicator - Foot switch down on request for Lasing_Stop Check that footswitch pedal not stuck. If error persists, replace the footswitch or
ready or during self test. MMCU.
Laser Deck Errors
150 Laser Deck - Fiber not connected Lasing_Stop Fiber not connected. Please reconnect the fiber to resume operation. Verify that
fiber is in contact with fiber switch. If error persists, replace the MMCU or fiber focus
assembly.
151 Laser Deck - Debris shield not in place Lasing_Stop Debris shield is not in place. Please ensure the debris shield is in place to resume
operation. Verify debris shield inserted correctly. In Service Mode, Laser Deck
screen, observe the LED indicator on Blast Shield 1; if it turned off (red), align the
adjustment screw of the debris shield switch. If error persists, replace the debris
shield switch.
152 Laser Deck - Shutter test fail Fatal Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check shutter status in Service
mode, Laser Deck-Shutter screen (see Figure 6-40). If error persists, replace the
shutter PCB or solenoid shutter.
153 Laser Deck - Shutter not closed Fatal Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check shutter status in Service
154 Laser Deck - Shutter not open Fatal Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check shutter status in Service
pyro PCB or solenoid shutter.
155 Laser Deck - Shutter Status Fail (stuck or broken) Fatal Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check shutter status in Service
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-10

Troubleshooting

# Severity
156 Laser Deck - Attenuator test fail Lasing_Stop Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check shutter status in Service
attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
157 Laser Deck - Attenuator not IN Lasing_Stop A fault was detected and energies below 0.4J cannot be used.
An error has occurred but the system is operational with limitations. Do not use
energies of 0.4J and below. Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check
attenuator shutter status in Service mode, Laser Deck-Shutter screen (see Figure
6-40). If error persists, replace the attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
158 Laser Deck - Attenuator not OUT Lasing_Stop Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check attenuator shutter status in
Service mode, Laser Deck-Shutter screen (see Figure 6-40). If error persists,
replace the attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
159 Laser Deck - Service Attenuator test fail Lasing_Stop Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check attenuator shutter status in
replace the MMCU, attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
160 Laser Deck - Service attenuator not IN Lasing_Stop Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check attenuator shutter status in
Service mode, Shutter screen (see Figure 6-40). If error persists, replace the
MMCU, attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
161 Laser Deck - Service Attenuator not OUT Lasing_Stop Verify COM connection from MMCU to shutter. Check attenuator shutter status in
replace the MMCU, attenuator PCB or solenoid shutter.
162 Laser Deck - Spare blast shield 1 Warning Verify that blast shield is properly inserted. Check if spare blast shield 1 is in place. If
in place check the microswitch harness or the MMCU.
163 Laser Deck - Spare blast shield 2 Warning Verify that blast shield is properly inserted. Check if spare blast shield 2 is in place. If
in place check the microswitch harness or the MMCU.
164 Laser Deck - Fiber status fail Lasing_Stop Check the correct operation of fiber connected switches using Laser Deck screen or
the MMCU (see Figure 6-40). Adjust the fiber switch. If error persists, replace the
fiber focus assembly.
Mirror Motor Errors
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-11

Troubleshooting

# Severity
167 Mirror Motor Error-Failed Find Home Fatal Check Mirror Motor Harnesses or the mirror motor. Cannot find Brick #1 position.
Check connection of harness between MM_PMCU and servo motor. Replace
harness if needed, or replace servo motor.
168 Mirror Motor Error-Mirror Motor test failed Fatal Check Mirror Motor Harnesses, the mirror motor or the MM PMCU. Check
connection of harness between MM_PMCU and servo motor. Replace harness if
needed, or replace servo motor or Servo Motor Board
169 Mirror Motor Error-Motor not in place (after 10 times Lasing_Stop An error was encountered operating at high repetition rate. It is possible to continue
failure) operating the system, but is recommended to reduce the repetition rate.
Recalibrate the mirror motor servo parameters using Servo Motor Calibration
screen. If the problem persists, check the mirror motor harnesses and the mirror
motor.
harness if needed, or replace servo motor. Adjust servo motor. (See ‘Servo Mirror
Calibration’ on page 7-33).
Perform ‘Servo Auto-Tune Procedure’ on page 6-68.
170 Mirror Motor Error-Mirror Motor over temperature Lasing_Stop Wait for the MM PMCU and the mirror motor to cool down. If the problem persists
check the MM PMCU, mirror motor harnesses and the mirror motor.
harness if needed, or replace MM_PMCU.
171 Mirror Motor Error-Mirror Motor General Failure Lasing_Stop Reinitialize the mirror motor using Laser Deck screen or restart the system. If the
problem persists check the MM PMCU, the mirror motor and its harnesses. Check
connection of harness between MM_PMCU and servo motor. Replace harness if
needed, or replace MM_PMCU.
172 Mirror Motor Error-Mirror Motor over Current Lasing_Stop Check the MM PMCU, the mirror motor and its harnesses. Check connection of
harness between MM_PMCU and servo motor. Replace harness if needed, or
replace MM_PMCU.
173 Motor not in place warning Do_Nothing Check connection of harness between MM_PMCU and servo motor.
Replace harness if needed, or replace MM_PMCU.
Suction Errors
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-12

Troubleshooting

# Severity
174 Suction Error - Test Suction Fail Warning Suction PCB or Suction motor fail. Check in Service Mode, Sub-system screen,
Suction Control. Replace MMCU
175 Suction Error - Suction Door Open and suction is Warning Close the suction door. If the door is closed check the pump head mounting, the
required to be operated suction harnesses or the MMCU. Check Suction PCB and harness between MMCU
and Suction PCB.
176 Suction Error - Suction Motor general status fail Warning Check that the suction motor is not jammed. Check the suction motor, its harnesses,
the suction motor board, the harnesses to the MMCU and the MMCU. Check
Suction PCB and harness between MMCU and Suction PCB. Replace MMCU if
needed.
177 Suction Error - Suction motor current fail Warning Check that the suction motor is not jammed. Check the suction motor, its harnesses,
the suction motor board, the harnesses to the MMCU and the MMCU. Check if
suction tubing is too thick. Replace if needed.
Cooling System Errors
180 Cooling System Error-Water conductivity sensor fail Warning Occurs when water conductivity is < 250kOhm. The system is operational, however
cooling water quality indicates that maintenance is required. Water conductivity
reading is out of range. Check water level, conductivity sensor and its harnesses or
the MMCU. Replace water, deionizer filter, and particle filter.
181 Cooling System Error-Water conductivity fail Warning The system is operational, however cooling water quality indicates that maintenance
is required. Water conductivity is too high (reading too low). Replace the water and
the filters.
182 Cooling System Error-humidity sensor fail Fatal The system is operational, however monitoring the environmental conditions has
been disabled. Please pay attention to proper air-conditioning. Check the Ambient
Humidity/Temperature Sensor using the Cooling screen, its harnesses or the
MMCU. Replace Temp/Humidity Sensor on optical bench.
183 Cooling System Error-Chiller over temperature Fatal An error has occurred and the system cannot lase. Please wait. If not resolved
status within 5 minutes, restart the system. Turn off simmers and the cooling system and
wait sufficient time for the cooling water to get below 35°C. Occurs when temp is
over 35°C. In Service Mode, check temp status. If temp is between 17-20°C, replace
chiller (gas unit).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-13

Troubleshooting

# Severity
184 Cooling System Error-Ambient Temp Sensor Fail Fatal The system is operational, however monitoring the environmental conditions has
been disabled. Please pay attention to proper air conditioning. Check the Ambient
Humidity/Temperature Sensor using Cooling screen, its harnesses or the MMCU.
Replace Temp/Humidity Sensor on optical bench.
185 Cooling System Error-Ambient Temp greater than Fatal Turn on treatment room air conditioning and wait until temp is < 30°.
40°C
186 Cooling System Error-Water Temp greater than Lasing_Stop The cooling system was unable to sustain the required temperature. If this
35°C, based on timeout happened after high lasing load wait for the system to cool down. If not, check the
cooling system. Cool the water until it reaches at 20°C. If error persists, replace the
gas unit (chiller).
187 Cooling System Error-Water temperature lower than Fatal Check the chiller status in the Cooling screen. Turn on the pump to heat the water
10°C until more than 10°C. Check the pressure gage (see ‘Troubleshooting Gas Unit
(Chiller) Errors’ on page 8-42).
188 Cooling System Error-Cooling Flow switch Error Fatal Check cooling water level, tubes connection. Check the water pump. Check the
water system harnesses or the MMCU. Check if enough water in system; add water
if needed. If error persists, replace flow switch.
189 Cooling System Error-Chiller Busy OFF Fatal Chiller was turned on less than 30 seconds after turning off. Wait for 30 seconds, if
not resolved check the chiller. Communication to chiller is faulty. Check harness
between MMCU and gas unit (chiller). Replace MMCU.
190 Chiller Busy ON Fatal Chiller was turned on less than 30 seconds after turning off. Wait for 30 seconds, if
not resolved check the chiller.
191 Cooling System Error-Chiller ON timeout, Comm Fatal Chiller ON timeout (communication OK, however chiller couldn’t be ON because of
OK, but chiller could not be ON because of unexplained error). Check the chiller. Try starting the cooling system manually using
unexplained error. the Cooling screen. Check on System Configuration screen to all versions are
existing and not displaying faulty version. Verify water temperature OK.
192 Cooling System Error-Chiller compressor status fail Fatal Check the Chiller status in the Cooling screen. Replace Chiller (gas unit).
193 Cooling System Error-Chiller Fan 1 Fail Fatal Chiller Fan 1 fail. In Cooling screen, Check the Fan, or the chiller itself. Replace
faulty Fan.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-14

Troubleshooting

# Severity
faulty Fan.
faulty Fan.
196 Cooling System Error-Chiller Freezing status fail Fatal The chiller has reached too low temperature and shut down to protect itself. Turn on
water pump to take gas unit out of freezing state. Check the chiller status and
replace if necessary.
197 Cooling System Error-Gas Unit temp over 75°C Fatal Check the Chiller status in the Cooling screen. Replace chiller (gas unit)
198 Cooling System Error-Chiller general status fail Fatal Check the Chiller status in the Cooling screen. Replace chiller (gas unit)
199 Cooling System Error-Chiller failed to reach 17°C Fatal Chiller failed to reach requested temperature (failed to reach required range (i.e. 20
±2°C within about 1.5 minutes ±2°C) within timeout) Check cooling system status. Possible cause-low energy from
one of the laser bricks. Verify energy in Holmium calibration screen. If problem
persists, replace chiller (gas unit).
200 Cooling System Error- Chiller Test Fail Fatal Check cooling system status. Check operating room temperature (should be
<30°C). If error persists, replace chiller (gas unit)
201 Cooling System Error-Gas pressure warning Warning Chiller gas pressure out of limits. The system can be operational. Replace chiller
(gas unit).
202 Cooling System Error-Gas pressure error Fatal Chiller gas pressure out of limits. The system can not be used. Replace chiller (gas
unit).
Charger Errors
203 Charger Error-Charger Fail (failed charging within Lasing_Stop Check the charger, and the safety module voltage monitoring circuits. Perform HV
timeout 300 ms) PMCU Calibration‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31. If error persists, replace charger.
204 Charger Error-Charger general failure Fatal Check the charger or the HV PMCU. Perform HV PMCU Calibration‘Charger, HV
PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31. If error
persists, replace HVPMCU or replace charger. For more details see
‘Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-209’ on page 8-46.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-15

Troubleshooting

# Severity
205 Charger Error-Capacitors imbalance failure Fatal Check the capacitor bank, its harnesses, the safety module and HV PMCU
calibration. Perform HV PMCU Calibration‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT
and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31. If error persists, replace
capacitor bank. For more details see ‘Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-
209’ on page 8-46.
206 Charger Error-Dump Fail (failed dumping within Fatal Capacitors bank discharge failed. Use EXTREME caution. Turn off the system to let
timeout x=120 sec) emergency dump discharge the capacitor bank. Before working on the system verify
capacitor bank discharge using the LED. Check that capacitors discharge from 800V
to 0V. If not, replace charger. For more details see ‘Troubleshooting Charger
Errors 204-209’ on page 8-46.
207 Charger Error-Capacitors voltage (±x%) Fatal Charger voltage reading different in 2 measurement channels. Check Safety module
or the HV PMCU calibration. With a DVM check on the HV PMCU that the capacitors
are between 7090-810V (refer to ‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and
Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31. If not, replace the charger. For more
details see ‘Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-209’ on page 8-46.
208 Charger Error-Charger test fail Fatal Check the charger status. Replace charger. For more details see
‘Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-209’ on page 8-46.
209 Discharge to required voltage (from high voltage to Fatal Check the ability to discharge the charger and charge it to various voltages.
low voltage) timeout (500 ms) Refer to ‘Troubleshooting Charger Errors 204-209’ on page 8-46.
SWM and Safety IGBT Errors
210 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM1 PS 24V Fail Fatal Check Switching module 1 or the HV PMCU. Check statuses in LVPS screen. Check
that 24V is coming from the LVPS. If 24V is present, create a bypass between
working and non-working SWM. If problem persists, replace HV PMCU.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-16

Troubleshooting

# Severity
214 SWM and Safety IGBT-PS 24V Fail Fatal Check Safety module or the HV PMCU. Check statuses in LVPS screen. Check that
24V is coming from the LVPS. If 24V is present, create a bypass between working
and non-working SWM. If problem persists, replace HV PMCU.
215 SWM and Safety IGBT-Test Safety IGBT Fail Fatal Check Safety module (‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31) or the HV PMCU. Replace Safety IGBT or the charger.
216 SWM and Safety IGBT-Safety IGBT Leakage Fail Fatal Check Safety module (‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31) or the HV PMCU. Replace Safety IGBT or charger.
217 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM1 IGBT Leakage Fail Fatal Check Switching module 1 or the HV PMCU. Replace SWM 1
220 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM4 IGBT Leakage Fail Fatal Check Switching module 4 or the HV PMCU Replace SWM 4
221 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM Ignition test fail Fatal Lamps ignition failed.This error appears with additional errors. Check additional
messages for more information. If problem persists, replace HV PMCU.
222 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM1 Simmer Fail Fatal Lamp 1 simmer failure. Check water quality, Switching module 1, HV harnesses,
ignition board, HV PMCU or the lamp. Possible cause: non-distilled water. Possible
fault with ignition board. Create a bypass between working and non-working SWM. If
problem persists, replace SWM 1 or flashlamp.
ignition board, HV PMCU or the lamp. Create a bypass between working and non-
working SWM. If problem persists, replace SWM 2 or flashlamp.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-17

Troubleshooting

# Severity
226 SWM and Safety IGBT-SWM1 Over temp fail Fatal Check Switching module 1 or the HV PMCU. Replace SWM 1, or HV PMCU.
234 Holmium Current Fail (low/high limit fail) Lasing_Stop Unstable current to flashlamp.In Service mode, Lasing Control Open Loop screen,
select each individual brick separately, set energy 60J, Rate 15Hz, fire the laser for
about 1 minute. Lamp with high current will cause F234, meaning flashlamp needs
to be replaced. If problem persists, replace safety IGBT or HV PMCU.
235 Nd:YAG Current Fail (low/high limit fail) Lasing_Stop N/A- for future use.
236 Test lasing fail (electric energy feedback or pyro Fatal This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging screen for
values fail during lasers test) additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults.
237 Safety IGBT over temperature Fatal Check Safety module or the HV PMCU. Replace Safety IGBT, or HV PMCU.
Calibration Errors
240 Calibrations - Ho system not calibrated - detected in Fatal This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Perform self test-Run All Tests.
user mode on startup that system not calibrated by Check the Logging screen for additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults.
service/manufacturing before)
241 Calibrations -Nd:YAG system not calibrated - Fatal N/A- for future use.
detected in user mode on startup that system not
calibrated by service/manufacturing before)
242 Calibrations -Ho system did not pass calibration Fatal This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging screen for
additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults.Check the output of each brick
individually (see‘Quality Laser Head Check’ on page 7-13).
243 Calibrations -Nd:YAG system did not pass calibration Fatal N/A- for future use.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-18

Troubleshooting

# Severity
244 Calibrations - Ho attenuator calibration failed Fatal In Service Mode, check attenuator; perform attenuator calibration. See
‘Calibration Screen-Holmium Attenuator Cal’ on page 6-64. If calibration did
not succeed, replace the attenuator.
245 Calibrations - Nd:YAG attenuator calibration failed Fatal N/A- for future use.
Lasing and Safety Errors
250 Lasing and Safety-Case Saver mode required Lasing_Stop Occurs when energy is reduced from 4 channels to 3, or from 3 channels to 2. In
(Downgrade possible) Service mode SWM screen, check channel performance for each brick. If all OK,
visually check the optical bench optics for any damage.
251 Lasing and Safety-Fail downgrade in Case Saver Fatal Occurs when energy is reduced from 4 channels to 3, or from 3 channels to 2. In
mode (downgrade impossible) Service mode SWM screen, check Simmer status for each brick. If all OK, visually
check the optical bench optics for any damage. Case saver mode impossible, too
many degraded bricks.
252 Lasing and Safety-Pyro main not equal pyro safe Lasing_Stop Check pyro calibrations. Check pyro board and harnesses. Check optics. In Service
Mode, perform ‘Pyro Detector Adjustment’ on page 7-24 and ‘Calibration and
Offset Adjustment’ on page 7-25.
If problem persists, replace Pyro board.
253 Lasing and Safety-Pyro low limit fail Lasing_Stop Check bricks performance. Check optics. Check cooling system. Check optical
bench alignment. In Service Mode, perform ‘Pyro Detector Adjustment’ on
page 7-24 and ‘Calibration and Offset Adjustment’ on page 7-25.
If problem persists, replace Pyro board.
254 Lasing and Safety-Pyro High Limit Fail Lasing_Stop Check pyro calibrations. In Service Mode, perform ‘Pyro Detector Adjustment’ on
page 7-24 and ‘Calibration and Offset Adjustment’ on page 7-25. If problem
persists, replace Pyro board.
255 Lasing and Safety-Safety OK status fail Lasing_Stop This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging screen for
additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults. Replace connection between HV
PMCU and MMCU. If problem persists, replace the MMCU.
256 Lasing and Safety-Capacitors voltage fail before Lasing_Stop Charger failed to fully recharge the capacitors in time. If repeated check the charger.
pulse delivered Perform ‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31. If problem persists, replace the charger.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-19

Troubleshooting

# Severity
257 Lasing and Safety-Pulse Rate Low (SW) Lasing_Stop Pulse rate control fault. Check MMCU and HV PMCU boards and harnesses. Check
the communication harness between MMCU and HV PMCU.
If problem persists, replace the MMCU.
258 Lasing and Safety-Pulse Rate High (SW) Lasing_Stop Pulse rate control fault. Check MMCU and HV PMCU boards and harnesses. This
fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging screen for additional
faults and troubleshoot the found faults. In Service Mode, check the operation of the
switching module (check each channel separately, in open loop) and charger and
mirror motor. If problem persists, replace the MMCU.
259 Lasing and Safety-HV PMCU SW detected incorrect Lasing_Stop Pulse control information was not passed correctly from MMCU to HV PMCU. If the
pulse data or did not receive data from MMCU within problem persists, check the HV PMCU, the MMCU and the harness between them.
required timeout In the Software Information screen, check that the software installed is compatible
with the system. If it is not, burn the MMCU SW (see ‘Power down the machine,
126).
261 Lasing and Safety-SW configured FPGA to a Lasing_Stop Burn HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
Holmium mode and fires pulse not to Bricks 1-3 mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126).
262 Lasing and Safety-Fire enable duration fail (HV Lasing_Stop Burn HV PMCU software (see ‘Power down the machine, and run it in user
PMCU FPGA safety error) mode, to verify full user start-up flow is OK.’ on page 6-126).
263 Lasing and Safety-Fire Enable time interval high limit Lasing_Stop Replace the HV PMCU.
exceeded (HV PMCU)
264 Lasing and Safety-Fire Enable time interval low limit Lasing_Stop Replace the HV PMCU.
exceeded (HV PMCU)
265 Lasing and Safety-Holmium Current Fail Lasing_Stop Current between two channels was different. Check the HV PMCU or the Safety
module. Unstable current to flashlamp. Replace safety IGBT or HV PMCU.
266 Lasing and Safety-Lamp DIfference Voltage Fail Lasing_Stop Capacitor bank voltage between two channels was different. Check the HV PMCU
potentiometers calibration or the Safety module. Perform HV PMCU Calibration; see
‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on
page 7-31. Replace HV PMCU or Safety IGBT.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-20

Troubleshooting

# Severity
267 Lasing and Safety-Ho Electric Energy sampled high Lasing_Stop Last pulse fired was above high threshold.Check the HV PMCU, Safety module or
limit fail the relevant SWM. Perform HV PMCU Calibration; see ‘Charger, HV PMCU,
Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31. Replace HV
PMCU or Safety IGBT.
268 Lasing and Safety-MMCU SW detected timeout on Lasing_Stop Internal error. This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging
delivering first pulse screen for additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults. In the Software
Information screen, check that the software installed is compatible with the system.
If it is not, replace the MMCU. Check if there is a short circuit on the harness
connected between the laser brick and switching module.
269 Lasing and Safety-Warm-up failed to get to the Lasing_Stop Check the condition of the laser channels. Check the water temperature.
threshold In Service Mode, check the MAIN and SAFE pyro. Check Laser Calibration Results.
See ‘Laser Bricks Calibration Screen’ on page 6-60.
If problem persists, replace the laser brick or Gas Unit.
270 System not operational for treatment. To operate the Lasing_Stop Please turn the keyswitch on and restart the self test. If not solved check the
system, turn the key switch ON, and restart system. keyswitch using external indicators window.
271 Lasing_Stop Please repeat‘Restart the process.’ on page 6-137.
272 Mirror motor index out of synchronization Lasing_Stop Mirror motor index out of synchronization. If the problem persists, perform Mirror
Motor Init using the laser deck window.
273 Safety OK H/W Line Fail Lasing_Stop General error; Of there is a problem in the H/W line between the MMCU FPGA and
HV FPGA, this error appears. Troubleshooting for other errors.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-21

Troubleshooting
8.5 LPU Errors

Error Name Error Severity Corrective Action
#
10 LPU-MMCU Communication error (recovery Fatal Check connection between LPU and MMCU. Burn MMCU software (see ‘Power
started) down the machine, and run it in user mode, to verify full user start-up flow is
OK.’ on page 6-126).
If problem persists, replace the MMCU.
11 Main Controller communication (recovery failed) Fatal Check connection between LPU and MMCU. Burn MMCU software (see ‘Power
down the machine, and run it in user mode, to verify full user start-up flow is
OK.’ on page 6-126). If problem persists, replace the LPU or MMCU.
For more information, see ‘Troubleshooting Error 11’ on page 8-48.
17 Missing system configuration file (Configuration Critical Configuration files are corrupted or missing, including the backup. Burn Hard Disk
File(s) Fault) SW. If problem persists, replace the hard disk.
18 Missing system configuration file (system presets Critical System preset files are corrupted or missing, including the backup. Please reinstall
file(s) Fault) the SW. If problem persists, replace the hard disk.
19 System parameters for specific unit - missing unit Critical Restore the calibration files using the backup or recalibrate the system.
configuration file(s) In Service Mode Calibration screen - Potentiometer calibration tab. Check that the
values have not been erased. Also, check that the Servo Motor mirror values are
correctly set. If not, perform calibration (See ‘Servo Mirror Calibration’ on
page 7-33), or contact Lumenis in order to receive the system data.
21 Failed to read file (system parameters) - version Critical SW version is incompatible. Please reinstall the SW. Burn the LPU/Hard Disk.
incompatibility (SW version and data files, not
compatible content is not as expected) - System
File(s) version incompatible Fault
22 Failed to read file (system presets) - version Critical System preset version compatibility issue was detected. SW version is incompatible.
incompatibility (SW version and data files, not Please reinstall the SW. Burn the LPU/Hard Disk.
compatible content is not as expected) - Presets
file(s) Version incompatible Fault
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-22

Troubleshooting
23 Failed to read file - data corrupted (system presets) Critical A problem was detected while reading system preset files. Configuration files are
corrupted or missing, including the backup. Please reinstall the SW. Burn the LPU/
Hard Disk. Replace the LPU/Hard Disk.
24 Failed to read file - data corrupted (system Critical A problem was detected while reading system files.
parameters) Burn the LPU/Hard Disk. Replace the LPU/Hard Disk.
25 User Preset error Warning A problem was detected while reading user preset files.
Create a User preset to prevent the error from reoccurring.
26 Failed to read file - data corrupted (unit parameters) Critical Unit parameters file is corrupted. Restore the calibration files using the backup or
recalibrate the system. In Service Mode Calibration screen - Potentiometer
calibration tab. Check that the values have not been erased. Also, check that the
Servo Motor mirror values are correctly set. If not, perform calibration (see ‘Servo
Mirror Calibration’ on page 7-33), or contact Lumenis in order to receive the
system data.
27 Failed to write the file - unknown problem Warning Failure to save data has occurred. System is operational but new data will not be
saved. Replace the LPU and Hard Disk.
28 Failed to write - disk is full Warning Failure to save data has occurred. Disk is full. Restart the system to cause automatic
disk cleaning. System is operational but new data will not be saved.
30 Laser Brick Configuration Lasing_Stop In Service Mode, select the correct brick configuration (normal or Type 2); press
SAVE and restart the system.
35 Data logging failure Warning Failure to save logging data has occurred. The system is operational. Log server is
not installed properly, please reinstall the SW.
38 System Configuration Error The system's HASP is missing, Please reconnect it, and restart. If the system is not
equipped with HASP, please contact GSO. The system has detected a configuration
problem. Please restart the system. For more details, refer to‘Troubleshooting
Error 38’ on page 8-44.
39 Configuration Error HASP Mismatch. System detected a configuration problem. Call Lumenis service.
40 Service HASP expired Warning Servicing the system is allowed only with a valid service HASP. Please update your
service HASP.
SIS Errors
46 Fiber Expiration Date error Warning The user can continue to perform lasing sessions.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-23

Troubleshooting
47 SIS - No communication with SIS card Fatal In Service Mode, access the SIS screen and verify the SIS data.
Check communication between the LPU and SIS board, and between the SIS board
and antenna. If problem persists, replace the SIS board or the antenna.
48 SIS-Fiber is not Lumenis Fiber (or no SIS detected) Lasing_Stop Check if using a Lumenis fiber. If using a Lumenis fibers, go to Service Mode,
access the SIS screen and verify the SIS data. Check communication between the
LPU and SIS board, and between the SIS board and antenna. If problem persists,
replace the SIS board or the antenna.
49 Fiber is about to reach maximum energy Do_Nothing The fiber is about to reach the maximum allowed accumulated energy. It is advised
to replace the fiber.
50 Fiber has reached maximum energy Lasing_Stop Fiber has exceeded the recommended number of uses. It is advised to replace the
fiber.
51 Fiber exceeded recommended # of uses Warning Replace the fiber.
52 Fiber reached max allowed session Lasing_Stop Replace the fiber.
53 SIS data error Warning In Service Mode, access the SIS screen and verify the SIS data.
Check communication between the LPU and SIS board, and between the SIS board
and antenna. If problem persists, replace the SIS board or the antenna.
54 Fiber session timing Error Warning Verify the system's time settings or replace the fiber. An error has occurred and the
system cannot lase due to a fiber session timing issue. Please make sure the
system's time is appropriately set and replace the fiber if the error persists.
55 Communication Protocol Error Warning Check MMCU, LPU or the harness between them.
56 Ambient Temperature Warning The room conditions do not allow operating the system due to high dew point.
Increase the air conditioning.
57 Self Test Timeout Warning Repeat the Self Test.
Communication Errors
59 Error missed request from MMCU to start self test Fatal Check MMCU, LPU or the harness between them. Communication problem with the
process (MMCU timeout) MMCU; check harness connections. If the problem persists, replace the MMCU.
60 Error missed requests from MMCU to start Error Fatal Check MMCU, LPU or the harness between them. Communication problem with the
Table (MMCU timeout) MMCU; check harness connections.
If the problem persists, replace the MMCU.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-24

Troubleshooting
61 Error missed requests from MMCU to start Fatal Check MMCU, LPU or the harness between them. There is a problem in the
Configuration files process (MMCU timeout) connection between the LPU and the MMCU. The MMCU did not request
configuration on startup. Restart the system. If the problem persists, this might
indicate a problem in the MMCU card.
69 Embedded SW versions mismatch Fatal Mismatch in embedded SW versions was found. Please reinstall all embedded and
FPGA versions.
Cooling Errors
56 Dew point higher than water temp Fault Fatal Check the clinical room temperature and humidity. Should meet requirements. (see
‘Environment Requirements’ on page 3-6).
Self Test Errors
57 Self Test timeout Lasing_Stop Communication problem with MMCU; verify voltage in LVPS - if OK, replace the
MMCU. If not, replace the LVPS.
58 Self test process failure (one of the tests completed Fatal This fault always appears with additional fault(s). Check the Logging screen for
with fail status) additional faults and troubleshoot the found faults.
Laser Deck Errors
62 Aiming beam off Warning Turn the aiming beam back on. In Service Mode, check aiming beam functionality.
(see ‘Calibration Screen-Aiming Beam Calibration’ on page 6-65).
63 Brick 1 not working Case Saver Mode Warning There is a problem with Brick 1/Channel 1. Brick 1 performance is insufficient, check
channel 1. The system can operate with the remaining 3 bricks. Create a bypass by
connecting a different SWM to a working channel. If the problem is resolved, replace
the faulty SWM. If the problem persists, inspect the channel 1 optics for any
damage. If no damage to the optics, replace the flashlamp or Brick 1.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-25

Troubleshooting
channel 3.The system can operate with the remaining 3 bricks. Create a bypass by
67 User declined to go to Case Saver Mode Fatal System is operating CaseSaver mode. Reduce room temp. System operation can
continue. Visually inspect the optics and check optical calibration, including Pyro
calibration.
68 Working in Reduced performance mode Warning System is operating CaseSaver mode. Reduce room temperature. System operation
can continue. Visually inspect the optics and check optical calibration, including Pyro
calibration.
69 Embedded SW versions mismatch Warning Mismatch in embedded SW versions was found. Please reinstall all embedded and
FPGA versions.
70 Dew point higher than water temp. Warning System is in Tropical Mode. Dew point higher than water temp. Reduce ambient
temp or increase water temperature to allow system operation in tropical mode.
Calibration Errors
74 System not calibrated properly Fatal Go to Service mode, calibration screen, perform ‘Calibration and Offset
Adjustment’ on page 7-25. Send log file to GSO, and repeat the process.
75 Calibration Timeout Lasing_Stop Go to Service mode, calibration screen, perform ‘Calibration and Offset
Adjustment’ on page 7-25. Send log file to GSO, and repeat the process.
76 System not ready for calibration Warning Perform ‘Calibration and Offset Adjustment’ on page 7-25. If problem persists,
replace the main controller (MMCU). Send log file to GSO, and repeat the process.
77 Calibration data send from LPU to MMCU for Lasing_Stop Check that the MMCU and LPU software versions are compatible with each other.
calibration is corrupted Send log file to GSO, and repeat the process.
78 Calibration interrupted in the middle Lasing_Stop There is a problem in MMCU calibration process. Restart the PC.
Send log file to GSO, and repeat the process.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-26

Troubleshooting
79 Failed to calibrate Brick 1 Fatal Open the optical bench, and inspect the optic components for damage.
Verify that the simmer is operating for brick #1 and that the output meets the required
spec (see ‘Quality Laser Head Check’ on page 7-13).
80 Failed to calibrated Brick 2 Fatal Open the optical bench and inspect the optic components for damage.
83 Brick 1 lamp has aged Fatal In Service Mode Calibration screen (Figure 6-51) check the spec of Brick #1.
If the data shows that the flashlamp is weak, replace the flashlamp.
86 Brick 4 lamp has aged Fatal In Service Mode Calibration screen (see Figure 6-51) check the spec of Brick #4.
87 If there are more than 2 bricks with SWM issues, Fatal In Service Mode Calibration screen (see Figure 6-51) check the spec of Bricks 1-
this error appears. #4 and functioning of switching module.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-27

8.6 Errors with No Error Number
Problem Corrective Action

Footswitch not identified MMCU Fault. Replace MMCU.
Display touchscreen not responding Replace display assy or MMCU
Change in aiming Beam Intensity Level not Replace the aiming beam or MMCU
responding
No audio/voice Replace speaker or LPU
No simmer from one of the laser bricks Create a bypass between the signals
from the switching to the laser brick to
determine if it is an electronic problem
or faulty laser brick.
Diode is not illumination intermittently Replace the diode.
8-28
Troubleshooting
8.7 HASP Reader Utility

The Lumenis Service HASP reader utility can read any HASP related
to Infinity and P120H systems, and displays the HASP’s information
and its license status.
The purpose of the tool is to provide the service engineer with:
• The HASP’s expiration date.

• Information on whether his HASP is OK to use.
Important: It is advised to run this application and check the
HASP's status at least 1 week prior to making a Service Call, to
verify that the HASP is OK.
Prerequisite:
This application requires that Microsoft .Net 4 be installed on your

computer. If your Windows version is 8 or above, you do not need to
perform any additional activity.
If you are running Windows 7, install the package (can be downloaded

via Partner Zone).
Run the dotNETFx40_full_x86_x64 file.
Figure 8-2 Run Net Package File
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-29

Note
If you receive the following message, “The .NET package is already
installed”, you may proceed to run the application.
Figure 8-3 Met Package Message
8-30
Troubleshooting
Running the Application
Note
The full package (ZIP file) can be downloaded and unzipped via
Partner Zone located in both the Infinity and the P120H software
folders.
Download and unzip the Lumenis Service HASP Reader Utility Zip
file.
Under the LumenisHaspReader folder, double-click Run Hasp Reader

to run the application.
Figure 8-4 Run HASP Reader
The application main screen appears, displaying 3 buttons:
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-31

Figure 8-5 HASP Reader Button
• Read: press this button to read the connected HASP content, and
display its status
• Clear Output: press this button to clear the output pane
• Export: press this button to save the output to a file, which can be
sent to Lumenis
Reading the HASP output

The tool will report the following information for every HASP it reads:
• HASP serial number

• HASP model
• If the HASP is a service HASP, it will report the name of the service
engineer
• If the HASP is a system HASP, it will report the S/N and P/N (GA-
xxxxxxx) of the system to which it is attached.
• The tool will then display the features which are found in the HASP,
and their status (if needed). An example of the HASP information
follows:
8-32
Troubleshooting
HASP is working normally

In this example:
• The HASP is OK
• This is a service HASP
• The service engineer's name is: S. Ayalon.
• The HASP contains the feature to service decathlon systems.
• The expiration date of this feature is 31st of July, 2016.
• (The HASP read was made prior to this date, thus the status of this
feature is ok)
In this case, the HASP is ready for use; no further action for the HASP
is required.
Figure 8-6 Example - HASP Working Normally
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-33

HASP Expired Example

Feature Expired message:
When a feature expires, the feature will not be allowed in Lumenis

systems.
Note: when this message is received, the HASP key is OK, but you
cannot use the feature which has expired.
Figure 8-7 Example - HASP Expired
In the above example, the service for Decathlon has expired on June
11th, 2015.
You will not be allowed to run service application on Decathlon

systems using this HASP.
In this case, please call Lumenis GSO to get an update for your HASP.
8-34
Troubleshooting
HASP Problem Example

In this example, the software running on the system will not recognize
the key. The HASP key must be replaced by Lumenis. Please call
Lumenis GSO for further assistance.
Figure 8-8 Example - HASP Problem
In the above example, the HASP attached has an internal error. This
HASP is not functional and the user cannot use it anymore.
In this case, this HASP must be returned to Lumenis.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-35

Clearing the output pane

Pressing the 'clear output' button will clear the output pane:
Figure 8-9 HASP Clearing Output Pane
8-36
Troubleshooting
Export
Pressing the Export button allows the service engineer to save the
output to a text file.
A dialog will open; select the target location of the file:
Figure 8-10 Export to Text File
Enter the filename, and the file will be created in the location which
you have selected.
A message will confirm that the operation ended successfully:
Figure 8-11 Export Confirmation Message
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-37

8.8 Debris Shield Maintenance

The debris shield optic is flat, with parallel sides and is AR coated on
both surfaces.The blast shield is a sacrificial optic that protects the
focus lens from smoke and debris in the event of a fiber failure (blown
fiber). Three blast shield optics are mounted on a user replaceable
aluminum bar. (A spare blast shield is shipped with the system).
After the blast shield optic is damaged, the entire mount must be
replaced. The blast shield optic is chemically bonded to the mount and
cannot be independently replaced.
The following section will address the subject of "blown blast shields"
and the causes for this problem.
Laser energy is focused at the center of the proximal endface of the

fiber.Due to the causes listed in the following topics, the fiber endface
will tend to absorb or scatter more laser energy than it transmits.During
laser operation, the temperature of the fiber endface will increase.When
the temperature exceeds the energy handling capacity of the fiber, the
heat generates a violent reaction within the fiber and fiber endface
"explodes".
This small scale "explosion" ejects sparks, hot gases, and debris away
from the fiber endface.While most of the debris is sent out of the lens
cell vents, some of the debris is directed toward the blastshield. The
blastshield sacrifices itself in the explosion, and in doing so, protects
the fiber focus lens from damage.The blastshield is now "blown", and
each additional laser pulse will create another explosion. The fiber and
blastshield need to be replaced before any further laser operation takes
place.
It is recommended that all customers carry additional fiber delivery

devices and a spare blastshield FRU.
1. The system is blowing blast shields.

a. Visually inspect Blastshield Optic for contamination or signs
of damage. Replace if necessary.
b. Verify fiber focus alignment.
c. Interview the customer to determine system usage to calculate
the failure rate and to collect other important information.Ask
the following questions:
-What type of fiber delivery device was in use at the time?
-How many times was this device used/sterilized?
-How much energy was put into the device?
8-38
Troubleshooting
-Could the failure be handling or procedure related?
If the blastshield glass was known to be new or clean at the time, the
optical alignment checks out to be normal, the fiber was new and was
being properly used, yet the system continues to consume blast-shields
at a high rate, check for contamination on the fiber focus lens.
d. Verify system transmission.

(Power out of fiber)
(Power out of OC
>=75%
The debris shield is a replaceable part that protects the internal optical
components of the laser from damage by a faulty or misused delivery
device.
The debris shield must be replaced if inspection reveals that it is

damaged.
To remove the Blast shield for inspection/replacement (see Figure

8-12):
1. Open the debris shield panel, located on the upper right-hand side
of the laser console.
Figure 8-12 Debris Shield Location
2. Grasp the debris shield handle, and pull the shield out of the
receptacle. Do not touch the Blast shield lens; finger oils may
damage the delicate optical coatings.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-39

3. Inspect the debris shield optic to verify that it is free of any burn
marks, scratches, dust, or fingerprints.
• If the optic is damaged or dirty, replace it with a new one.
• If the optic is free of damage, reinsert the debris shield into the
debris shield receptacle as instructed below.
Caution
The debris shield is usually damaged by a failed fiber; always

replace the fiber whenever you replace the debris shield.
Debris Shield lens
Figure 8-13 Debris Shield Lens Inspection
4. If the debris shield is not damaged, reinsert the debris shield into
the receptacle:
a. Holding the debris shield handle, position the shield so that the
pin is aligned with the pin receptacle.
b. Insert the debris shield into the debris shield receptacle.
5. Close the panel.
Figure 8-14 Reinsert Debris Shield
If an abnormal popping sound and decrease in energy persist,

troubleshoot the problem.
8-40
Troubleshooting
Note
There are spare debris shields in the compartment located at the
rear of the laser console. A notification appears in the notification bar
when there is no spare in the compartment.
Fiber Endface
1. The fiber endface explodes:
• The fiber may have been previously used or autoclaved (high
temperature sterilized) and/or its lifetime or wear rating has been
exceeded. This is probably most common with SIS SlimLine Bare
Fibers that are used more than once.
• The fiber (SMA end) may be damaged or contaminated which is
most commonly associated with improper handling of the fiber or
firing through a blown blastshield.
• Contamination on blastshield may be scattering or unfocusing laser
energy at the fiber endface. Typically, the causes are a fingerprint on
the blastshield glass, the glass has been previously cleaned or not
thoroughly cleaned, or the glass has suffered an earlier blast.
• The laser optical and the Transimpedance Detector alignment are not
centered.
• Contamination of fiber focus lens may be scattering or unfocusing
laser energy at the fiber end-face. This is usually caused by multiple
explosions where a small percentage of the debris may be making its
way to the fiber focus lens.
It is necessary to perform the Operational and Safety Checks after the
servicing and repair of the laser.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-41

8.9 Troubleshooting Gas Unit (Chiller)

Errors
When there is a chiller fault, first do the following:
1. Verify that the machine was turned off for at least 3 hours so that
the gas unit pressure stabilizes after machine operation.
2. In the Cooling screen, turn the pump ON and the Chiller ON.
3. Perform self-test (without lasing), which includes static and
working pressure test.
4. Observe the status LED indicators according to the list and table
below:
• Static pressure should be always above 110 psi. (Green)
• If static pressure is between 50-90 psi, Error 201 (Yellow,
Warning error)
• If static pressure is below 50 psi, Error 202 (Red, Fatal error)
• Working pressure should be always above 20 psi. (Green)
• If working pressure is between 10-20 psi, Error 201 (Yellow,
Warning error)
• If working pressure below 10 psi, Error 202 (Red, Fatal error)
Static Chiller Status Working Chiller Status LED Indicator Color

(Chiller OFF) (Chiller ON) and Description
>110 >20 psi Red: Fatal

>110 >20 psi Yellow: Warning
>110 >20 psi Green: Pass
*When static chiller status is less than 110, the system gives a warning;
when working chiller status is less than 20 psi, the system gives a fatal
error.
static = system at rest over 3 hours
5. Open the right side cover and check the gas unit pressure gage.
8-42
Troubleshooting
Note
Make sure that the system is OFF for at least 1 hour before checking
the pressure gage.
6. Observe indicator pointing to the black scale; it should be more

than 110 psi. If not and error 201/202 appear, replace the gas unit.
Note
There are now two types of pressure gage in the field; take note of
how to read the chiller pressure for each type of gage:
Figure 8-15 Gas Unit Pressure Gage
When receiving a new gas unit from stock, verify that the gas unit
pressure is >110psi.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-43

8.10 Troubleshooting Error 38

The following steps describe troubleshooting Error 38,
System Configuration error.
1. Open the cover, and observe the LPU board:

2. Locate the HASP which is connected on the system directly to a
USB port on the board.
3. Power up the system.
4. Verify a red light on the HASP as shown in Figure 8-16.
Figure 8-16 Red Light on HASP
From here, there are 2 options to follow (do not power down the
system):
• If you don’t see the red light, try to connect the hasp to another USB
port. If, you still don’t see the red light, the hasp is malfunctioning,
and must be replaced.
• If you see the red light, and you still get the error message dialog
with Error 38, switch to service application.
• If the service application is starting up, and showing error 38 (as
a warning) -> the LPU board is malfunctioning.
8-44
Troubleshooting
If the service application is not showing any error or warning, restart

the system.
The system should work OK, but the LPU board is defective and
should be replaced.
Error code 38 - SIS board can causes a short circuit on LPU USB port
Disconnect the SIS USB cable from the LPU , verify if the error
disappears; replace the SIS board.
Figure 8-17 Error 38 - LPU Board
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-45

8.11 Troubleshooting Charger Errors

204-209
The following steps describe troubleshooting Charger Errors:
204 Charger Error-Charger general failure

205 Charger Error-Capacitors imbalance failure
206 Charger Error-Dump Fail (failed dumping within
timeout x=120 sec)
207 Charger Error-Capacitors voltage (±x%)
208 Charger Error-Charger test fail
209 Discharge to required voltage (from high voltage to
low voltage) timeout (500 ms)
1. Turn the system on.

2. In user mode, verify the status of the LED on the left side of the
Charger.
• If the LED is lit red , the Charger is bad; replace the charger/
Figure 8-18 Charger LED Red - Charger Bad
8-46
Troubleshooting
3. If the LED is lit green, the Charger is good. In this case, perform
‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31.
Figure 8-19 Charger LED Green - Charger Good
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-47

8.12 Troubleshooting Error 11

The following steps describe troubleshooting Error 11,
Main Controller communication (recovery failed)
Follow the steps for troubleshooting this error after the LPU and the
MMCU were both replaced, and you are still getting Error 11. (Send
the log file for this system after replacing the MMCU and LPU board).
Also, the system is working OK, and sometimes displays this error
message.
In normal operation, observe the LEDs on both boards; the LEDs

should be ON (lit).
If no LEDs are lit on the LPU and on the MMCU unit, do the
following:
1. Replace the Ethernet cable between the LPU and the MMCU,
power up the system and see if the LEDS are now lit.
2. Try to connect a long Ethernet cable between the LPU and the
MMCU. Long cable: > 1 meter - 3 feet cable.
3. MCU: This LED indicates that communication on the MMCU is
OK (flickering is OK). This should be active immediately after
startup. If you don't see this LED, there is a problem with the
MMCU; replace the MMCU.
Figure 8-20 LED
8-48
Troubleshooting
LPU:
Normal operation: 2 LED indications in the Ethernet port:
1. Red LED should be fixed

2. Yellow LED should be flickering.
Figure 8-21 LEDs for LPU
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-49

8.13 Troubleshooting Checklist

The following is a general checklist and troubleshooting guide for
Pulse 120H. Procedures referenced in this section for adjustments,
alignments, calibrations and checks are provided in Chapter 7.
If any of the following components have been adjusted or replaced,

perform the related adjustments, alignments, calibrations, and checks.
8.13.1 Optics and Optics Related Components

1. Flashlamp, Rod, HR, OC, or Laser Brick:
• Resonator Alignment
• Fiber Alignment
• Check Calibration Value
• Perform Operational Check
2. First Relay/Second Relay Mirror

3. Servo Mirror/Servo Motor

• Orient Servo Mirror
• Fiber Alignment
4. First or Second 45 °Folding Mirror

• 45° Folding Mirror Alignment
• Fiber Alignment
5. Lens Cell Assembly

• Fiber Alignment
6. Aiming Diode Laser, Aiming Beam Mirror, Beam Combiner Optic
8-50
Troubleshooting
• Aiming Laser Alignment

8.13.2 PCBs
1. Optical Bench PCB
• Pyro Imaging Mirror Alignment
• Main and Safety Energy Pre-Amp Calibration
2. MMCU Board
• Confirm related software
3. MM - Mirror Motor Control Board

8.13.3 High Voltage Cabinet PCBs

1. Switching Module
• Perform full self test
2. HV PMCU
3. Safety IGBT
SM-0006900 Rev. G 8-51

8-52
C H A P T E R
MODULE REPLACEMENT
9.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the replacement procedures for the system
modules.
Warning
Before performing any replacement of modules or parts,
turn off the system and disconnect it from the main power,
unless the procedure to be followed indicates otherwise.
This section provides detailed instructions for replacing various

modules and components of the system.
When “Left” or “Right” are indicated, refer to the unit or module when
facing front.
9.2 Covers
Caution
Before removing the panels, always make sure that the system
is turned off and disconnected from the mains supply.
After system shutdown, make sure to wait at least 3 minutes
before opening the covers.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-1

The Pulse 120H is protected by several covers (see Figure 9-1). The
covers can be removed according to the following layout and
hierarchy:
Item Cover Hierarchy
1 Side covers (x2) Stand Alone
2 Top Cover Stand Alone
3 Upper Front Cover After #2
4 Front Cover After #1
5 Rear Cover After #1 and #2
6 Pump Cover Fixed
Figure 9-1 System Covers
The covers assembly and locking mechanism are based on fast access
hardware:
• Ball studs clips

• Snap in Latches
• At least one screw for each cover (6061 standard)
9-2
Module Replacement
Figure 9-2 Covers Assembly and Locking Mechanism
9.2.1 Opening the Right/Left Side Cover

The procedure for removing the left side and right side cover is the
same. The locking mechanisms of the side covers are located at the
bottom of the cover underneath the unit.
1. From underneath the unit at the bottom of the cover, release 1 Allen
screw and 2 latches.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-3

Figure 9-3 Side Door Latches and Screw, Inside View
2. Remove the side cover.
9.2.2 Removing the Top Cover

The top cover includes the utility lid which stores the spare blast
shields and covering for the display chain tray. The top cover must be
removed when replacing any components in the optical bench.
1. Lift up the utility lid.
9-4
Module Replacement
Figure 9-4 Lifting Utility Lid
2. Remove the 2 screws under the top cover.
Figure 9-5 remove 2 Screws under Utility Lid
3. Slightly pull the cover towards you and lift the top cover up and out
of its position.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-5

Figure 9-6 Removing Top Cover
9.2.3 Opening the Upper Front Cover
Removal
1. Make sure that the system is turned off and is disconnected from
the main power.
2. Remove the fiber from the fiber port.
Figure 9-7 Remove Fiber from Fiber Port
9-6
Module Replacement
Note
Open the blastshield door to access the screw on the left side (see
Figure 9-8).
Figure 9-8 Blastshield Door
3. Loosen the two Philips screws (one on each side) holding the upper
front cover to the chassis.
Figure 9-9 Screws of Upper Front Cover (Left Side Screw)
4. The upper front cover swings open downward.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-7

Figure 9-10 Front Cover Removal
5. Disconnect the SIS fiber harnesses.
9.2.4 Lower Front Cover Removal

1. Remove the upper front cover (see ‘Opening the Upper Front
2. Release the 4 spring screws from each side of the cover (2 on each
side).
9-8
Module Replacement
Figure 9-11 Lower Front Cover Screws
3. Remove the lower front cover and set it to the side. The power
harness can remain connected in order to allow system turn-on.
Figure 9-12 Lower Front Cover Removal
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-9

9.2.5 Removing the Optical Bench Cover

1. Remove the system Top cover (see ‘Removing the Top Cover’ on
page 9-4).
2. Remove the front cover (see ‘Opening the Upper Front Cover’ on
page 9-6)
3. Using a 7/32” screwdriver, release the 1 large Allen screw of the
display support as shown.
Figure 9-13 Allen Screw, Display Support
4. Swing the touchscreen display assembly out from its original

position over the optical bench [A] to next to the optical bench [B]
gain access.
.
A B
Figure 9-14 Swing Touchscreen out of Position
9-10
Module Replacement
5. Remove 7 screws of the optical bench cover: 3 on each long side, 3

on the top side, and an additional screw in the front.
Figure 9-15 Optical Bench Cover Removal
9.3 Water Draining Procedure
9.3.1 Introduction and Tools

The water needs to be drained from the system when transporting to a
different site. This is to prevent damage to the system as water can
freeze during transport.
The water also needs to be drained from the system when replacing the
following parts:
• Optical Bench components (brick, lamp or rod)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-11

• Chiller (Gas Unit)

• Cooling System parts (deionizer, particle filter)
There is no need to drain the entire system of water; water may be
drained from each of the above modules separately.
There are two types of draining tube sets to be used for the three
different draining procedures. They are as follows:
For draining water from the Gas unit and/or optical bench, use the set
of tubes in Figure 9-16 which includes:
1. Pump with Tube, Female connection

2. Drain Tube with Female connection
Figure 9-16 Drain Tools Set - Gas Unit and Optical Bench
For draining water from the cooling system, use the set of tubes in
Figure 9-17 which includes:
1. Pump with Tube, Male connection

2. Drain Tube with Male connection for water “short circuit”
3. Drain Tube with right-angle (elbow) connection for draining water
tank
9-12
Module Replacement
Figure 9-17 Drain Tools Set - Cooling System
Warning
Before performing any draining procedure, make sure that
the system is turned off and power is disconnected from
the main wall power.
9.3.2 Draining Water from the Optical Bench

Before replacing any component of the brick (rod, lamp, pod), drain the
water from the optical bench as follows:
1. Remove the top cover (see ‘Removing the Top Cover’ on page 9-4).
2. Remove the left side cover (see Figure 9-18).
3. Remove the air valve from the top of the water tank.
4. Using both hands, open the 2 large water quick-connectors between
the cooling system and optical bench (IN/OUT, see Figure 3-19, #3
and 4).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-13

3
4
Figure 9-18 Water Quick-Connectors
5. From the Drain/refill kit, take the tube with female connection and
connect it to one of the large IN/OUT tubes coming from the
optical bench.
6. Attach the pump tool female connector to the other large IN/OUT
tube coming from the optical bench.
7. Plug the pump tool into the wall power outlet.
Figure 9-19 Draining Water from the Optical Bench
9-14
Module Replacement
9.3.3 Draining Water from the Gas Unit

Before replacing the gas unit, drain the water from the gas unit as
follows:
1. Remove the left side and right side covers (see ‘Opening the Right/
Left Side Cover’ on page 9-3).
2. Using both hands, open the 2 large water quick-connectors coming
from the gas unit.
3. Attach the drain tool female connector to one of the two open
connectors on the gas unit (it does not matter which one you use-
see Figure 3-19, #1 or 2).
Note
You may need to pull the gas unit partially out of its location to gain
better access.
4. Attach the pump tool to the other open connector on the gas unit
(see Figure 3-19, #1 or 2).
6. Prepare a bucket to catch the water, place the drain tool open end
into the bucket, and turn on the pump; the water starts to drain from
the gas unit.
Figure 9-20 Draining Water from Gas Unit
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-15

9.3.4 Draining Water from the Cooling System

The entire system must be drained of water before shipping the system.
1. Remove the left side cover (see ‘Opening the Right/Left Side
2. Open the air valve on top of the water tank.
Figure 9-21 Open Air Valve on Water Tank
3. Using both hands, open all 4 large water quick-connectors, 2

coming from the cooling system and 2 coming from the gas unit.
4. Disconnect the tube from the water tank’s lower quick-connector
and connect the drain tool in its place.
9-16
Module Replacement
Figure 9-22 Disconnect Tubes from Water Tank
5. Attach the other drain tool tubes as follows, referring to Figure 9-

23:
a. Connect the pump tool to the connector [2].
b. Create a water “short” by using the short tube tool, connecting
it between connectors [3] and [4].
Note
Connector [1] remains open.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-17

Figure 9-23 Water Tube Connections for Draining

7. Prepare a bucket to catch the water, place the drain tool’s open end
into the bucket, and turn on the pump; the water starts to drain from
the cooling system. Observe that the water level in the particle filter
goes down.
8. Open the particle filter and empty any remaining water left inside
the particle filter. (You may have to remove the supporting bar to
gain access).
9. When there is no more water in the system, disconnect all the drain
tubes from the system and reconnect the system’s water tubes.
10. Before sending the system for shipment, tape the air valve to the
side of the reservoir - do not put it back in its location in the water
tank.
9-18
Module Replacement
Figure 9-24 Tape Air Valve to Water Tank
9.4 Charger Replacement
9.4.1 Removal
1. Make sure that the system is turned off, circuit breaker is OFF (UP)
and the power cable is disconnected from the main wall power.
2. Remove all the system covers.
3. Disconnect the two plugs: 1 coming from the line filter, and the
other coming from the motherboard (see Figure 9-25).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-19

Figure 9-25 Charger Replacement- Disconnect 2 Plugs
4. To gain access to the top part of the charger, do the following:

a. Release 4 Philips screws of the capacitor bank plastic
protective cover to gain access to the top part of the charger
(see Figure 9-26).
Figure 9-26 Charger Replacement- Remove Capacitor Bank Cover
b. Release the two cables, black and white and remove the tie-
wrap (see Figure 9-27).
9-20
Module Replacement
Figure 9-27 Charger Replacement- Remove Wires
5. Release 4 large Philips captive screws holding the charger in its

place (see Figure 9-28).
Figure 9-28 Charger Replacement- Captive Screws
6. Gently slide the charger out of its location.

7. Release 6 small Philips screws (2 on upper bracket, 4 on lower
bracket) to remove the brackets you will need to assemble them
back on to the new charger.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-21

Figure 9-29 Charger Replacement- Bracket Screws
9.4.2 Charger Installation

The module is mounted on a metal track attached to the chassis. When
installing the module, make sure the module is aligned to slide on the
track.
1. Mount the brackets back onto the new charger. Do not tighten them
all the way.
2. Push the module halfway into its space on the chassis.
3. Connect the 2 plugs (see Figure 9-25).
4. Push the module the rest of the way into its space.
5. Tighten the large captive screws (see Figure 9-28).
6. Tighten the bracket handles (see Figure 9-29).
7. After replacing the charger, perform ‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety
IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31.
9.4.3 Speaker Replacement

1. Remove the charger to gain access. (see ‘Charger Replacement’ on
page 9-19).
2. Release the 4 screws and single plug.
3. Remove the speaker from its location.
9-22
Module Replacement
Figure 9-30 Removing Speaker
9.5 Capacitor Bank Replacement

The capacitor bank wiring configuration is as follows:
Figure 9-31 Capacitor Bank Wiring
Wire # Description
1 (-) harness to safety IGBT
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-23

2 Ground (GND)
harness to safety IGBT
3 (+) harness to safety IGBT
4 (+)
5 (+)
9.5.1 Removal
3. Release 4 Philips screws of the capacitor bank plastic protective
covers (see Figure 9-26).
4. Remove the following wires in the following order:
• Wires # 4 and 5
• Wires # 1, 2, 3 – harnesses to safety IGBT.
5. Remove the three screws (2 on the upper bracket and 1 on the lower
part of the capacitor bank, see Figure 9-32).
Figure 9-32 Capacitor Bank Removal-Remove Screws
9-24
Module Replacement
6. Slide the capacitor out of its location.
9.5.2 Installation
1. Mount the capacitor bank on its track and slide it in, making sure
that it engages with the mounting pins at the back and the base is
firmly on its track. Tap the module lightly until it goes all the way
in.
Figure 9-33 Capacitor Bank Installation - Align on Track
2. Tighten the three screws back on.

3. Connect the wires in reverse order as above. Make sure that wire #1
and #4 are routed into the groove of the capacitor bank frame (See
Figure 9-34). Secure them with a tie-wrap mount on the lower left
of the frame as shown.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-25

Tie-wrap
mount
Figure 9-34 Routing Capacitor Bank Wires
4. Install the plastic protective cover back onto the capacitor bank.
5. After replacing the capacitor bank, perform ‘Charger, HV PMCU,
Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on page 7-31:
9.6 LVPS Replacement
9.6.1 LVPS Removal

Systems up to and including series number 006 in the field have an old
type LVPS installed; this procedure describes the steps for replacing
the LVPS with the new Lambda type LVPS.
Caution
Throughout the procedure, take care to carefully remove screws

and washers so that they do not fall inside the system.
2. Open the left and side covers (see ‘Opening the Right/Left Side
Cover’ on page 9-3.)
3. Remove the ground wire from the left side of the chassis.
9-26
Module Replacement
Figure 9-35 Remove Ground Wire
4. From the left side of the system, remove the small plastic cover
covering the line filter wires on the LVPS, and disconnect all three
line filter wires. (Brown = phase, blue = neutral, green/yellow =
GND). NOTE: The line filter harness will be completely removed,
as the new LVPS is shipped with a new line filter harness (P/N HS-
1004410).
Figure 9-36 Remove Plastic Cover
5. From the right side of the system, do the following: Remove the
following connectors:
• 4-pin Molex plug going from the LVPS to MMCU.
• 4-pin plug going on the DC/DC card (see Figure 9-37).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-27

• Molex plug going to the motherboard (through the hole).
Figure 9-37 Removing LVPS
6. Release two Philips captive screws and slide the LVPS slightly out
of its location.
Figure 9-38 Release Two Captive Screws
7. Disconnect the wires going to the LVPS.
Note
Use a permanent marker or stickers to mark the wire location in
order to correctly reconnect them later. See diagram below:
9-28
Module Replacement
Figure 9-39 LVPS Terminal Point Layout
8. Remove the LVPS from its location, together with the DC/DC
board on top.
9. Turn the LVPS over and remove the 4 screws to separate the
bracket from the LVPS.
Figure 9-40 LVPS Mounting Screws
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-29

10. Transfer the DC/DC board to the new LVPS:

a. Remove the spacers from underneath the DC/DC board.
b. Mount the DC/DC Board onto the new LVPS and tighten with
the screws (spacers not needed).
c. Reconnect the 2-pin Mollex connector to the DC/DC board.
Figure 9-41 Transfer DC/DC Board to New LVPS
11. Situate the LVPS in its location without pushing it all the way in.
12. Reconnect the wires according to the table above.
13. Push the LVPS completely into its location, making sure the LVPS
engages with the tab on the chassis.
9-30
Module Replacement
Figure 9-42 Install New LVPS
Note
The next steps involve gaining access to the line filter harness to
disconnect it from the isolation transformer side, since the new LVPS
comes with a new line filter harness. In order to gain access to the
line filter, the isolation transformer must be moved partially out of the
way.
Note
Mark all disconnected wire locations in order to correctly reconnect
them later.
14. From the left side of the system, disconnect the wires of the
Isolation Transformer, and remove its upper captive screws.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-31

Figure 9-43 Disconnect Transformer Wires- Left Side
15. From the right side of the system, disconnect the wires and release
the lower captive screws of the isolation transformer.
Figure 9-44 Disconnect Transformer Wires- Right Side
16. From the right side of the system, pull the Isolation Transformer
Box slightly out of its location to gain access to the line filter.
17. Remove the end of the line filter harness from the line filter, which
is located above the isolation transformer.
9-32
Module Replacement
Figure 9-45 Disconnect Line Filter
18. Take the line filter harness connected to the new LVPS, and
connect the other end to the terminal where you removed the old
line filter harness, as in step 17.
19. Install the isolation transformer back into its location and reconnect
all the wires of the isolation transformer, according to the marked
wires. Reconnect the GND wire to the chassis.
20. Turn on the system and complete the Self Test – Run all Tests.
21. Close the system covers.
9.6.2 DC/DC Board Replacement

The DC/DC Board is located on top of the LVPS. The LVPS must be
removed in order to gain access to the DC/DC Board.
1. Open the side covers.

2. From the right side of the system, disconnect the 4-pin Molex plug
from the DC/DC card.
3. From the left side of the system, disconnect the 3-pin Molex plug
from the DC/DC card.
4. With a short Philips screwdriver, remove the four screws and
washers securing the DC/DC Board to its location and remove the
board.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-33

Figure 9-46 DC/DC Board Replacement
5. Install the DC/DC Board by following the above steps in reverse

order.
6. Turn on the system and perform Self Test with Laser and verify that
the self test executes successfully.
9.7 Main Controller (MMCU)

Replacement
3. On the right side of the system, remove the inner protective cover
on the right side of the console by releasing 10 screws.
9-34
Module Replacement
Figure 9-47 Remove Protective Inner Cover
4. Disconnect the following harnesses:

• J3 - 4-pin Molex coming from LVPS
• J2 – harness from cooling and chiller control
• J5 – harness from LPU
• J1 to optical bench and front panel
• flat cable to motherboard
• 2 x D-type harnesses, 1 to optic bench servo mirror motor and 1
to suction pump
• 1 harness
5. Remove the MMCU board by releasing 6 screws.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-35

Figure 9-48 MMCU Removal - 6 Screws
6. Install the MMCU Board by following the above steps in reverse

order.
7. After installing the MMCU Board, go to Service Mode; in the main
screen, verify that there is communication of MMCU software
version and MMCU FPGA SW version.
8. Verify accurate software envelope.
9. Run Self Test (Run All Tests).
the table (Service Mode, Closed Loop), fire the laser and record the
results.
Pulse Energy Pulse Rate Hz Acceptance Range [V] Results

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
*Fire the laser for 1 minute.
9-36
Module Replacement
9.8 LPU (Lumenis Computer) and Hard

Disk Replacement
Before replacing the LPU, the potentiometer values and the degree
values of each brick must be exported for backup. They will be
imported and reloaded into the LPU after replacing the LPU. (See
‘Import/Export Operations - Export Data to USB’ on page 6-30.)
1. Go to the Service screen, Calibration Screen | Potentiometer

Calibration screen.
2. Record the follow values in the Potentiometer calibrations screen:
• MainPyroGain
• MainPyroHolGan
• SafetyPyroGain
• SafetyPyroHolGain
3. Record the follow degree values of each brick in the Servo Motor
calibration screen.
9.8.1 LPU Removal

the main power.
3. On the right side of the system, remove the inner metal cover on the
right side of the console by releasing 10 screws (see Figure 9-47).
4. Disconnect all the harnesses from the top of the LPU.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-37

Figure 9-49 LPU Removal - Disconnect Harnesses
5. Release 4 captive screws holding the LPU to the chassis and

remove the LPU with its bracket from the chassis.
Figure 9-50 LPU Removal - Mounting Screws
9-38
Module Replacement
6. Remove the 4 Philips screws holding the LPU to its bracket.

7. Replace the Hard Disk (see ‘Hard Disk Replacement’ on page 9-
39).
8. Replace the LPU; see Figure 9-51 for proper harness connections.
Figure 9-51 LPU Proper Harness Connections
9.8.2 Hard Disk Replacement

1. Remove the LPU from the system (See ‘LPU Removal’ on page 9-
37).
2. Turn the LPU over and remove the 4 Philips screws holding the
hard disk onto the LPU.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-39

Figure 9-52 Hard Disk Removal
3. Replace the hard disk.

4. Mount the LPU back in its location. Make sure all the harness
connections and the routing is according to Figure 9-53. Use tie-
wraps where needed.
Figure 9-53 LPU Routing
5. Turn on the system and go to Service Mode;
9-40
Module Replacement
6. Perform ‘HASP Authorization for the system with New LPU/Hard

Disk’ on page 6-123.
7. In the Calibration | Potentiometer Calibrations screen, use the left
(<) and right (>) arrows to set the values that were recorded at the
beginning of the procedure:
• MainPyroGain
• MainPyroHolGan
• SafetyPyroGain
• SafetyPyroHolGain
8. Press Save.
9. Perform ‘Servo Mirror Calibration’ on page 7-33.
results.

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
*Fire the laser for a full 2 minutes.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-41

9.9 SIS Board Replacement
9.9.1 Removal
the main power.
2. Open the front and top covers.
3. Remove the 2 SIS board connectors.
4. Remove the 2 captive screws and remove the SIS board from the
chassis.
Figure 9-54 SIS Board Connections
5. Remove the 4 Philips screws to take the SIS board off of its bracket.
Figure 9-55 Remove SIS Board
9-42
Module Replacement
9.10 AC Controller Board Replacement

The AC Controller Board is located inside a compartment at the bottom
of the console’s right side.
9.10.1 AC Controller Board Removal

the main power.
2. Open the door to the AC controller by manually opening the 2
screws.
Figure 9-56 AC Controller Door
3. Disconnect the 7 harnesses and Ground wire.

4. Remove the 6 Philips screws holding the board to its location and
remove the board.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-43

Figure 9-57 AC Controller Connections
9.10.2 Installation
After replacing the AC Controller, check the jumper on J8 of the AC
controller. Verify that the jumper is connected to the voltage
corresponding to the reading received on the DVM. If not, move the
jumper to the correct voltage (see Installation chapter, ‘AC Controller
Configuration’ on page 3-11).
9.11 Circuit Breaker Replacement

1. Remove the Rear Cover.
2. Remove the inner plastic fan cover by releasing 4 screws by the
brake (2 on the left and 2 on the right).
3. Remove the 8 screws of the circuit breaker cover.
4. Disconnect the circuit breaker: 2 power IN and 2 power OUT wires.
5. Release the 4 screws holding the circuit breaker to its bracket.
9-44
Module Replacement
9.12 HV Cabinet Replacement

The HV cabinet houses 4 switching boards, the safety IGBT board and
the HV PMCU Board.
Figure 9-58 HV Cabinet Layout
1. Remove the front cover (see ‘Opening the Upper Front Cover’ on
page 9-6).
2. Remove the protective inner cover (see ‘Lower Front Cover
Removal’ on page 9-8).
3. Remove the EMI cover protective cabinet cover (this cover reduces
electronic noise). Release eight screws to remove the cover (see
Figure 9-59).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-45

Figure 9-59 Remove EMI Cover
4. For each Switching PCB, do the following:

a. Release the 2 lock nuts (1 upper and 1 lower).
b. Disconnect the 2 plugs: upper plug going to the optical bench,
and the lower plug going to the IGBT. Cut tie-wraps where
needed.
Note
Make note of the routing and tie-wraps securing the plug and ferrite;
correct routing is important to avoid pinching of the wires when
closing the EMI cover after PCB replacement.
c. Use the handle to slide the PCB out of its housing.
Figure 9-60 Removing Switching PCB
9-46
Module Replacement
Note
After replacing any of the PCBs in the HV cabinet and before re-
installing the EMI cover, make sure the plugs and ferrites are
correctly routed in the groove and secured with tie-wraps as before;
closing the cabinet after PCB replacement.
Figure 9-61 Wire Routing Before Closing EMI Cover
5. After replacing the Switching PCB, turn on the system, run Self
Test (Run All Tests).
results.

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-47


1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
7. To remove the safety IGBT:

a. Disconnect the three plugs.
b. Release the 2 lock nuts (1 upper and 1 lower).
c. Use both handles to slide the PCB out of its housing.
Figure 9-62 Remove Safety IGBT
d. After replacing the safety IGBT, perform ‘Charger, HV

PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank Calibration’ on
page 7-31.
8. Turn on the system run Self Test (Run All Tests).
9-48
Module Replacement
results.

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
10. To remove the HV PMCU:

a. Disconnect the three plugs.
b. Release the 2 lock nuts (1 upper and 1 lower).
c. Slide the PCB out of its housing.
Figure 9-63 Remove HV PMCU
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-49

11. When installing the boards, make sure they are aligned in its groove
and that it engages with the female plug connector inside its
housing.
Note
After replacing any of the PCBs in the HV cabinet and before re-
installing the EMI cover, make sure the plugs and ferrites are
correctly routed in the groove and secured with tie-wraps as before;
closing the cabinet after PCB replacement.
Figure 9-64 Wire Routing Before Closing EMI Cover
12. Turn on the system and go to Service Mode;

13. Perform ‘Charger, HV PMCU, Safety IGBT and Capacitor Bank
Calibration’ on page 7-31.
results.
9-50
Module Replacement

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
9.12.1 Mirror Motor Control Board Replacement

1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system from the main wall
power.
2. Open the optical bench cover (see ‘Removing the Optical Bench
3. Disconnect the four harnesses: J1, J2, J4, J5
4. Remove the mirror motor board by releasing the 4 Philips screws.
Figure 9-65 Remove Mirror Motor Board
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-51

5. Replace the Mirror Motor Board.

6. Reconnect the harnesses J1, J2, J4, and J5.
7. Turn on the system and go to Service Mode; in the main service
screen, verify that Mirror Motor software corresponds to the system
software configuration. If not, burn the appropriate software.
8. Perform ‘Restart the process.’ on page 6-137.
results.

0.2 5 0.9 - 1.1
0.5 40 18-22
0.5 80 36-44
1 10 9-11
1 40 36-44
1.5 15 20.25 - 24.75
2 30 54 - 66
2 40 72 - 88
2 50 90 - 110
2* 60 108 - 132
2.4 50 108 - 132
4 10 36 - 44
9.12.2 Fan Replacement - Console Bottom

|The two ventilation fans are located under the chassis underneath the
console.
9-52
Module Replacement
Figure 9-66 Fan Replacement
1. Disconnect the single fan plug.

2. Release 4 screws, 2 screws on each side of the fan.
Figure 9-67 Fan Removal- 4 Screws
3. Remove the fan.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-53

9.13 RF ID Antenna Replacement
9.13.1 Removal
the main power.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Lift up the protective circle and gently remove the antenna from its
location.
9.13.2 Installation
1. Perform the steps for installation in reverse order, making sure that
the antenna is installed such that the plug can be correctly
connected to the main CPU board without twisting its cable.
2. Verify SIS identification after installation.
9.14 Display Assembly Replacement

The display assembly may be replaced in two ways:
• Replacing the display assembly together with supporting arm

• Replacement of the display screen only
9.14.1 Display Assembly Replacement with Arm

1. Remove the tray cover of the console.
2. Remove the cap from the center of the display rotating tray.
9-54
Module Replacement
Figure 9-68 Remove Display Tray Cap
3. Using a C-ring removal tool, remove the C-ring and metal ring on
the arm.
Figure 9-69 Removing C-Ring and Metal Ring
4. Remove the 2 small screws holding the display harness and chain
and disconnect the harness and chain from the display rotating tray.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-55

Figure 9-70 Remove 2 Screws - Display Harness and Chain
5. Using a 7/32” screwdriver, release the 1 large Allen screw as

shown.
Figure 9-71 Removing Allen Screw - Display
6. Lift the display and supporting arm up and out of its location.
9-56
Module Replacement
Figure 9-72 Remove Display and Arm
Display Assembly Replacement - Touchscreen

Screen Only
1. Rotate the screen all the way to the right so as to be away from the
top of the tray.
2. Release 4 screws of the display frame.
Figure 9-73 Remove Touchscreen
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-57

3. Gently open the display and separate it from its frame. Be careful
not to let the touchscreen fall out.
Figure 9-74 Disconnect Touchscreen Harnesses
4. Disconnect the 3 connectors in back of the display.

5. Cut the tie wraps holding the harnesses and remove the touchscreen
from its frame.
6. Remove the display screen out of its frame.
9.14.2 Pump Head Replacement

1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the main wall power.
2. Remove the tubing from the pump head. Close the pump head.
3. Lift the utility lid of the system top cover (see Figure 9-4).
Figure 9-75 Lifting Utility Lid
9-58
Module Replacement
4. Push down on the pump head tab while at the sam time, gently twist
the pump head in a counter-clockwise direction approximately
30°). (see Figure 9-76).
Figure 9-76 Pump Head Removal
5. Lift the pump head straight up and out of its location.

6. To install the new pump head, refer to Figure 9-77: Take the new
pump head and pull it out to its open position.
7. Use the guiding tabs and align them with the pump head base holes.
The pump head should be turned at an angle (about 30°). Then seat
the pump head onto the tabs.
Figure 9-77 Head Pump Installation [1]
When the pump head is fully seated on the tabs, gently twist the pump
head clockwise until the pump head is full installed straight in its
location (see Figure 9-78).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-59

Figure 9-78 Head Pump Installation[2]
After replacing the pump head, check the suction control performance
(see ‘Suction Control Screen’ on page 6-54).
9.15 Gas Unit Replacement

The gas unit (chiller) module is shipped with a special cart to enable
easier installation, since the unit is very heavy.
Note
For instruction on how to use the modified type cart, see ‘Modified
Gas Unit Cart’ on page 9-76.
9-60
Module Replacement
Gas Unit Cart
Gas Unit on Cart

Figure 9-79 Gas Unit (Chiller) and Cart
The chiller also comes with a metal supporting bracket attached to it.
|This will be removed from the new gas unit and mounted on the faulty
gas unit in order to set the faulty gas unit on the floor without falling
when removing it from the system.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-61

Figure 9-80 Gas Unit Location - Removal Direction
For guidelines on troubleshooting gas unit (chiller) errors, see

‘Troubleshooting Gas Unit (Chiller) Errors’ on page 8-42.
Note
Take care not to cause injury to your fingers; sections of this
procedure require use of hands with sharp metal materials, locking
and sliding mechanisms.
Take care to use proper lifting techniques to prevent back injury. The
gas unit is very heavy!
1. Disconnect the power cable from the main wall power outlet.
2. Lock the machine’s wheel brake: press the right/red brake.
3. Open the left and right side covers (see ‘Opening the Right/Left
Side Cover’ on page 9-3.
4. Release the 4 metal latches (2 on each side) to unlock the gas unit
from the chassis (see Figure 9-81).
Figure 9-81 Release Metal Latches from Gas Unit
5. Disconnect the ground wire between the gas unit and the chassis
(see Figure 9-81).
9-62
Module Replacement
Figure 9-82 Disconnect Ground Wire from Gas Unit
6. Disconnect 2 water connectors going to the chiller (water

connectors [1] and [2] in Figure 9-83).
Figure 9-83 Cooling System Water Connections
7. Pull the gas unit partially out of its location (see Figure 9-84).
Note
Do not pull from the plastic rear cover; pull the gas unit from the
chassis frame.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-63

Figure 9-84 Pull Gas Unit Partially out of its Location
8. Remove rear cover by release 8 Allen screws (4 screws on each

side- see Figure 9-85).
Figure 9-85 Remove Rear Cover
9-64
Module Replacement
Figure 9-86 Move Support Bracket
9. Take the new gas unit from its crate and packaging (do not remove
the gas chiller from the cart yet), and remove the support bracket
from the gas unit by releasing 3 screws. Take the removed support
bracket and attach it in the same location to the faulty gas unit while
the gas unit is still inside the chassis (see Figure 9-87).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-65

Remove Bracket from New Gas Unit
Mount Bracket on Faulty Gas Unit
Figure 9-87 Remove and Mount Support Bracket
10. Refer to Figure 9-88: there are four locking tabs, 1 on each upper
and lower sliding track. Push each one in until the gas unit frame
disengages from the track.
Note
You may have to alternate between each of the locking tabs a few
times, because they cannot be unlocked simultaneously by a single
person.
9-66
Module Replacement
Figure 9-88 Sliding Tracks Locking Tabs
11. Firmly slide the gas unit out of its location and set it on the floor.
Important: Bend your legs and take care to support your back;
the gas unit is very heavy (see Figure 9-89)!
Note
The gas unit stands on its own with the support bracket.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-67

Figure 9-89 Removing Gas Unit from Chassis
12. Drain water from the gas unit. See ‘Draining Water from the Gas
Unit’ on page 9-15.
Installation
Note
Make sure the main power cable is unplugged from the main wall
power and that it is moved out the general rear area of the system.
Note
Make that the chiller received has a gas pressure of > 110 psi.
1. Pull the four sliding tracks out all as far as they will go.
Also make sure that the sliding rollers inside the track are pulled all
the way out (see Figure 9-90).
9-68
Module Replacement
Figure 9-90 Sliding Tracks
2. Refer to Figure 9-91: Align the gas unit with its cart straight in
front of the sliding track and insert the tracks into its corresponding
track groove.
Important: you may need to alternate inserting them,
realigning the gas unit until all four tracks are aligned, since
they cannot be aligned simultaneously. If you need to apply
more force to insert the track in its groove, use a small amount
of manual force at the plastic section of the track in order to fit
the track into its groove.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-69

Figure 9-91 Mounting New Gas Unit, Aligning on Tracks
3. Release the belt holding the gas unit on the cart (see Figure 9-92).
9-70
Module Replacement
Figure 9-92 Removing Belt from Gas Unit
4. Use the cart to roll the gas unit as close to the chassis as possible.
Use the side of your leg to hold it in place and lock the cart brakes.
When the cart fully engages on to the chassis, you will hear a
“click” (see Figure 9-93).
Figure 9-93 Engaging Gas Unit and Cart to Chassis
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-71

5. Refer to Figure 9-94: When the gas unit is fully engaged on its
sliding tacks and fully engaged with the system chassis, pull out the
two cart pins (1 on each side of the cart) and turn them a quarter
turn; this will release the cart’s support bar. Lower the support bar
to free the path for the gas unit to move into the system.
Figure 9-94 Lower Cart Supporting Bar
6. Pull the cart out from under the gas unit and remove it. The gas unit
is now being supported by the chassis and sliding tracks (see Figure
9-95).
9-72
Module Replacement
Figure 9-95 Remove Cart from under Gas Unit
Note
For the next step, make sure the four latches are in the open
position, and folded back, so as not to get in the way.
7. Firmly push the gas unit the rest of the way into its location, making
sure that it fully engages with the two communication plugs at the
back of the gas unit (see Figure 9-96).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-73

Figure 9-96 Engage Gas Unit to Connect with Plugs
8. Reconnect the grounding wire.

9. Reconnect the water tubes going to the gas unit.
10. Reassemble the rear cover.
11. Close the four metal latches to secure the gas unit.
12. Refill the cooling system with water (see ‘Filling the System with
Water’ on page 3-20).
13. After installation, go to the service Cooling screen and check
cooling pump and then chiller status OK.
9-74
Module Replacement
Packing the Gas Unit for Transportation

When returning a faulty gas unit to manufacturing, it is shipped with
the cart and the support bracket connected.
1. Verify that the package is clean, undamaged and without old labels.
2. The packed items include the gas unit assembled on top of the
chiller wagon + 2 units of HA-1002060 (Chiller rails). Attach the
rails to the wagon using adhesive tape.
3. Stabilize the chiller by positioning it on the center of the cart.
4. Secure the chiller on the wagon by using the straps.
5. Before packing the unit, verify there is no water in the evaporator
(for draining, use TA-1003275).
6. Make sure the pressure value is higher than 150 psi.
7. Position the crate door at the bottom of the crate to form a ramp and
carefully roll the unit into the crate. Make sure to tighten the
packing strap.
8. Close the crate door and latches on both sides. Secure the latches
with cable tie wraps.
9. Add labels on the crate as shown in the picture below.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-75

Figure 9-97 Placing Gas Unit on Cart
10. Fill out the Return Tag and attach it to the shipment documentation.
9.15.1 Modified Gas Unit Cart

The modified gas unit cart carries the same part number as the previous
cart, P/N SPSA-10033810. It has been modified for reduced cost and
easier usage.
The gas unit on the cart is shipped with a modified bracket as well.
9-76
Module Replacement
Figure 9-98 Modified Gas Unit Cart
The new cart is shipped together with the gas unit. The faulty gas unit
should be shipped back with the cart.
The following procedure describes the steps for using the new cart
when replacing the gas unit.
Note
Take care not to cause injury to your fingers; sections of this
procedure require use of hands with sharp metal materials, locking
and sliding mechanisms. Take care to use proper lifting techniques
to prevent back injury. The gas unit is very heavy!
1. Verify that there are no extra screws on the upper frame of the cart
(see Figure 9-99). If there are screws, remove them.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-77

Figure 9-99 Verify no Extra Screws
2. Verify that the sliding frame of the cart is at a height of 27 cm from

the floor (see Figure 9-100). This is important for easy alignment of
the chiller onto the tracks. If the cart is not at the correct height,
release the 8 Allen screws (2 on each corner of the frame, [B]) and
adjust the frame by sliding it up to the correct height.
Figure 9-100 Correct Height of Cart
3. Disconnect the system’s power cable from the main wall power
outlet.
4. Remove the bracket from the new gas unit by releasing the 3
Philips screws (seeFigure 9-101).
9-78
Module Replacement
Figure 9-101 Remove Bracket
5. Install the bracket onto the faulty gas unit (see Figure 9-102).
Figure 9-102 Install the Bracket
6. Remove the faulty gas unit (see‘Gas Unit Replacement’ on page 9-

60), setting the gas unit on the floor supported by the bracket.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-79

Figure 9-103 Removed Gas Unit with Bracket
7. Make sure that the new gas unit received has a gas pressure of >
110 psi.
8. Pull the four sliding tracks out all as far as they will go. Also make
sure that the sliding rollers inside the track are pulled all the way
out (see Figure 9-104).
Figure 9-104 Slide Tracks Out
9. Use the cart to roll the gas unit as close to the chassis as possible
and align the new gas unit with the cart straight in front of the
sliding tracks. If the chiller is still too low to be installed easily,
rotate the stoppers (see Figure 9-105) to further raise the height of
the cart.
9-80
Module Replacement
Figure 9-105 Rotate Stopper
10. Insert the tracks into its corresponding track groove.
Important: you may need to alternate inserting them,

realigning the gas unit until all four tracks are aligned,
since they cannot be aligned simultaneously. If you need
to apply more force to insert the track in its groove, use a
small amount of manual force at the plastic section of the
track in order to fit the track into its groove.
11. Release the belt holding the gas unit on the cart.
12. Use the side of your leg to hold it in place and lock the cart brakes.
When the cart fully engages onto the chassis, you will hear a click.
Figure 9-106 Install the New Gas Unit
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-81

13. Pull the cart out from under the gas unit and remove it. The gas unit
is now being supported by the chassis and sliding tracks (see Figure
9-107).
Figure 9-107 Remove Cart from Under Gas Unit
14. Make sure the four latches are in the open position, and folded
back, so as not to get in the way. Complete the installation of the
gas unit by following the steps in the service manual.
15. Place the faulty gas unit onto the cart and ship the faulty gas unit
together with the cart and bracket, back to Lumenis. Follow
instructions‘For Shipping the System outside the Facility’ on
page 3-59.
9.16 Cooling System Components

Replacement
9-82
Module Replacement
9.16.1 Particle Filter Replacement
Note
The particle filter should be replaced once a year.
The system uses deionized water only. Use the draining kit.
To replace the particle filter, do the following:

the main power.
t
2. Drain the water from the reservoir.

3. Remove the supporting bar (see Figure 9-110)
4. Press the handle to release any air from the particle filter.
5. Slightly loosen the particle filter housing by slightly twisting it
counter-clockwise from its cover.
6. Open the particle filter housing all the way and replace the filter.
Make sure that the upper surface of the filter is fully attached to the
blue housing cover.
handle
Figure 9-108 Replace Particle Filter
7. Disconnect the upper water tubes (from the chiller) and lower water
tubes (from the optical bench).
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-83

Figure 9-109 Water Tube Connections
8. Reassemble the particle filter housing. Make sure the housing filter
is fully threaded to the blue housing cover.
9. Refill the system with water (see ‘Filling the System with Water’ on
page 3-20).
9.16.2 Deionizer Filter Replacement
The deionizer filter should be replaced once a year.
Note
If this procedure is performed as a preventive maintenance activity,
the water must be drained from the system before performing this
procedure. If you wish to perform deionizer replacement only, water
draining is not necessary.
the main power.
2. Remove the supporting bar (see Figure 9-110).
9-84
Module Replacement
Figure 9-110 Remove Supporting Bar
3. Disconnect the quick-connector on the top and bottom of the

deionizer filter.
Figure 9-111 Deionizer Quick-Connectors
4. Cut the tie-wraps holding the deionizer onto the chassis.

5. Remove the deionizer.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-85

Figure 9-112 Remove Deionizer
6. Take the new deionizer and make note of the expiry date indicated
on it (shelf life of 1 year).
7. Install the deionizer in it place. Make sure the deionizer is situated
with the correct coolant flow direction, indicated by the arrow
pointing downward as shown.
FLOW
Figure 9-113 Deionizer Installation Direction
9-86
Module Replacement
8. Secure the deionizer with tie wraps.

9. Reconnect the quick-connectors.
10. Reassemble the supporting bar onto the chassis.
9.16.3 Water Tank Replacement

1. Remove the entire chiller from the chassis.
2. Remove the 10 screws of the unit frame.
Figure 9-114 Remove Metal Frame
3. With a ratchet, disconnect the lower large tube and blue connector
in back.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-87

9.16.4 Water Conductivity Sensor

1. Remove the entire Chiller unit from the chassis.
2. With an open wrench, remove the white connector.
3. When installing the water conductivity sensor, apply 16 rotations of
teflon tape before inserting back into the chassis.
Figure 9-115 Water Conductivity Sensor Replacement
9.17 Holmium Brick Replacement

The Holmium brick is made up of a flashlamp, crystal rod and
insulation components.
9-88
Module Replacement
Figure 9-116 Holmium Brick Parts Diagram
1. Open the optical bench (see‘Removing the Optical Bench Cover’ on

page 9-10).
2. Drain the water from the optical bench (see‘Draining Water from
the Optical Bench’ on page 9-13).
3. For Brick #1 or #2, do the following: disconnect the red wires of the
ferrites from the optical bench. Disconnect the black wires coming
from the EMI card.
Figure 9-117 Black Wires from EMI Card
4. For Brick #3 or #4, do the following: disconnect the HV wires

connected from the brick to the HV cabinet, and release the 4
screws holding the Brick to the pod base to gain access to the brick
screws.
5. Remove the brick by the releasing the four screws holding it to the
pod.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-89

Figure 9-118 Brick Removal
6. Go to Service Mode, Control Lasing Screen, and select Open Loop,

60J 15Hz for the brick that was replaced.
7. Fire the laser for 15 seconds and verify that no errors occur.
9.18 Flashlamp Replacement
Note
Wear Latex gloves when performing this procedure.
9.18.1 Removal
1. On the side of the red wire, remove the two screws at the flashlamp
end [A].
2. On the side of the black wire, remove the 2 outer screws and 2 inner
screws at the end block [B].
3. Remove the flashlamp by gently pulling it out.
9.18.2 Installation
1. Install a new O-ring and insulate end block on the side of the black
wire.
2. Carefully insert the red wire into the cavity assembly until the
flashlamp is visually centered within the cavity.
3. Install a new O-ring and insulate end block on the side of the red
wire [C].
4. Install the screws on both sides of the end blocks (but don’t tighten
them), and bend the black wire down 90°.
5. Install the insulation end block [D].
9-90
Module Replacement
Figure 9-119 Flashlamp Replacement
6. Go to Service Mode, Control Lasing Screen, and select Open Loop,

60J 15Hz for the brick that was replaced.
7. Fire the laser for 15 seconds and verify that no errors occur.
8. After replacing the flashlamp, reset the system counters (see
‘System Configuration Screen’ on page 6-72).
9. Turn on the system, go to service mode and verify that there is no
water leakage present.
10. Perform ‘Optical Alignment’ on page 7-2 for the relevant brick.
9.19 Crystal Rod Replacement
Note
Wear Latex gloves when performing this procedure.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-91

9.19.1 Removal
1. Remove the two screws on each side of the top of the flashlamp.
2. Push the crystal rod back and forth until the O-rings are loosened
and remove the crystal rod.
3. After replacing the rod, reset the system counters (see ‘System
Configuration Screen’ on page 6-72).
9.19.2 Installation
1. Take the new crystal rod out of its wrapping. Inspect the rod,
making sure there are no dark spots inside the rod. If dark spots are
found, use a different rod.
2. Refer to Figure 9-120: Wrap a small piece of transparent tape in a
cone shape on the end of the rod in order to avoid damaging the
phase.
Figure 9-120 Attaching Tape to Rod End
3. Refer to Figure 9-121: Insert the new crystal rod with the taped side
into the upper center hole of the brick until it comes out the other
side of the brick.
9-92
Module Replacement
Figure 9-121 Inserting the Rod
4. Refer to Figure 9-122: Take the 2 small white O- rings and insert
them onto the end without the tape. Use a cotton swab to push the
rod all the way into the phase.
Figure 9-122 Crystal Rod Replacement
5. Refer to Figure 9-123: Remove the tape from the other end of the
rod. Use acetone and methyl alcohol to clean the rod where the tape
was removed.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-93

Figure 9-123 Cleaning Rod End
6. After replacing the brick, reset the system counters (see ‘System
Configuration Screen’ on page 6-72).
9-94
Module Replacement
9.20 Fiber Focus Assembly and Lens

Replacement
Note
Need to wear protective gloves.
1. Open the front, side and top covers (see ‘Covers’ on page 9-1)
2. Remove the blastshield.
3. Unscrew and remove the fiber focus assembly cover.
Figure 9-124 Remove Fiber Focus Assembly Cover
4. Release three Allen screws from the fiber focus assembly.
Figure 9-125 Fiber Focus Assembly
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-95

5. Release the tie wraps and disconnect the harness as shown in

Figure 9-126.
Figure 9-126 Disconnect Harness
6. Attach the removal tool and pull the fiber focus assembly out.
Figure 9-127 Use Tool to Remove Fiber Focus Assembly
9-96
Module Replacement
Lens Replacement
1. Release 3 screws to remove the outer ring holding the lens inside
the fiber focus assembly.
Figure 9-128 Remove Lens Outer Ring
2. Remove the inner ring holding the lens inside the fiber focus
assembly.
Figure 9-129 Remove Lens Inner Ring
3. Remove the lens from the fiber focus assembly.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-97

Figure 9-130 Remove Lens
Note
When removing the lens, take note of the order of lens components
in the lens housing so that you can install them back in the correct
order: After the screws, remove the lens retainer, wave washer, rear
spacer, and lens.
Figure 9-131 Len Housing Components
9-98
Module Replacement
4. Install the new lens such that the rounded side is facing the lens
(use the V arrow on the side of the lens to orient the lens to face the
laser).
Figure 9-132 Fiber Focus Lens Orientation Arrow
5. Install the rest of the lens components in reverse order according to

Figure 9-131.
6. After replacing the lens, perform Far and Near Field alignment.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 9-99

9-100
C H A P T E R
SPARE PARTS CATALOG
10.1 Introduction
Each section contains a list of the parts that are relevant to that section
and their respective part numbers. In most cases the tables are preceded
by appropriate illustrations, as shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Spare Parts List Example
The Item column of the table indicates the item number as shown in the
preceding illustration. The letters NS indicate that the item is not shown
in the illustration. The Description column provides the item's name
and/or a brief description. The Part No. column offers the item's part
number, by which it should be ordered from Lumenis.
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-1

10.2 Electronic Components
1 2
4
3
11
10
7
5 6
9
8
Figure 10-2 Electronic Components
10-2
Spare Parts Catalog
Item Description Part Number

1 Main Controller PCB (MMCU) SPEA-10000452
2 Switching Module, New SPSA-1143881
Switching Module, Reconditioned RSPSA-1143881
3 AC Board (for 1-phase Configuration) SPEA-1149580
4 Kit, LPU + Hard Disk, New KT-10006900
Kit, LPU + Hard Disk, Refurbished RKT-10006900
5 SIS Board SPSA-10028940
6 SIS Antenna Assembly SPSA-10028960
7 Safety IGBT Module, New SPSA-1143921
Safety IGBT Module, Reconditioned RSPSA-1143921
8 HV PMCU, New SPSA-1149501
HV PMCU, Reconditioned RSPSA-1149501
9 Motherboard PCB SPEA-1146231
10 Fuse, 0.8A 400V (x10 per package) SPFU-000058
11 Hard Disk (with Image 1.7.4 and LPU 2.0.1.7) SPEL-1005419
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-3

12
13 14
16
15 17
18 19
20
21
Figure 10-3 Electronic Components [2]
10-4
Spare Parts Catalog

12 DC/DC Card SPEA-10014610
13 24V LVPS, Lambda type (for system series 007 and up) SPEL-1005700
14 Upgrade Kit to Lambda type LVPS SPSA-10013991
15 ON/Off Switch SPHS-10003070
16 Emergency Stop SPHS-10003100
17 Main TRAFO 1 Phase SPSA-10038870
18 Charger (new) SPSA-10013960
Charger (refurbished) RSPSA-10013960
19 Capacitor Bank + Discharge PCB SPSA-10075730
20 Speaker Assembly SPHS-10019710
21 Suction PCB SPEA-10009820
NS Cooling Fuse, 15A SPFU-2006754
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-5

21 22
25
24
23
26 30 31
27 28
29
Figure 10-4 Electrical Components [3]
10-6
Spare Parts Catalog

21 Suction Pump Assembly SPSA-10020410
22 Suction Pump Head SPMP-1002558
23 Display Assembly SPSA-10020500
24 Keyswitch Harness SPHS-10003090
25 Main Contactor 50/60Hz (120W and 100W) SPSA-10019530
26 AC Inlet Transformer SPSA-10037330
27 IGBT Output Harness SPHS-10002790
28 IGBT Input Harness SPHS-10002250
29 Capacitor Bank Harness SPHS-10001930
30 Internal Harness, Footswitch SPHS-10002530
31 Circuit Breaker for 60Hz 30A 5108-0147
Circuit Breaker SPEL0000150
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-7

10.3 Display
Figure 10-5 Display

1 Display Assembly SPSA-10020500
2 Display Assembly, including Rotating Arm, screen plate SPSA-10037780
assembly, retractor chain, and harness
10-8
Spare Parts Catalog
10.4 Spare Parts, 3-Phase Configuration
1 2
Figure 10-6 Spare Parts, 3-Phase Configuration

1 AC Board, 3-Phase SPEA-10077840
2 Main Trafo, 3-Phase SPSA-10063270
3 Charger, 3-Phase SPSA-10081450
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-9

10.5 Optics
6
3
(x4)
Figure 10-7 Optics [1]
10-10
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Mirror, 45 Degree, Folding (x2) 0623-497-01
2 Resonator Mirror OC (Front Mirror) SPOP-1092750
3 OC Assembly SP-1027140
4 HR Resonator Mirror (Rear Mirror) OP-1088120
5 HR Assembly SP-1027150
6 SRM Mirror OP0002120
7 FRM SP0623-494-02
8 Wedge, Beam Pickoff, dual wavelength 0636-799-01
9 Flash Lamp Kit SPEL-1002105
10 Brick with Lamp Only (V2 Configuration) SPSA-2001808
Brick with Lamp Only, MOSES SPSA-20089460
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-11

11
18
19
15
20 21 22
10-12
Spare Parts Catalog

11 Brick with Rod and Lamp (V2 Configuration) SPSA-20007020
Brick with Rod and Lamp, MOSES SPSA-20089020
12 Rod 2120 (HO) SP0626-880-01
13 Solenoid for Dual Method 0635-899-01
14 Solenoid for Single Method 0635-898-01
15 Mirror pickoff 0626-994-01
16 Beam attenuator for Dual Method 0623-500-01
17 Beam attenuator for Single Method 0623-500-02
18 Blade, Shutter attenuator/alignment 0619-282-01
19 Blade, Main Safety Shutter SPMM-1252537
20 Attenuator Board SPEA-10000460
21 Pyro Board SPEA-10000471
Pyro Board, MOSES SPEA-10000472
22 MM (Mirror Motor) Control Board SPEA-10000481
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-13

23 24
26 27 28
25
30
29 31
33
32
34
36
35
10-14
Spare Parts Catalog

23 Lamp Ignition Board SPEA-1143931
24 Servo Motor SPHS-10032260
25 Blast Shield Optic SPOP-10025270
26 Blast Shield SPSA-10024550
27 Lens for Fiber Power Assy SPOP-10026770
28 Lens Cell Assy for Holmium SPSA-10029660
29 Servo Mirror SPSA-10029810
30 Manifold Optical Bench SPSA-10032440
31 Beam Combiner SPSA-1001580
32 Aiming Beam (up to and including S/N 012) HS-1057100
Aiming, Beam SPEL-2000663
(V2 Configuration, from System S/N 020 and up)
33 Blast shield switch 0638-740-01
34 Humidity and Temperature Sensor SPEL0000786
35 Pyro Harness SPHS-10002810
36 Optical Internal Harness SPHS-10003010
NS SIS Internal Harness SPHS-10019790
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-15

10.6 Cooling System

1 2 2.1
3
4
5,6
7
8
9
10
Figure 10-10 Cooling System Components
10-16
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Water Pump Assembly SPSA-10005440
2 Water Reservoir SPSA-10005430
2.1 Air Valve SPMM-1080440
3 Conductivity sensor SPSA-10005480
4 Flow Switch SPSA-10005460
5 Gas Cooling (50Hz), New SPSA-1147300
Gas Cooling (50Hz), Reconditioned RSPSA-1147300
Gas Cooling (60Hz 30A, New SPNSA-20109650
6 Gas cooling (60Hz), New SPSA-10031210
Gas cooling (60Hz), Reconditioned RSPSA-10031210
7 Filter Cartridge (without housing) 2603-0147
7.1 Filter Cartridge (housing included) SPSA-10005450
8 FRU, D.I. Water 0638-763-01
9 Chiller Fan SPHS-10029130
10 Relay for pump On/Off Switch SPEL-1000654
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-17

10.7 User Replacements
2 3
4
Figure 10-11 User Replacements
10-18
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Foot Switch SPSA-10020630
2 Spare Key HA0000129
3 Interlock Plug HS-1035450
4 Safety Glasses for 120W Ho. AX-1002033
5 Arm Assy Kit KT-1004107
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-19

10.8 Covers and Chassis Parts

2
1
3 4
7
5
6
8 9
Figure 10-12 Covers and Chassis Parts
10-20
Spare Parts Catalog
10 11
12
13 14

1 Top Cover Assembly SPSA-10018170
2 Top Cover - rear part only SPSA-10017980
3 Left Side Cover SPSA-10024510
4 Right Side Cover SPSA-10024480
5 Front Upper Cover SPSA-10011640
Front Upper Cover with Moses Logo SPSA-20080300
6 Front Cover Assembly SPSA-10024500
7 Rear Connector Panel SPSA-10017860
8 Front Wheels Kit (wheels only) SPSA-10018890
9 Back Wheels Kit SPSA-10018900
10 Slider for Fiber Port SPMI-10011440
11 Latch, Door (right and left cover) SPHA-1002061
12 Blast Shield Door SPSA-10017450
13 Power Cord (1-Phase, international) SPHS-10052390
14 Power Cord (1-Phase, Domestic) SPHS-10019750
Power Cord (1-Phase, Domestic, 60Hz 30A) SPSA-20100720
P
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-21

10.9 Special Tools

2
3
5
4
6 7
8 9
11
10
Figure 10-13 Tools [1]
10-22
Spare Parts Catalog

1 Refill and Drain Tool (for P120 and P20) TA-1003275
2 Additional tubing KT-1003403
(for assembly onto existing P20 refill and drain tool)
3 Transimpedance Detector tool 0614-868-51
4 Crosshair Target 0621-131-51
5 Fixture Alignment Servo 0622-782-51
6 Aperture 10 mm 0622-919-51
7 Microscope x 100 0622-921-02
8 SIS Long Test Fiber 0644-034-01
9 SIS Short Test Fiber 0644-035-01
10 Short Test Fiber (no SIS) 0621-675-01
11 Long Test Fiber (no SIS) 0623-973-01
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-23

12 13 14
12.1
16
15
17 18
19
20
Figure 10-14 Tools [2]
10-24
Spare Parts Catalog

12 Fiber Alignment Tool TA-1074050
12.1 Tool, fiber optic, 50 micron OP7205100
13 Fiber 200 Micron (Part of 0641-868-01) 0615-103-51
14 Water Conductivity Meter SP-1000381
15 Burn Paper 3207-0091
16 Fiber focus removal tool 0637-822-51
17 Diode Backlight Tool 0624-042-51
18 Tool for laser alignment to adjust the OC and HR SP0638-497-51
19 Chiller cart SPSA-10033810
20 Service HASP SP-1004286
NS Software Upgrade Package 2.0.1.7 with Image 1.7.4 SP-0002017
(USB memory stick)
SM-0006900 Rev. G 10-25

10-26

SM-0006900 - G Pulse 120H Service Manual 27dec2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM-0006900 - G Pulse 120H Service Manual 27dec2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM-0006900 - G Pulse 120H Service Manual 27dec2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Holmium Surgical Laser

This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under copyright

Caution: U.S. law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a

This manual has been prepared to aid Lumenis-authorized technical personnel to

Authorized Representative in the European Community:

Lumenis GmbH, Germany

Tel: +49 (0) 6103-8335-0

Manufactured by Lumenis Ltd.

Tel: +972(0) 4-959-9000

SM-0006900 Rev. G iii

Addition of Gas Unit Replacement,

Addition of 3-Phase configuration,

Added Section 1.1.1 FSE Work

Revised Section 2.10 Warning,

Revised Section 3.8 Installation

Updated Section 7.2.8 Far

Updated Chapter 10 Spare Parts

Updated CE Notified Body to 0483

Updated Section 2.10, Warning,

SM-0006900 E Updated Section 6.8 Software June, 2017

Added Section 6.9 Image Update -

Updated Chapter 10, Spare Parts

Update Section 2.10 Warning,

Add Section 2.11 EMC

Add Section5.17 Moses

Update Section 6.11 New Shell

Add Section 7.9 Suction Test

SM-0006900 F Update Section 8.4 Error February, 2018

Add Section 8.7 HASP Reader

Add Section 8.10

Update Chapter 10,

Update Section2.11 EMC

Update Section 3.6.4

Add Section4.11 Performance

Add Section9.20 Fiber Focus

Update Spare Parts Catalog

SM-0006900 Rev. G vii

1.2 Manual Conventions.................................................................................... 1-4

1.3 Applicable Documents................................................................................. 1-4

1.4 Abbreviations and Acronyms ...................................................................... 1-5

2.2 Laser Safety Guidelines............................................................................... 2-2

2.3 Understanding and Controlling Laser Impact on Tissue ............................. 2-2

2.4 Hazards Associated with Unsafe Laser Use ................................................ 2-5

2.5 Reflection and Direct Eye Exposure Hazard ............................................... 2-6

2.6 System Safety Features.............................................................................. 2-14

2.6.10 Safety Interlocks .......................................................................................2-17

2.7 Safety Redundancy .................................................................................... 2-18

2.8 Laser Safety - User Indications.................................................................. 2-19

2.9 Internal Safety Checks............................................................................... 2-19

2.10 Warning, Certification, and Identification Labels ..................................... 2-22

2.11 EMC Compliance ...................................................................................... 2-26

Chapter 3: Installation and

3.2 Required Tools............................................................................................. 3-3

3.3 Facility Requirements.................................................................................. 3-3

3.4 Unpacking the Unit...................................................................................... 3-8

3.5 System Setup and Installation.................................................................... 3-11

3.6 Main Plug Connection ............................................................................... 3-17

3.7 Initial System Testing ................................................................................ 3-36

3.8 Installation Report ..................................................................................... 3-49